Bidding Document Contract No: Crip/Works/Rda/Ncb/328

THE DEMOCRATIC SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF SRI LANKA MINISTRY OF ROADS & HIGHWAYS

ROAD DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY CLIMATE RESILIENCE IMPROVEMENT PROJECT

SUPPLY & FIXING HIGH TENSILE WIRE MESH AND RELATED ACCESORIES IN THE UNSTABLE SLOPE SEGMENTS BETWEEN CULVERT NO 75/5 TO 76/4 ON PERADENIYA - BADULLA - CHENKALADI ROAD (A005) ROAD

BIDDING DOCUMENT CONTRACT NO: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

04th December 2019

Table of Contents

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ...... 02

Section I Instructions to Bidders ...... 03 Section II Bid Data Sheets ...... 30 Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria ...... 38 Section IV Bidding Forms ...... 51 Section V Bidder’s Qualifications ...... 78

PART 2 – Employer’s Requirements ...... 96

Section VI Employer’s Requirements ...... 97

PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms ...... 310

Section VII General Conditions of Contract ...... 311 Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract ...... 336 Section IX Contract Forms...... 346

PART 1 -BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section I - Instructions to Bidders

Table of Contents

Clause Page

A General ...... 07

1. Scope of Bid ...... 07 2. Source of Funds ...... 07 3. Fraud and Corruption ...... 07 4. Eligible Bidders ...... 10 5. Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services ...... 12

B Content of Bidding Document ...... 12

6. Sections of Bidding Document ...... 12 7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting ...... 13 8. Amendment of Bidding Document ...... 14

C Preparation of Bids ...... 14

9. Cost of Bidding ...... 14 10. Language of Bid ...... 14 11. Documents Comprising the Bid ...... 15 12. Letter of Bid and Schedules ...... 15 13. Alternative Bid ...... 15 14. Bid Prices and Discounts ...... 16 15. Currencies of Bid and Payment ...... 17 16. Documents Comprising the Technical Proposal ...... 17 17 Documents Establishing the Qualification of the Bidder ...... 17 18. Period of Validity of Bids ...... 17 19. Bid Security ...... 18 20. Format and Signing of Bid ...... 20

D Submission and Opening of Bids ...... 20

21. Sealing and Marking of Bids ...... 20 22. Deadline for Submission of Bids ...... 21 23. Late Bids ...... 21 24. Withdrawal, Substitution and Modification of Bids ...... 21 25. Bid Opening ...... 22

E Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ...... 22

26. Confidentiality ...... 23 27. Clarification of Bids ...... 23 28. Deviations, Reservations and Omissions ...... 24 29. Determination of Responsiveness ...... 24 30. Nonconformities, Errors and Omissions ...... 25 31. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ...... 25 32. Conversion to Single Currency ...... 26 33. Margin of Preference ...... 26 34. Evaluation of Bids...... 26 35. Comparison of Bids ...... 27 36. Qualification of the Bidder ...... 28 37. Employer’s Right to Accept Any Bid and to Reject Any or All Bids ...... 28

F Award of Contract ...... 28

38. Award Criteria ...... 28 39. Notification of Award ...... 29 40. Signing of Contract ...... 29 41. Performance Security ...... 29 42. Adjudicator ...... 29

Section I - Instructions to Bidders

A. General 1. Scope of Bid 1.1 The Employer, as indicated in the Bid Data Sheets (BDS), issues this Bidding Document for the procurement of the Works as specified in Section VI (Employer’s Requirements). The name, identification, and number of contracts for this bid are provided in the BDS.

1.2 Throughout this Bidding Document: (a) the term “in writing” means communicated in written form and delivered against receipt; (b) except where the context requires otherwise, words indicating the singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include the singular; and (c) “day” means calendar day.

2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called “Borrower”) indicated in the BDS has applied for or received financing (hereinafter called “funds”) from the World Bank (hereinafter called “the Bank”) toward the cost of the project named in the BDS. The Borrower intends to apply a portion of the funds to eligible payments under the contract(s) for which this Bidding Document is issued.

2.2 Payments by the Bank will be made only at the request of the Borrower and upon approval by the Bank in accordance with the terms and conditions of the financing agreement between the Borrower and the Bank (hereinafter called the Loan Agreement), and will be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of that Loan Agreement. No party other than the Borrower shall derive any rights from the Loan Agreement or have any claim to the funds.

3. Fraud and 3.1 It is the Bank’s policy to require that Borrowers Corruption (including beneficiaries of Bank loans), as well as bidders, suppliers, and contractors and their subcontractors under Bank-financed contracts, observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement

and execution of such contracts.1 In pursuance of this policy, the Bank: (a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows: (i) “corrupt practice”2 is the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party; (ii) “fraudulent practice”3 is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation; (iii) “collusive practice”4 is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of another party; (iv) “coercive practice”5 is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence improperly the actions of a party; (v) "obstructive practice" is (aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice; and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing

1 In this context, any action taken by a bidder, supplier, contractor, or a sub-contractor to influence the procurement process or contract execution for undue advantage is improper. 2 “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions. 3 a “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract execution. 4 “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 5 a “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution. 7

its knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the investigation; or (bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under sub- clause 3.1 (e) below. (b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices in competing for the contract in question; (c) will cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a beneficiary of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices during the procurement or the execution of that contract, without the Borrower having taken timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to address such practices when they occur; (d) will sanction a firm or individual, including declaring ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be awarded a Bank- financed contract if it at any time determines that the firm has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Bank-financed contract; and (e) will have the right to require that a provision be included in bidding documents and in contracts financed by a Bank loan, requiring bidders, suppliers, and contractors and their subcontractors to permit the Bank to inspect their accounts and records and other documents relating to the bid submission and contract performance and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.

3.2 Furthermore, bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in the General Conditions of Contract (GCC) Sub-Clauses 22.2 and 56.2 (h).

4. Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or government-owned entity—subject to Instructions to Bidders (ITB) 4.6—or any combination of them in the form of a joint venture, under an existing agreement, or with the intent to constitute a legally-enforceable joint venture. Unless otherwise stated in the BDS, all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms.

4.2 A Bidder, and all parties constituting the Bidder, shall have the nationality of an eligible country, in accordance with Section 5 (Eligible Countries). A Bidder shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder is a citizen or is constituted, or incorporated, and operates in conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country. This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the nationality of proposed subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including related services.

4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All Bidders found to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may be considered to have a conflict of interest with one or more parties in this bidding process, if: (a) they have a controlling partner in common; or (b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any of them; or (c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of this bid; or (d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or through common third parties, that puts them in a position to have access to information about or influence on the Bid of another Bidder, or influence the decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding process; or (e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this bidding process. Participation by a Bidder in more than one Bid will result in the disqualification of all Bids in which the party is involved. However, this does not limit the inclusion of the same subcontractor in more than one bid; or (f) a Bidder or any of its affiliates participated as a consultant in the preparation of the design or technical specifications of the contract that is the 9

subject of the Bid; or (g) a Bidder, or any of its affiliates has been hired (or is proposed to be hired) by the Employer or Borrower as Engineer for the contract.

4.4 A firm that is under a declaration of ineligibility by the Bank in accordance with ITB 3 or by the Employer in accordance with ITB 19.8, at the date of the deadline for bid submission or thereafter, shall be disqualified.

4.5 A firm that has been determined to be ineligible by the Bank in relation to the Bank Guidelines on Preventing and Combating Fraud and Corruption in Projects Financed by IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants shall be not be eligible to be awarded a contract.

4.6 Government-owned enterprises in the Employer’s country shall be eligible only if they can establish that they are legally and financially autonomous and operate under commercial law, and that they are not a dependent agency of the Employer.

4.7 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibility satisfactory to the Employer, as the Employer shall reasonably request.

4.8 In case a prequalification process has been conducted prior to the bidding process, this bidding is open only to prequalified Bidders.

4.9 Firms shall be excluded if: (a) as a matter of law or official regulation, the Borrower’s country prohibits commercial relations with that country, provided that the Bank is satisfied that such exclusion does not preclude effective competition for the supply of goods or related services required; or

(b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations, the Borrower’s country prohibits any import of goods or contracting of works or services from that country or any payments to persons or entities in that country.

5. Eligible 5.1 The materials, equipment and services to be supplied Materials, under the Contract shall have their origin in eligible Equipment and source countries as defined in ITB 4.2 above and all Services expenditures under the Contract will be limited to such materials, equipment and services. At the Employer’s request, Bidders may be required to provide evidence of the origin of materials, equipment and services.

5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place where the materials and equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from which the services are provided. Materials and equipment are produced when, through manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major assembling of components, a commercially recognized product results that differs substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its components.

B. Contents of Bidding Document

6. Sections of 6.1 The Bidding Document consist of Parts 1, 2and3, which Bidding include all the Sections indicated below, and should be Document read in conjunction with any Addenda issued in accordance with ITB 8. PART 1 Bidding Procedures Section I Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Section II Bid Data Sheet (BDS) Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria Section IV Bidding Forms Section V Bidder’s Qualification PART 2 Requirements Section VI Employer’s Requirements PART 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms Section VII General Conditions of Contract (GCC) Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC) Section IX Contract Forms

6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not part of the Bidding Document.

6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the Bidding Document and their Addenda, if they were not obtained directly from the source stated by the

Employer in the Invitation for Bids.

6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms and specifications in the Bidding Document. Failure to furnish all information or documentation required by the Bidding Document may result in the rejection of the bid. 7. Clarification of 7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Bidding Document shall contact the Employer in writing Document, Site at the Employer’s address indicated in the BDS or raise Visit, Pre-Bid his inquiries during the pre-bid meeting if provided for Meeting in accordance with ITB 7.4. The Employer will respond in writing to any request for clarification, provided that such request is received prior to the deadline for submission of bids, within a period given in the BDS. The Employer shall forward copies of its response to all Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3, including a description of the inquiry but without identifying its source. Should the Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding Document as a result of a request for clarification, it shall do so following the procedure under ITB 8 and ITB 22.2.

7.2 The Bidder is encouraged to visit and examine the Site

of Works and its surroundings and obtain for itself, on its own risk and responsibility, all information that may be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a contract for construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.

7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be

granted permission by the Employer to enter upon its premises and lands for the purpose of such visit, but only upon the express condition that the Bidder, its personnel, and agents will release and indemnify the Employer and its personnel and agents from and against all liability in respect thereof, and will be responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to property, and any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses incurred as a result of the inspection.

7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting, if provided for in the BDS. The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at that stage.

7.5 The Bidder is requested, as far as possible, to submit any questions in writing, to reach the Employer not later than one week before the meeting.

7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the questions raised, without identifying the source, and the responses given, together with any responses prepared after the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to all Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3. Any modification to the Bidding Document that may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an addendum pursuant to ITB 8 and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.

7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a Bidder.

8. Amendment of 8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, Bidding the Employer may amend the Bidding Document by Document issuing addenda.

8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Document and shall be communicated in writing to all who have obtained the Bidding Document from the Employer in accordance with ITB 6.3.

8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into account in preparing their bids, the Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of bids, pursuant to ITB 22.2.

C. Preparation of Bids

9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of its Bid, and the Employer shall in no case be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

10. Language of Bid 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be written in the language specified in the BDS. Supporting documents and printed literature that are part of the Bid may be in another language provided they are accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in the language 13

specified in the BDS, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.

11. Documents 11.1 The Bid shall comprise the following: Comprising the Bid (a) Letter of Bid; (b) completed Schedules, in accordance with ITB 12 and 14, or as stipulated in the BDS; (c) Bid Security or Bid Securing Declaration, in accordance with ITB 19; (d) alternative bids, at Bidder’s option and if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13; (e) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to commit the Bidder, in accordance with ITB 20.2; (f) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 17 establishing the Bidder’s qualifications to perform the contract; (g) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 16;

(h) in the case of a bid submitted by a joint venture (JV), the JV agreement, or letter of intent to enter into a JV including a draft agreement, indicating at least the parts of the Works to be executed by the respective partners; and (i) any other document required in the BDS.

12. Letter of Bid and 12.1 The Letter of Bid, Schedules, and all documents listed Schedules under Clause 11, shall be prepared using the relevant forms in Section IV (Bidding Forms), if so provided. The forms must be completed without any alterations to the text, and no substitutes shall be accepted. All blank spaces shall be filled in with the information requested.

13. Alternative Bids 13.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, alternative bids shall not be considered.

13.2 When alternative times for completion are explicitly invited, a statement to that effect will be included in the BDS, as will the method of evaluating different times for completion.

13.3 When specified in the BDS pursuant to ITB 13.1, and subject to ITB 13.4 below, Bidders wishing to offer technical alternatives to the requirements of the Bidding Document must first price the Employer’s design as

described in the Bidding Document and shall further provide all information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternative by the Employer, including drawings, design calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, and proposed construction methodology and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated Bidder conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be considered by the Employer.

13.4 When specified in the BDS, Bidders are permitted to submit alternative technical solutions for specified parts of the Works. Such parts will be identified in the BDS and described in Section VI (Employer’s Requirements). The method for their evaluation will be stipulated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

14. Bid Prices and 14.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Bidder in the Discounts Letter of Bid and in the Schedules, shall conform to the requirements specified below.

14.2 The Bidder shall submit a bid for the whole of the works described in ITB 1.1 by filling in prices for all items of the Works, as identified in Section IV (Bidding Forms). In case of admeasurements contracts, the Bidder shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the Bill of Quantities. Items against which no rate or price is entered by the Bidder will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed covered by the rates for other items and prices in the Bill of Quantities.

14.3 The price to be quoted in the Letter of Bid shall be the total price of the Bid, excluding any discounts offered.

14.4 Unconditional discounts, if any, and the methodology for their application shall be quoted in the Letter of Bid, in accordance with ITB 12.1.

14.5 If so indicated in ITB 1.1, bids are invited for individual contracts or for any combination of contracts (packages). Bidders wishing to offer any price reduction for the award of more than one Contract shall specify in their bid the price reductions applicable to each package, or alternatively, to individual Contracts within the package. Price reductions or discounts shall be submitted in accordance with ITB 14.3, provided the bids for all contracts are submitted and opened at the same time.

14.6 Unless otherwise provided in the BDS and the Conditions of Contract, the prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed. If the prices quoted by the Bidder are subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract in accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of Contract, the Bidder shall furnish the indices and weightings for the price adjustment formulae in the Schedule of Adjustment Data in Section IV (Bidding Forms) and the Employer may require the Bidder to justify its proposed indices and weightings.

14.7 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or for any other cause, as of the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids, shall be included in the rates and prices and the total bid price submitted by the Bidder.

15. Currencies of 15.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be as specified in the Bid and Payment BDS.

15.2 Bidders may be required by the Employer to justify, to the Employer’s satisfaction, their local and foreign currency requirements, and to substantiate that the amounts included in the prices shown in the appropriate form(s) of Section IV, in which case a detailed breakdown of the foreign currency requirements shall be provided by Bidders.

16. Documents 16.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including Comprising the a statement of work methods, equipment, personnel, Technical schedule and any other information as stipulated in Proposal Section IV (Bidding Forms), in sufficient detail to demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to meet the work requirements and the completion time.

17. Documents 17.1 To establish its qualifications to perform the Contract in Establishing the accordance with Section III (Evaluation and Qualifications of Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the the Bidder information requested in the corresponding information sheets included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).

17.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures, applying for eligibility for a 7½-percent margin of domestic preference shall supply all information required to satisfy the criteria for eligibility as described in ITB 33.

18. Period of 18.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the Validity of Bids BDS after the bid submission deadline date prescribed by the Employer. A bid valid for a shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive.

18.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validity period, the Employer may request Bidders to extend the period of validity of their bids. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. If a bid security is requested in accordance with ITB 19, it shall also be extended for a corresponding period. A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting its bid security. A Bidder granting the request shall not be required or permitted to modify its bid.

18.3 In the case of fixed price contracts, if the award is delayed by a period exceeding fifty-six (56) days beyond the expiry of the initial bid validity, the Contract price shall be adjusted by a factor specified in the request for extension. Bid evaluation shall be based on the Bid Price without taking into consideration the above correction.

19. Bid Security 19.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Bidder shall furnish as part of its bid, in original form, either a Bid Securing Declaration or a bid security as specified in the BDS. In the case of a bid security, the amount shall be as specified in the BDS.

19.2 A Bid Securing Declaration shall use the form included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).

19.3 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the bid security shall be, at the Bidder’s option, in any of the following forms:

(a) An unconditional guarantee, issued by a bank or surety; (b) an irrevocable letter of credit; (c) a cashier’s or certified cheque; or (d) another security indicated in the BDS. from a reputable source from an eligible country. If the unconditional guarantee is issued by an insurance company or bonding company located outside the Employer’s Country, it shall have a correspondent financial institution located in the Employer’s Country. In the case of a bank guarantee, the bid security shall be submitted either using the Bid Security Form included in Section IV (Bidding Forms) or in another substantially

similar format approved by the Employer prior to bid submission. In either case, the form must include the complete name of the Bidder. The bid security shall be valid for twenty-eight days (28) beyond the original validity period of the bid, or beyond any period of extension if requested under ITB 18.2.

19.4 Any bid not accompanied by an enforceable and substantially compliant bid security or Bid Securing Declaration, if required in accordance with ITB 19.1, shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive.

19.5 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the bid security of unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned as promptly as possible upon the successful Bidder’s furnishing of the performance security pursuant to ITB 41.

19.6 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the bid security of the successful Bidder shall be returned as promptly as possible once the successful Bidder has signed the Contract and furnished the required performance security.

19.7 The Bid Security may be forfeited or the Bid Securing Declaration executed: (a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid, except as provided in ITB 18.2 or (b) if the successful Bidder fails to: (i) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 40; or (ii) furnish a performance security in accordance with ITB 41. 19.8 The Bid Security or the Bid Securing Declaration of a JV shall be in the name of the JV that submits the bid. If the JV has not been constituted into a legally- enforceable JV, at the time of bidding, the Bid Security or the Bid Securing Declaration shall be in the names of all future partners as named in the letter of intent mentioned in ITB 4.1.

19.9 If a Bid Security is not required in the BDS, and (a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid Form, except as provided in ITB 18.2, or

(b) if the successful Bidder fails to: sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 40; or furnish a 18

performance security in accordance with ITB 41;

the Borrower may, if provided for in the BDS, declare the Bidder disqualified to be awarded a contract by the Employer for a period of time as stated in the BDS.

20. Format and 20.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents Signing of Bid comprising the bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly mark it “ORIGINAL”. Alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, shall be clearly marked “ALTERNATIVE”. In addition, the Bidder shall submit copies of the bid in the number specified in the BDS, and clearly mark each of them “COPY.” In the event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original shall prevail.

20.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the BDS and shall be attached to the bid. The name and position held by each person signing the authorization must be typed or printed below the signature.

20.3 Any amendments such as interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

21. Sealing and 21.1 Bidders may always submit their bids by mail or by Marking of Bids hand. When so specified in the BDS, bidders shall have the option of submitting their bids electronically. Procedures for submission, sealing and marking are as follows: (a) Bidders submitting bids by mail or by hand shall enclose the original and each copy of the Bid, including alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, in separate sealed envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as “ORIGINAL”, “ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY.” These envelopes containing the original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one single envelope. The rest of the procedure shall be in accordance with

ITB sub-Clauses 22.2 and 22.3. (b) Bidders submitting bids electronically shall follow the electronic bid submission procedures specified in the BDS.

21.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall: (a) Bear the name and address of the Bidder;

(b) be addressed to the Employer as provided in the BDS pursuant to ITB 22.1;

(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date for bid opening.

21.3 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the Employer will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid.

22. Deadline for 22.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address Submission of and no later than the date and time indicated in the Bids BDS.

22.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of bids by amending the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 8, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and Bidders previously subject to the deadline shall thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.

23. Late Bids 23.1 The Employer shall not consider any bid that arrives after the deadline for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22. Any bid received by the Employer after the deadline for submission of bids shall be declared late, rejected, and returned unopened to the Bidder.

24. Withdrawal, 24.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid Substitution, and after it has been submitted by sending a written notice, Modification of duly signed by an authorized representative, and shall Bids include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITB 20.2, (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies). The corresponding substitution or modification of the bid must accompany the respective written notice. All notices must be: (a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 20 and ITB 21 (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies), and in addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly marked “WITHDRAWAL,” 20

“SUBSTITUTION,” “MODIFICATION;” and

(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22.

24.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 24.1 shall be returned unopened to the Bidders.

24.3 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the interval between the deadline for submission of bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid or any extension thereof.

25. Bid Opening 25.1 The Employer shall open the bids in public at the address, date and time specified in the BDS in the presence of Bidders` designated representatives and anyone who choose to attend. Any specific electronic bid opening procedures required if electronic bidding is permitted in accordance with ITB 21.1, shall be as specified in the BDS.

25.2 First, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read out and the envelope with the corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless the corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at bid opening. Next, envelopes marked “SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened and read out and exchanged with the corresponding bid being substituted, and the substituted bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder. No bid substitution shall be permitted unless the corresponding substitution notice contains a valid authorization to request the substitution and is read out at bid opening. Envelopes marked “MODIFICATION” shall be opened and read out with the corresponding bid. No bid modification shall be permitted unless the corresponding modification notice contains a valid authorization to request the modification and is read out at bid opening. Only envelopes that are opened and read out at bid opening shall be considered further.

25.3 All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time, reading out: the name of the Bidder and the Bid Price(s), including any discounts and alternative bids and indicating whether there is a modification; the presence of a Bid Security or Bid Securing Declaration, if required; and any other details as the Employer may 21

consider appropriate. Only discounts and alternative offers read out at bid opening shall be considered for evaluation. No bid shall be rejected at bid opening except for late bids, in accordance with ITB 23.1.

25.4 The Employer shall prepare a record of the bid opening that shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there is a withdrawal, substitution, or modification; the Bid Price, per contract if applicable, including any discounts and alternative offers; and the presence or absence of a Bid Security, if one was required. The Bidders’ representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record. The omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the contents and effect of the record. A copy of the record shall be distributed to all Bidders.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

26. Confidentiality 26.1 Information relating to the examination, evaluation, comparison, and post qualification of bids and recommendation of contract award, shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until information on Contract award is communicated to all Bidders.

26.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the evaluation of the bids or Contract award decisions may result in the rejection of its bid.

26.3 Notwithstanding ITB 25.2, from the time of bid opening to the time of Contract award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the Employer on any matter related to the bidding process, it may do so in writing.

27. Clarification of 27.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison Bids of the bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the Employer may, at its discretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its bid. Any clarification submitted by a Bidder that is not in response to a request by the Employer shall not be considered. The Employer’s request for clarification and the response shall be in writing. No change in the prices or substance of the bid shall be sought, offered, or permitted, except to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the bids, in accordance with ITB 31.

27.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its bid by the date and time set in the Employer’s request for clarification, its bid may be rejected.

28. Deviations, 28.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions Reservations, apply: and Omissions (a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements specified in the Bidding Document; (b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or withholding from complete acceptance of the requirements specified in the Bidding Document; and (c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the information or documentation required in the Bidding Document.

29. Determination of 29.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness Responsiveness is to be based on the contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB11.

29.2 A substantially responsive bid is one that meets the requirements of the Bidding Document without material deviation, reservation, or omission. A material deviation, reservation, or omission is one that, (a) if accepted, would: (i) affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the Works specified in the Contract; or (ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding Document, the Employer’s rights or the Bidder’s obligations under the proposed Contract; or (b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position of other Bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.

29.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the bid submitted in accordance with ITB 16, Technical Proposal, in particular, to confirm that all requirements of Section 6 (Employer’s Requirements) have been met without any material deviation, reservation or omission.

29.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Document, it shall be rejected by the Employer and may not subsequently be 23

made responsive by correction of the material deviation, reservation, or omission.

30. Nonconformities, 30.1 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Errors, and Employer may waive any nonconformities in the bid. Omissions 30.2 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may request that the Bidder submit the necessary information or documentation, within a reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities in the bid related to documentation requirements. Requesting information or documentation on such nonconformities shall not be related to any aspect of the price of the bid. Failure of the Bidder to comply with the request may result in the rejection of its bid.

30.3 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer shall rectify quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid Price. To this effect, the Bid Price may be adjusted, for comparison purposes only, to reflect the price of a missing or non-conforming item or component. The adjustment shall be made using the methods indicated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

31. Correction of 31.1 Provided that the bid is substantially responsive, the Arithmetical Employer shall correct arithmetical errors on the Errors following basis: (a) only for unit price contracts, if there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the total price that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the total price shall be corrected, unless in the opinion of the Employer there is an obvious misplacement of the decimal point in the unit price, in which case the total price as quoted shall govern and the unit price shall be corrected; (b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected; and (c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in words shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related to an arithmetic error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevail subject to (a) and (b) above.

31.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated bid does not accept the correction of errors, its bid shall be declared non-responsive.

32. Conversion to 32.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the Single Currency currency(ies) of the bid shall be converted into a single currency as specified in the BDS.

33. Margin of 33.1 A margin of preference shall not apply, unless Preference otherwise specified in the BDS.

33.2 Domestic bidders shall provide all evidence necessary to prove that they meet the following criteria to be eligible for a 7½ percent margin of preference in the comparison of their bids with those of bidders who do not qualify for the preference. They should: (a) be registered within the country of the Employer’s country; (b) have majority ownership by nationals of the country of the Employer’s country; (c) not subcontract more than 10 percent of the Contract Price, excluding provisional sums, to foreign contractors. 33.3 The following procedure shall be used to apply the margin of preference: (a) Responsive bids shall be classified into the following groups: (i) Group A: bids offered by domestic bidders and joint ventures meeting the criteria of ITB Sub-Clause 33.2; and (ii) Group B: all other bids. (b) For the purpose of further evaluation and comparison of bids only, an amount equal to 7½ percent of the evaluated Bid prices determined in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 33.2 shall be added to all bids classified in Group B.

34. Evaluation of 34.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies Bids listed in this Clause. No other evaluation criteria or methodologies shall be permitted.

34.2 To evaluate a bid, the Employer shall consider the following: (a) the bid price, excluding Provisional Sums and the

provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary Bill of Quantities for contracts or Schedule of Prices for lump sum contracts, but including Day work items, where priced competitively; (b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors in accordance with ITB 31.1; (c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance with ITB 14.3; (d) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to (c) above, if relevant, to a single currency in accordance with ITB 32; (e) adjustment for nonconformities in accordance with ITB 30.3; (f) application of all the evaluation factors indicated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

34.3 The estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions of the Conditions of Contract, applied over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in bid evaluation.

34.4 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate prices for different contracts, and to award multiple contracts to a single Bidder, the methodology to determine the lowest evaluated price of the contract combinations, including any discounts offered in the Letter of Bid, is specified in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

34.5 If the bid, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid Price, is seriously unbalanced, front loaded or substantially below updated estimates in the opinion of the Employer, the Employer may require the Bidder to produce detailed price analyses for any or all items of the Bill of Quantities, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price analyses, taking into consideration the schedule of estimated Contract payments, the Employer may require that the amount of the performance security be increased at the expense of the Bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default of the successful Bidder under the Contract.

35. Comparison of 35.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive Bids bids in accordance with ITB 34.2 to determine the lowest evaluated bid.

36. Qualification of 36.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Bidder the Bidder that is selected as having submitted the lowest evaluated and substantially responsive bid meets the qualifying criteria specified in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).

36.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 17.1.

36.3 An affirmative determination of qualification shall be a prerequisite for award of the Contract to the Bidder. A negative determination shall result in disqualification of the bid, in which event the Employer shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to make a similar determination of that Bidder’s qualifications to perform satisfactorily. 37. Employer’s 37.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any Right to Accept bid, and to annul the bidding process and reject all bids Any Bid, and to at any time prior to contract award, without thereby Reject Any or All incurring any liability to Bidders. In case of annulment, Bids all bids submitted and specifically, bid securities, shall be promptly returned to the Bidders. F. Award of Contract 38. Award Criteria 38.1 Subject to ITB 37.1, the Employer shall award the Contract to the Bidder whose offer has been determined to be the lowest evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to the Bidding Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily. 39. Notification of 39.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the Award Employer shall notify the successful Bidder, in writing, via the Letter of Acceptance included in the Contract Forms, that its bid has been accepted. At the same time, the Employer shall also notify all other Bidders of the results of the bidding, and shall publish in UNDB online (United Nations Development Business online) and in the dgMarket the results identifying the bid and lot numbers and the following information: (i) name of each Bidder who submitted a Bid; (ii) bid prices as read out at Bid Opening; (iii) name and evaluated prices of each Bid that was evaluated; (iv) name of bidders whose bids were 27

rejected and the reasons for their rejection; and (v) name of the winning Bidder, and the Price it offered, as well as the duration and summary scope of the contract awarded. 39.2 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the notification of award shall constitute a binding Contract.

39.3 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any unsuccessful Bidder who, after notification of award in accordance with ITB 39.1, requests in writing the grounds on which its bid was not selected.

40. Signing of 40.1 Promptly upon notification, the Employer shall send the Contract successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.

40.2 Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Contract Agreement, the successful Bidder shall sign, date, and return it to the Employer.

41. Performance 41.1 Within twenty-eight (28) days of the receipt of Security notification of award from the Employer, the successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security in accordance with the conditions of contract, subject to ITB 34.5, using for that purpose the Performance Security Form included in Section IX (Contract Forms), or another form acceptable to the Employer. If the performance security furnished by the successful Bidder is in the form of a bond, it shall be issued by a bonding or insurance company that has been determined by the successful Bidder to be acceptable to the Employer. A foreign institution providing a bond shall have a correspondent financial institution located in the Employer’s Country.

41.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above- mentioned Performance Security or to sign the Contract Agreement shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid Security. In that event the Employer may award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder whose offer is substantially responsive and is determined by the Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.

41.3 The above provision shall also apply to the furnishing of a domestic preference security if so required.

42. Adjudicator 42.1 The Employer proposes the person named in the BDS to be appointed as Adjudicator under the Contract, at the hourly fee specified in the BDS, plus reimbursable expenses. If the Bidder disagrees with this proposal, the Bidder should so state in his Bid. If, in the Letter of Acceptance, the Employer does not agree on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Employer will request the Appointing Authority designated in the Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC) pursuant to Clause 23.1 of the General Conditions of Contract (GCC), to appoint the Adjudicator.

Section II – Bid Data Sheets

Section II - Bid Data Sheets

Table of Contents

Clause Page

A Introduction ...... 32

B Bidding Document ...... 33

C Preparation of Bids ...... 34

D Submission and Opening of Bids ...... 36

E Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ...... 37

Section II - Bid Data Sheets A. Introduction

ITB 1.1 The Employer is: Chairman, Road Development Authority, Sri Lanka.

ITB 1.1 The name of the bidding process is: Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” The identification number of the bidding process is: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

Add following sub Clauses after ITB 1.3 (c)

ITB 1.4 Bidding procedure is: National competitive Bidding (NCB)

ITB 1.5 Standard Bidding Document used: World Bank Standard Bidding Documents for Procurement of Small Works, published in April 2008 and revised on November 2010. The Standard Bidding Document comprises of Bidding Procedures, Employer’s Requirements, Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

ITB 2.1 The Borrower is: Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka. The name of the Project is: Climate Resilience Improvement Project.

ITB 4.8 Bidders are not prequalified. Post-qualification would be carried out in accordance with the Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) of the Bidding Document. ITB 4.5 The list of firms debarred from participating in World Bank projects is available at:http://www.worldbank.org/debarr/.

B. Bidding Documents

For clarification purposes, only, the Employer’s address is: ITB 7.1 Attention: Head of Project Implementation Unit- Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP) Floor/Room number: No.122, Main Street, City: Battaramulla Postal Code: 10120 Country: Sri Lanka Telephone: +94112884594, +94112884595 Facsimile number: +94112884610 Electronic mail address: [email protected] Requests for clarifications should be received in writing by the Employer seven (7) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids.

ITB 7.4 A Pre-Bid meeting will take place at the following date, time and place: Date: 16/12/ 2019 Time: 10.00 a.m. Place: Project Implementation Unit, No. 122, Main Street, Battaramulla

A site visit will be conducted by the Employer before the Pre-Bid meeting. Date: 13/12/ 2019 Time: 10.00 a.m. Place: at Culvert No. 76/5 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A 005)

C. Preparation of Bids

ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English Translation language if supporting documents and printed literature are in another language: English

ITB 11.1 (b) The following schedules shall be submitted with the bid: (i) Priced bill of quantities (ii) Day works schedule (iii) Mobilization and Construction Schedule (indicating the sequence of all main operations and identifying critical activities) (iv) Rate analysis for Unit Rates & Lump Sum Items

ITB 11.1 (i) The following additional documents shall be submitted with the bid:

(i) VAT registration number along with documentary evidence or a letter to that effect from the Inland Revenue Department

(ii) A duly notarized affidavit certifying the accuracy of the information on current contract commitments given in form Fin CCC (Page No. 84 )

ITB 13.1 Alternative bids shall not be permitted.

ITB 13.2 Alternative times for completion shall not be permitted.

ITB 13.4 Alternative technical solutions shall be permitted for the following parts of the Works: None

ITB 14.6 The Contract is not subject to price adjustment, in accordance with GCC Clause 44.1 and 44.2 of Particular Conditions of Contract.

ITB 14.7 Value Added Tax (VAT) shall not be included in the rates, prices and the total bid price, but shall be quoted separately.

ITB 15.1 The prices shall be quoted by the bidder in: Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR)

ITB 18.1 The bid validity period shall be: 119 days from the bid submission deadline date up to 24/04/ 2020).

ITB 19.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Bid Security in the amount of One Million Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR 1,000,000.00).

ITB 19.2 Bid Securing Declaration shall not be accepted.

ITB 19.3 The Bid Security shall be valid up to 22/05/ 2020 (147 Days from the bid submission deadline) Bid security shall only be an unconditional on demand guarantee issued by a bank recognized by the Central Bank of Sri Lanka accepted by the Employer in accordance with the format given in Section IV – Bidding Forms. Insurance Guarantee is not accepted.

ITB 19.3 None (d)

ITB 20.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: 01

ITB 20.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder shall indicate: (a) The name and description of the documentation required to demonstrate the authority of the signatory to sign the Bid such as a Power of Attorney. (b) in the case of Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV an undertaking signed by all parties (i) stating that all parties shall be jointly and severally liable, if so required in accordance with ITB 4.1 (a), and (ii) nominating a representative who shall have the authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the parties of the JV during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the Contract, during contract execution.”

D. Submission and Opening of Bids ITB 21.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids electronically.

ITB 21.1 Not applicable (b)

ITB 22.1 For bid submission purposes only, the Employer’s address is:

Attention: Head of Project Implementation Unit- Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP)

Address: Head of Project Implementation Unit- Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP) No.122, Main Street, Battaramulla

Postal Code: 10120 Country: Sri Lanka.

The deadline for bid submission is:

Date: 27/12/ 2019 Time: 2.00 p.m. (Sri Lanka Standard Time)

ITB 25.1 The bid opening shall take place at: Head of Project Implementation Unit- Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP) No.122, Main Street, Battaramulla

Date: 27/12/ 2019 Time: immediately after Bid closing

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

ITB 32.1 Not applicable.

ITB 33.1 A margin of domestic preference shall not apply.

ITB 41.1 Performance security shall be an unconditional on demand guarantee issued by a bank recognized by the Central Bank of Sri Lanka accepted by the Employer in accordance with the format given in Section IX (Contract Forms). Insurance Guarantee not accepted.

ITB 42.1 The Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Institution of Engineers of Sri Lanka (IESL) at the request of either the Employer or the Contractor. The hourly fee together with reimbursable expenses for the proposed Adjudicator shall be discussed and agreed between the Employer and Contractor at the time of appointment of the Adjudicator. The Appointing Authority is the Institution of Engineers of Sri Lanka (IESL).

Section III – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

Section III - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. In accordance with ITB 34 and ITB 36, no other methods, criteria and factors shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).

Table of Contents

Clause Page 1 Evaluation ...... 41

1.1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal ...... 41 1.2 Assessment of Non-Performing Contractors in projects with Employer...... 41

2 Qualification ...... 42

2.1 Eligibility ...... 43 2.2 Historical Contract Non-Performance ...... 44 2.3 Financial Situation ...... 45 2.4 Experience...... 47 2.5 Personnel ...... 49 2.6 Equipment ...... 50

1. EVALUATION In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 34.2 (a) – (e) the following criteria shall apply:

1.1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal Evaluation of the Bidder's Technical Proposal will include an assessment of the Bidder's technical capacity to mobilize key equipment and personnel for the contract consistent with its proposal regarding work methods, scheduling, and material sourcing in sufficient detail and fully in accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section VI (Employer's Requirements). The Bidder’s Technical Proposal will include full details of the Bidder’s plans to arrange for any of the work to be carried out by a Specialist. This is expected to apply primarily to the electrical, mechanical and hydro-mechanical work included in the Contract. Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b) of Part 1 Section V shall be completed in full by any Specialist identified by the main Bidder. The evaluation of the Bid will take into account this information supplied by the Bidder, who must satisfy the Employer that the specialist work included in the Contract will be carried out by suitably qualified and experienced personnel.

1.2 Assessment of Non-Performing Contractors in projects with Employer

Performance of the completed or on-going Contracts with the Employer shall be considered during the evaluation.

The bidders shall be considered as a Non-Performing Contractor and their bids shall be considered non-responsive, if the bidder found to be in one of the following:

I Any notice of breach by the Employer as per clause 56.3 of Conditions of Contract in Small works documents of World Bank or unclosed Notice to Correct notices, as per clause 15.1 of Conditions of Contract FIDIC MDB Harmonized Document, within last five (05) years

II Delay damages have been imposed within last five (05) years

III If any Contracts have been terminated due to non-performance of the contractor within last five (05) years

1 Qualification Factor 2.1 Eligibility

1.1.1.1.2 Criteria

1.1.1.1.5 Bidder 1.1.1.1.3 Docu 1.1.1.1.1 Sub-Factor Single Entity 1.1.1.1.6 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association mentation 1.1.1.1.4 Requirement Required All partners 1.1.1.1.7 Each At least one combined partner partner 2.1.1 Nationality Nationality in accordance Must meet Existing or intended Must meet N / A Form ELI –1.1 with ITB 4.2. requirement JV must meet requirement and 1.2, with requirement attachments 2.1.2 Conflict of No- conflicts of interests as Must meet Existing or intended Must meet N / A Letter of Bid Interest described in ITB 4.3. requirement JV must meet requirement requirement 2.1.3 Bank Not having been declared Must meet Existing JV must Must meet N / A Letter of Bid Ineligibility ineligible by the Bank as requirement meet requirement requirement described in ITB 4.4& 4.5. For Domestic Valid registration; 1 Must meet Existing JV must Must meet N / A Form ELI –1.1 Bidders, only: Grade: ………… requirement meet requirement requirement and 1.2, with attachments 2.1.4 ICTAD/CIDA Specialty: ……………. Registration 2.1.5 Government Compliance with conditions Owned Entity of ITB 4.6 Must meet Must meet Must meet N / A Form ELI –1.1 requirement requirement requirement and 1.2, with attachments

1Bidder has to provide his Grade and Specialty in ICTAD Registration

Factor 2.1 Eligibility

1.1.1.1.2 Criteria

1.1.1.1.5 Bidder 1.1.1.1.3 Docu 1.1.1.1.1 Sub-Factor Single Entity 1.1.1.1.6 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association mentation 1.1.1.1.4 Requirement Required All partners 1.1.1.1.7 Each At least one combined partner partner 2.1.6 Ineligibility Not having been excluded based on a United as a result of the Nations resolution or Borrower’s country laws or Borrower’s country official regulations, or by Must meet Existing JV must Must meet N / A law an act of compliance with requirement meet requirement requirement Letter of Bid UN Security Council resolution, in accordance with ITB 4.9

Factor 2.2 Historical Contract Non-Performance

1.1.1.1.9 Criteria 1.1.1.1.11 Bidder 1.1.1.1.8 Sub-Factor Documentation 1.1.1.1.12 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association Requirement Required 1.1.1.1.10 Single All partners Each At least Entity combined partner one partner 2.2.1 History of non- Non-performance of a contract performing contracts did not occur within the last ten (5) years prior to the deadline for application submission, based on all information on Must meet Must meet fully settled disputes or requirement requirement by litigation. A fully settled by itself or as N / A itself or as N / A Form CON – 2 dispute or litigation is one that partner to partner to past or has been resolved in accordance past or existing JV with the Dispute Resolution existing JV Mechanism under the respective contract, and where all appeal instances available to the bidder have been exhausted. 2.2.2 Pending All pending litigation shall in Must meet Must meet Litigation total not represent more than requirement requirement fifty percent (50%) of the by itself or as by itself or as N / A N / A Form CON – 2 Bidder’s net worth and shall be partner to partner to treated as resolved against the past or past or Bidder. existing JV existing JV

Factor 2.3 Financial Situation

Submission of audited balance 2.3.1 Historical sheets, other financial Financial statements acceptable to the Employer, for the last five (5) Performance Must meet Must meet Form FIN – 3.1 years to demonstrate the current N / A N / A requirement requirement with attachments soundness of the bidder’s financial position and its prospective long term profitability.

2.3.2. Average Minimum average annual Must meet Must meet Annual Turnover construction turnover of LKR Twenty five Fifty One 100 Million within the last five Must meet Must meet percent percent Form FIN –3.2 (5) years requirement requirement (25%) of the (51%) of the requirement requirement

Factor 2.3 Financial Situation

1.1.1.1.13 Criteria 1.1.1.1.16 Bidder 1.1.1.1.14 Docu Sub-Factor 1.1.1.1.17 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association mentation 1.1.1.1.15 Requirement At least Required Single Entity All partners Each one combined partner partner 2.3.3. Financial The Bidder must demonstrate Resources access to, or availability of, financial resources such as liquid assets, unencumbered Must meet Must meet real assets, lines of credit, and Must meet Must meet Twenty five Fifty One other financial means, other Form FIN –3.3 requirement requirement percent percent than any contractual advance (25%) of the (51%) of the payments to meet the following requirement requirement cash-flow requirement: LKR 40 Million

Factor 2.4 Experience

Criteria Bidder Sub-Factor Joint Venture, Consortium or Association Documentation Requirement Required Single Entity All partners Each At least combined partner one partner 2.4.1 General Experience under contracts in the Experience role of contractor, subcontractor, or management contractor for at Must meet Must meet least the last five (5) years prior to requirement N / A requirement N / A Form EXP -2.4.1 the applications submission deadline, and with activity in at least nine (9) months of each year 2.4.2 Specific (a)Participation as contractor, Experience management contractor, or subcontractor, in at least one (1) contract within the last ten (10) years, each with a value higher than LKR 47 Million that have Must meet been successfully and substantially Form EXP - Must meet requirements for completed and that are similar to N / A 2.4.2(a) requirement all the proposed Works. The characteristics similarity shall be based on the physical size, complexity, methods/technology or other characteristics as described in Section VI (Employer’s Requirements).

Factor 2.4 Experience

Criteria Bidder Sub-Factor Joint Venture, Consortium or Association Documentation Requirement Required Single Entity All partners Each At least combined partner one partner b) For the above or other contracts executed during the period stipulated in 2.4.2(a) above, a minimum experience in the following key activities: Must meet Must meet Must meet Form EXP- requirements N /A requirements (1) Supply and fixing of high requirements 2.4.2(b) tensile wire mesh 4000 m2 per year in slope Stabilization work

2.5 Personnel The Bidder must demonstrate that it will have the personnel for the key positions that meet the following requirements:

No. Total In Similar of Work Works Position Pos Qualification Experien Experience( itio ce (years) years) ns Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is Project recognized by the Manager/Contractor’s University Grants 1 05 02 Representative Commission or equivalent qualifications (Slope Stabilization including soilnailing) NDT (Civil) or NDES (Civil) or HNDE( Civil) or Technical Officer 1 equivalent qualification. 05 02 (Civil) (Slope Stabilization with high tensile wire mesh) Quantity 1 Certificate/ Diploma in civil 05 02 Surveyor engineering /quantity surveying offered by a recognized institution (Not below NVQ level 5)

The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed personnel and their experience records in the relevant forms included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).

2.6 Equipment The Bidder must demonstrate that it will have access to the key Contractor’s equipment, listed hereafter:

Minimum Item Equipment Type and characteristic number required

1 Crane 01

The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items of equipment using the relevant forms in Section IV (Bidding Forms).

Section IV – Bidding Forms

Section IV - Bidding Forms

Table of Forms

Page

Letter of Bid ...... 53

Schedules ...... 56

Preamble to the Bill of Quantity ...... 57 Bill of Quantities ...... 61

Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee) ...... 67

Technical Proposal ...... 70

Forms for Personnel ...... 71 Forms for Equipment ...... 73 Site Organization ...... 74 Method Statements ...... 75 Mobilization and Construction Schedule ...... 76

Letter of Bid

The Bidder must prepare the Letter of Bid on stationery with its letterhead clearly showing the Bidder’s complete name and address.

Note: All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the final products.

Date: ______Bidding No.: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 Invitation for Bid No.: IFB/CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 To: Chairman, Project Procurement Committee, Project Implementation Unit (PIU), Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP), Road Development Authority, 122, Main Street, Battaramulla

We, the undersigned, declare that:

(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Clause 8; (b) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works:

“Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)”; Contract No. CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

(c) The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is Sri Lankan Rupees ………………………………………………………………………... ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………. (LKR ……………………….). This price is before Value Added Tax (VAT).

(d) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: ______; (e) Our bid shall be valid for a period of 119 days from the date fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;

(f) If price adjustment provisions apply, the Table(s) of Adjustment Data shall be considered part of this Bid; (g) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the Bidding Document; (h) Our firm, including any Subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract, have nationalities from eligible countries; (i) We, including any Subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract, do not have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4.3; (j) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a Subcontractor, in more than one bid in this bidding process in accordance with ITB 4.3, other than alternative offers submitted in accordance with ITB 13; (k) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part of the contract, has not been declared ineligible by the Bank, under the Employer’s country laws or official regulations or by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security Council; (l) We are not a government owned entity / We are a government owned entity but meet the requirements of ITB 4.6;6 (m) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is prepared and executed; (n) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that you may receive; and (o) If awarded the contract, the person named below shall act as Contractor’s Representative: ______

Name:

In the capacity of:

Signed:

Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of:

Date:

6Use one of the two options as appropriate. 55

Schedules Preamble to the Bill of Quantities Bill of Quantities Day works Schedule

Preamble to the Bills of Quantities A. Preamble

1. The Bills of Quantities shall be read in conjunction with all parts of this entire Bidding Document; the Instructions to Bidders, General and Particular Conditions, Technical Specifications, and Drawings and other supplementary information. 2. The quantities given in the Bills of Quantities are estimated and provisional, and are given to provide a common basis for bidding. The Contractor should not use the estimated quantities for the purposes of ordering materials. 3. The Bills of Quantities includes lump sums, unit prices and provisional sums. The lump sum price quoted shall be deemed to be full compensation at the completion of work items. Measurements of lump sum items for the Interim Payments shall be based on percentage completion of the work or milestones, as per the Contractor’s proposed schedule of monthly payments, as approved by the Project Manager. 4. Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bills of Quantities shall be expended in whole or in part at the direction and discretion of the Project Manager in accordance with Sub-Clause 37.7 of Particular Conditions. 5. The method of measurement of completed work for payment shall be in accordance with relevant method contained in the Specification (including, if applicable, any Special Provisions and/or other Specification Appendices). 6. The basis of payment will be actual quantities of work ordered and carried out, as measured by the Contractor and verified by the Project Manager and valued at the rates and prices tendered in the priced Bills of Quantities, where applicable, and otherwise at such rates and prices as the Project Manager may fix within the terms of the Contract. 7. The rates and prices included in the priced Bills of Quantities, except insofar as it is otherwise provided under the Contract, shall include all Contractor’s plant, equipment, labour, supervision, materials, transport, erection, temporary works, maintenance, testing, wastage, insurance, overheads, profit, taxes (excluding VAT) together with all general risks, liabilities and obligations set out or implied in the Contract. 8. Quantities shall be measured net from the drawing. No allowance for bulking, shrinkage, working space or wastage will be allowed. 9. The weight of steel reinforcement will be computed from drawings. The rate should allow for wastage, spacers, laps, chairs, hooks, bends, binding wire, etc. 10. The rates and prices shall be quoted entirely in Sri Lankan Rupee and Cents. The percentage for foreign currency requirements, included in said rates and prices, shall be as indicated in the Appendix to Bid, see Instruction to Bidders, Clause 15. 11. A rate or price shall be entered against each item in the Bills of Quantities, whether quantities are stated or not. The cost of items against which the Contractor failed to enter a rate or price shall deemed to be covered by other rates and prices entered in the Bills of Quantities. 12. The whole cost of complying with the provisions of the Contract shall be included in the items provided in the priced Bills of Quantities, and where no items are provided the cost

shall be deemed to be distributed among the rates and prices entered for the related items of work. 13. General directions and descriptions of work and materials are not necessarily repeated or summarized in the Bills of Quantities. References to the relevant sections of the contract documentation shall be made before entering rates or prices against each item in the Bills of Quantities. 14. Errors will be corrected by the Employer for any arithmetic errors pursuant to Clause 31 of the Instruction to Bidders. 15. Drains/ Catch pits and Inlets to be measured separately such as, excavation, formwork, reinforcement and concrete; relatively reference to the Sections 302, 1008, 1002 and 1001 of Technical Specification. 16. The units of measurement shown in the Bills of Quantities are metric units. Abbreviations used are as follows: Unit Abbreviation Unit Abbreviation Millimeter mm Metric Tone t Linear Metre m Lump Sum l.s. Square mm2 or Provisional PS Millimeter sq.mm. Sum Square Metre m2 or sq. m. Number, Each nr Hectare ha Hour hr Cubic Metre m3 or cu. m. Week wk Litre ltr Month mth Kilogram kg Vehicle-Month veh-mth

17. The contingencies included in the Contract Price may be used by the Employer for approved payments to the Contractor for additional work for which payment is due to the Contractor arising out of the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall have no entitlement to any contingency amount “per se”.

B. Day work Schedule

General

1. Reference should be made to Sub-Clause 50; General Conditions. Work shall not be executed on a day work basis except by written order of the Project Manager. Bidders shall enter basic rates for day work items in the Schedules. These rates shall apply to any quantity of day work ordered by the Project Manager. Nominal quantities have been indicated against each item of day work, however, the amount of day works will be considered in the Tenders evaluation process. Unless otherwise adjusted, payments for day work shall be subject to price adjustment in accordance with the provisions in the Conditions of Contract.

Daywork Labour

2. In calculating payments due to the Contractor for the execution of day works, the hours for labour will be reckoned from the time of arrival of the labour at the job site to execute the particular item of day work to the time of departure from the job site, but excluding meal breaks and rest periods. Only the time of classes of labour directly doing work ordered by the Project Manager and are competent to perform such work will be measured. The time of gangers (charge hands) actually doing work with the gangs will also be measured but not the time of foremen or other supervisory personnel. 3. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect to the total time that labour is employed on day work, calculated at the basic rates entered by it in the “SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES: LABOUR”. The rates of labour shall be deemed to cover all costs to the Contractor including (but not limited to) the amount of wages paid to such labour, transportation time, overtime, subsistence allowances, and any sums paid to or on behalf of such labour for social benefits in accordance with (Country of Borrower) law, as well as Contractor’s profit, overheads, superintendence, liabilities and insurance and allowance to labour, timekeeping and clerical and office work, the use of consumable stores, water, lighting and power, the use of repair of staging, scaffolding, workshops and stores, portable power tools, manual plant and tools. Supervision by the Contractor’s staff, foremen and other supervisory personnel; and charges incidental to the foregoing.

Daywork Materials

4. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of materials used for daywork (except for materials for which the cost is included in the percentage addition to labour costs as detailed above), at the rates entered by him in the “SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES: MATERIALS” and shall be deemed to include overhead charges and profit as follows: a) The rates for materials shall be calculated on the basis of the invoiced price, freight, insurance, handling expenses, damage, losses, etc., and shall provide for delivery to store for stockpiling at the Site. b) The cost of hauling materials for use on work ordered to be carried out as daywork from the store or stockpile on the Site to the place where it is to be used will be paid in accordance with the terms for Labour and Constructional Plant in this Schedule.

Daywork Constructional Plant

5. The Contractor shall be entitled to payments in respect of Construction equipment employed on daywork at the basic rental rates entered by him in the “SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES: CONTRACTOR’S PLANT”. The said rates shall be deemed to include due and complete allowance for depreciation, interest, indemnity and insurance, repairs, maintenance, supplies, fuel, lubricants, and other consumables, and all overhead profit and administrative costs related to the use of such equipment. The cost of drivers, operators and assistants will be paid for separately as described under the section on the Daywork Labour. 6. In calculating the payment due to the Contractor for Contractor’s Plant employed on daywork, only the actual number of working hours will be eligible for payment, except that where applicable and agreed with the Project Manager, the traveling time from the part of the Site where the Contractor’s Plant was located when ordered by the Project Manager to be employed on daywork and the time for return journey thereto shall be included for payment.

Bill of Quantities

Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)

______[Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office]

Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Koswatte, Battaramulla, Sri Lanka. Date: ______

BID GUARANTEE No.: ______We have been informed that______(hereinafter called "the Bidder") has submitted to you its bid dated ______(hereinafter called "the Bid") for the execution of “ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” under Invitation for Bids No. CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 “the IFB”). Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a bid guarantee. At the request of the Bidder, we ______[name of Bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of ______[amount in figures] (______) [amount in words] upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its obligation(s) under the bid conditions, because the Bidder: (a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder in the Form of Bid; or (b) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during the period of bid validity, (i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Form, if required, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the performance security, in accordance with the ITB. (c) has refused to accept the arithmetical corrections of the Bid

This guarantee will expire:(a) if the Bidder is the successful Bidder, upon our receipt of copies of the contract signed by the Bidder and the performance security issued to you upon the instruction of the Bidder; and (b) if the Bidder is not the successful Bidder, upon the earlier of (i) our receipt of a copy your notification to the Bidder of the name of the successful Bidder; or (ii) twenty-eight days after the expiration of the Bidder’s bid.

Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the office on or before that date.

This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 758. ______

[signature(s)]

Technical Proposal Forms for personnel Forms for equipment Site organisation Method statements Mobilisation and construction schedule

Forms for Personnel

Form PER – 1: Proposed Personnel

Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified requirements for each of the positions listed in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria). The data on their experience should be supplied using the form below for each candidate.

1. Title of position Name 2. Title of position Name 3. Title of position Name 4. Title of position Name 5. Title of position Name 6. Title of position Name etc. Title of position Name

Form PER – 2: Resume of Proposed Personnel

The Bidder shall provide all the information requested below. Fields with asterisk (*) shall be used for evaluation.

Position*

Personnel Name Date of birth information Professional qualifications

Present Name of Employer employment Address of Employer

Telephone Contact (manager / personnel officer) Fax E-mail

Job title Years with present Employer

Summarize professional experience over the last five years, in reverse chronological order. Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.

From* To* Company, project, position, and relevant technical and management experience*

Forms for Equipment

The Bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the capability to meet the requirements for the key equipment listed in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria). A separate Form shall be prepared for each item of equipment listed, or for alternative equipment proposed by the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested below, to the extent possible. Fields with asterisk (*) shall be used for evaluation.

Type of Equipment*

Equipment Name of manufacturer Model and power rating Information

Capacity* Year of manufacture*

Current Current location Status

Details of current commitments

Source Indicate source of the equipment  Owned  Rented  Leased  Specially manufactured

The following information shall be provided only for equipment not owned by the Bidder.

Owner Name of owner

Address of owner

Telephone Contact name and title

Fax Telex

Agreement Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the s project

Site Organization

The Bidder shall provide a personnel chart for the proposed site organization, indicating the key positions as given in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) and other positions, with names of personnel proposed and a description of the tasks assigned for such positions.

Method Statements

The Bidder shall provide a method statement describing the methodology proposed to be adopted in the execution of the contract.

Mobilization and Construction Schedule

The Bidder shall provide a detailed mobilization and construction schedule indicating the sequence of all main operations and identifying critical activities.

Section V – Bidder’s Qualifications

Section V - Bidder’s Qualifications

Table of Forms

Page

Bidder’s Qualifications ...... 80 Bidder Information Sheet ...... 81 Party to JV Information Sheet ...... 82 Historical Contract Non-Performance ...... 83 Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress ...... 84 Financial Situation ...... 85 Average Annual Turnover ...... 87 Financial Resources ...... 88 General Experience ...... 89 Specific Experience ...... 90 Specific Experience in Key Activities ...... 92 Form for Letter from the Bank for Granting of a Revolving Line of Credit…………94 Eligible Countries ...... 95

Bidder’s Qualifications

To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the information requested in the corresponding Information Sheets included hereunder

Form ELI - 1.1 Bidder’s Information Sheet

Date: ______Bidding No.: ______Invitation for Bid No.: ______Page ______of ______pages

1. Bidder’s Legal Name

2. In case of JV, legal name of each party:

3. Details of CIDA/ICTAD Registration Registration number: Grade: Specialty: Expiry date 4. Bidder’s Authorized Representative Information Name: Address: Telephone/Fax numbers: Email Address:

5 Attached are copies of original documents of:  CIDA/ICTAD Registration (For Domestic Bidders only)  In case of JV, letter of intent to form JV including a draft agreement, or JV agreement, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1  In case of government owned entity, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance with the principles of commercial law, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 4.6.

Form ELI - 1.2 Party to JV Information Sheet

Date: ______Bidding No.: ______Invitation for Bid No.:______Page ______of______pages

1. Bidder’s Legal Name:

2. JV’s Party legal name:

3. JV’s Party Year of Registration:

4. JV’s Party Legal Address in Country of Registration:

5. JV’s Party Authorized Representative Information Name: Address: Telephone/Fax numbers: Email Address:

6. Attached are copies of original documents of:  Articles of Incorporation or Registration of firm named in 1, above, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1 and 4.2.  In case of government owned entity from the Purchaser’s country, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance with the principles of commercial law, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 4.6.

Form CON – 2 Historical Contract Non-Performance

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______Page ______of ______pages

Non-Performing Contracts in accordance with (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

Contract non-performance did not occur during the stipulated period. Contract non-performance during the stipulated period is given below.

Year Outcome as Total Contract Percent of Amount (current Contract Identification value, in Rs) Total Assets Contract Identification: ______Name of Employer: ______Address of Employer: Matter in dispute: Pending Litigation, in accordance with Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

No pending litigation at present.  Pending litigation is given below. Year Outcome as Total Contract Percent of Amount (current Contract Identification value, in Rs) Total Assets Contract Identification: ______Name of Employer: ______Address of Employer: Matter in dispute: Contract Identification: ______Name of Employer: ______Address of Employer: Matter in dispute:

Form CCC Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress

Name of Bidder or partner of a joint venture

Bidders and each partner to a JVA should provide information on their current commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued.

Value of Average monthly Employer, outstanding Estimated invoicing over Name of contract contact work completion date last six months address/tel/fax (LKR) (LKR) 1.

etc.

Value at current price levels of existing commitments and on-going works to be completed during the next 1 year:

The Bidder shall provide evidence to substantiate the adequacy of the sources of finance to meet the Bidder’s cash flow requirements on the above contracts.

Form FIN – 3.1 Financial Situation

Historical Financial Performance Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______Page ______of ______pages To be completed by the Bidder and, if JV, by each partner Information from Balance Sheet Financial information Historic information for previous past 05 years in LKR 2015- 2014- 2013- 2012- 2011- Average 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 Total Assets (TA)

Total Liabilities (TL)

Net Worth (NW) Current Assets (CA)

Current Liabilities (CL)

Total Revenue (TR) Profits Before Taxes (PBT)

The Bidder shall attach copies of financial statements (balance sheets, including all related notes, and income statements) for the years required above complying with the following conditions:

 Statements must reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JV, and not sister or parent companies.

 Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant.

 Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial statements.

 Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be requested or accepted).

Form FIN – 3.2 Average Annual Turnover

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______Page ______of ______pages

Annual turnover data (civil engineering construction work only) Year Turnover(LKR)

2014-2015

2015-2016

2016-2017

2017-2018

2018-2019

Total:

Average*

* Average annual turnover calculated as total certified payments received for work in progress or completed over the number of years specified in Section III.

Form FIN - 3.3 Financial Resources

Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

Source of financing Amount (LKR) 1.

Financial Resources 2018/2019 or latest (As per Latest Audited Financial Statement) Amount (LKR) 1 Current Assets 2 1.1.2 Current Liabilities

3 Working Capital (1-2)

4 Works in hand/ Current Contract Commitments

5 Line of credit* 1.1.3

6 Available Liquid Asset/Financial Resources’ {3-{(0.1) x4} +5}

* Line of credit if provided shall strictly be as per attached Form. (Page No.94)

1.2 Form EXP - 2.4.1 General Experience

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______Page ______of ______pages

Starting Ending Contract Identification Role of Month / Month / Bidder Year Year Years* Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: Contract name: ______Brief Description of the Works performed ______by the Bidder: Name of Employer: Address: * List calendar year for years with contracts with at least nine (9) months activity per year starting with the earliest year 89

Form EXP – 2.4.2 (a) Specific Experience

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______

JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______Page ______of ______pages

Similar Contract Number: Information of (total number of contracts) required. Contract Identification ______Award date ______Completion date ______

Role in Contract    Contractor Management Subcontra Contractor ctor

Total contract amount ______LKR______If partner in a JV or subcontractor, specify participation of total contract ______% ______LKR______amount Employer’s Name: ______Address: ______Telephone/fax number: ______E-mail: ______

Form EXP – 2.4.2 (a) (cont.) Specific Experience (cont.)

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Page ______of ______pages

JV Partner Legal Name: ______

Similar Contract Number: of Information (total number of contracts) required. Description of the similarity contracts given in the Form of General Experience

Amount ______Physical size ______Complexity ______Methods/Technology ______Physical Production Rate ______

Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b) Specific Experience in Key Activities

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Date: ______

JV Partner Legal Name: ______Bidding No.: ______

Subcontractor’s Legal Name: ______Page ______of ______pages

Information Contract Identification ______Award date ______Completion date ______Role in Contract    Contractor Management Subcontrac Contractor tor

Total contract amount ______LKR______If partner in a JV or subcontractor, specify participation of total contract ______% ______LKR_____ amount ___ Employer’s Name: ______Address: ______Telephone/fax number: ______E-mail: ______

Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b)(cont.) Specific Experience in Key Activities (cont.)

Bidder’s Legal Name: ______Page ______of ______pages

JV Partner Legal Name: ______

Subcontractor’s Legal Name: ______

Information Description of the key activities in the contracts given in EXP 2.4.2 (a)

FORM FOR LETTER FROM THE BANK FOR GRANTING OF A REVOLVING LINE OF CREDIT

FROM: …………………………………………… ……………………………………………. ……………………………………………. TO : Director General Road Development Authority (RDA) 1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatte, Battaramulla, Sri Lanka

SUB: Letter from the Bank for providing a line of credit in favor of (1) …………………………………….. in case of award to them of works for the Contract of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

Dear Sir, We (2) ……………………………………..bankers of (3) ………………….hereby agree to grant revolving line of credit for an amount of Sri Lanka Rupees ………………….. for the purpose of the execution of the Civil Work Contracts under the Contract of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

This revolving line of credit will be maintained until the works are taken over by the RDA.

…………………………………….. Signature of Representative of the Bank

Notes (1) Name of Beneficiary / Bidder (2) Name of Bank (3) Name of Beneficiary / Bidder

Eligible Countries

1.2.1.1.1 Eligibility for the Provision of Goods, Works and Services in Bank-Financed Procurement

1. In accordance with Para 1.8 of the Guidelines: Procurement under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits, dated May 2004, the Bank permits firms and individuals from all countries to offer goods, works and services for Bank-financed projects. As an exception, firms of a Country or goods manufactured in a Country may be excluded if:

Para 1.8 (a) (i): as a matter of law or official regulation, the Borrower’s Country prohibits commercial relations with that Country, provided that the Bank is satisfied that such exclusion does not preclude effective competition for the supply of the Goods or Works required, or

Para 1.8 (a) (ii): by an Act of Compliance with a Decision of the United Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations, the Borrower’s Country prohibits any import of goods from that Country or any payments to persons or entities in that Country.

2. For the information of borrowers and bidders, at the present time firms, goods and services from the following countries are excluded from this bidding:

(a) With reference to paragraph 1.8 (a) (i) of the Guidelines:

(b) With reference to paragraph 1.8 (a) (ii) of the Guidelines:

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

Section VI – Employer’s Requirements

Section VI - Employer’s Requirements

Table of Contents

Page A General Information ...... 99

1 Introduction ...... 99 2 Location of Site ...... 99

B Scope of Work ...... 100

1 Scope of Works ...... 100

C Specification...... 101

Standard Specification ...... 101 Particular Specification ...... 102

D Drawings ...... 275

E Environmental Management Plan...... 276

A GENERAL INFORMATION

1 Introduction

The transport component of the Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP) funded by the World Bank and the Government of Sri Lanka will implementation of remedial measures for improvement of safety and operational efficiency in Roads & bridges. The Climate Resilience Improvement Project of the Ministry of Irrigation functions as the Project Management Unit and the RDA function as the Implementing Agencies for the bridges and roads in National Highways.

2 Location of the Site

The site is located at Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A 005) in Central Province.

B SCOPE OF WORK

Supply and fixing of high tensile wire mesh in unstable slope segments between culvert No 75/5 To 76/4 on Peradeniya - Badulla - Chenkaladi Road (A005)

This works will comprise of following.

I. Supply and fixing of high tensile wire mesh in the already installed soil nails and grid beam system

100

C SPECIFICATIONS

Standard Specifications

The Standard General Specifications comprise the “CIDA/ICTAD Publication No – SCA/5, 2nd Edition, June 2009 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Roads and Bridges”, published in Sri Lanka by the Construction Industry Development Authority(CIDA) formerly known as the Institute for Construction Training and Development (ICTAD). These standard specifications are not attached with this bidding document and the bidder should obtain them from the following address:

Construction Industry Development Authority (CIDA) “Savsiripaya” 123,Wijerama Mawatha

Colombo 07 Sri Lanka

101

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENT Section

Abbreviations …………………………………………………………………………….103

100 General ………………………………………………………… 104

200 Site Clearing …………………………………………………… 158

300 Earthworks ………………………………………………………166

400 Drainage Construction ………………………………………… 183

500 Incidental Construction …………………………………………194

600 Concrete and Other Structures …………………………………203

700 Soil Nailing, Horizontal Drains and Monitoring ………………227

800 Quality Control of Work ……………………………………… 230

900 Material Details ………………………………………………… 240

1000 Tests for Quality Control of Material and Works …………… 242

Appendix A ……………………………………………………………….… 263

Appendix B ………………………………………………………………..… 271

102

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS Where there is discrepancy between standard general specification and particular specifications, standard general specification will supersede.

ABBREVIATIONS

AASHTO - American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials AIV - Aggregate Impact Value AOS - Apparent Opening Size AS - Australian Standard ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials BS - British Standards CEA - Central Environmental Authority CIRIA - Construction Industry Research and Information Association CS - Ceylon Standards EIA - Environmental impact assessment EMAP - Environmental Management Action Plan EMP - Environmental Management Plan EN - European Standards EPL - Environmental Protection License ESDD/RDA - Environmental and Social Development Division of the Road Development Authority FFPO - Fauna Flora Protection Ordinance FIDIC - Federation International Des Ingenieurs - Conseils FO - Forest Ordinance GSMB - Geological Surveys and Mines Bureau HMSO - Her Majesty’s Stationery Office, United Kingdom HSP - Health and Safety Plan ICTAD - Institute for Construction Training and Development ISO - International Organization for Standardization MARV - Minimum Average Roll Values MQA - Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance MS - Mild Steel NC - Non Conformance report NWSDB - National Water Supply and Drainage Board OPC - Ordinary Portland Cement PVC - Poly Vinyl Chloride SLS - Sri Lanka Standards STD - Sexually Transmitted Diseases TRL - Transportation Research Laboratory, United Kingdom W/C - Water : Cement 103

100 GENERAL

101 ARRANGEMENT FOR TRAFFIC WITH SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING CONSTRUCTIONS,REHABILITATION OR CROSSING OF EXISTING ROADS

101.1 General

The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the period of construction, traffic control and safety devices including Traffic Sings, Barricade Boards, Traffic Cones, Lighting Devices etc., at all locations where work is in progress in accordance with Part II of the "Manual of Traffic Control Devices for Road Work Areas, Road Development Authority (Second Edition, April 2004)" or their latest editions.

Material and equipment temporarily stored on, or adjacent to, the existing roadway shall be so placed, and the work at all times, shall be so conducted as to cause minimum disruption to the travelling public. Warning signs and barrels will be required to separate the Contractor's material and equipment from the public.

The Contractor will not be permitted to have excavations open on sides of the road at a particular location such that there is a step adjacent to public traffic which may create a danger to traffic, i.e. the excavation/trimming for slope rectification.

The maximum length of one-way working controlled by stop or go boards for flagmen shall be 100 m. This length may be further reduced if visibility is reduced at bends on increased where appropriate at the Project Manager's discretion.

During construction which requires one-way-traffic, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of broken down vehicles including vehicles damaged in accidents and shall maintain one way uninterrupted traffic flow at all times.

As an alternative or in addition to one-way working, traffic diversions may be arranged where this is feasible. Such diversions shall be approved by the Project Manager in conjunction with the Sri Lanka Traffic Police. The Contractor shall also arrange for the Traffic Police to be in attendance for traffic management. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and maintenance of adequate signing for the duration of any diversion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate number of flagmen, wherever, temporary diversions or at sections where part of the road is used for the purpose of carrying out of permanent work.

104

101.2 Using Part of the Road

Part of the carriageway shall be kept open to traffic, while improvement works such as slope stabilization of the unstable or failed cut slope areasis being carried out in the other part, provided the part kept open to traffic is adequate for the purpose. Shoulder area of the road shall not be used for traffic diversion during rectification works.

101.3 Temporary Diversions

The Contractor shall construct temporary diversion ways wherever construction of the Works will interrupt existing public or private roads or rights-of-ways. Diversions must be constructed in advance of any interference with the existing rights-of-way, and the subsequent traffic management, safety and control shall be in accordance with the paragraphs of this Clause 101 and/or as directed by the Project Manager.

Where traffic management schemes are shown in the Contract Drawings they are for guidance and bidding purposes only. It is Contractor’s role responsibility to plan and design the necessary traffic diversions in the most efficient way possible in order to enable him to complete the Works within the Contract Period, with the minimum disruption of normal traffic flow, and absolute minimum impact on the Works, third parties, and environment.

The standard of construction and lighting of diversions shall be suitable in all respects for the volume, size and speed of traffic using the existing way. The level of lighting shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager, and must satisfy the requirements of the concerned local authorities prior to being approved by the Project Manager. The width and number of lanes shall be sufficient to maintain an acceptable traffic flow commensurate with existing conditions. In any case the minimum width of traffic lane shall be 3.5 m. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain prior permission of the relevant Local Authority to open detours and the use of local authority roads. Permanent roads used as temporary detour roads shall be signed and marked in compliance with detour road requirements whilst under detour road status. Should this road marking and signing be of a temporary nature the Contractor shall ensure that its removal will not impair the quality of the Permanent Works.

Under no circumstances will the Contractor be allowed to open any new carriageway for detour traffic with permanent road markings which are not in compliance with the accepted detour markings.

The minimum pavement construction of any diversion road, unless otherwise specified, shall not be less than 40mm of bituminous paving course on 150 mm of primed granular road base. Paving may be laid directly on primed subgrade only with the Project Manager's prior approval.

105

The Contractor shall responsible for the maintenance of the diversion roads during the use of them and incase detour road is an existing road; Contractor shall responsible for maintenance and repair of the pavement in a satisfactory condition to the Project Manager and such local authorities.

In urban areas, the traffic diversions shall be illuminated to a suitable lighting. In rural or other areas, where no street lighting exists, all signing shall be reflectorized and all changes in direction shall be floodlit at night to an intensity approved by the Project Manager.

101.4 Traffic Safety and Control

The Contractor shall, after consultation with the Project Manager, all the concerned Local Authorities and Police prepare a scheme of traffic management for carrying out the Works. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his approval, together with written approval no objection certificates from the concerned authorities, not less than 30 days before the planned implementation of each proposal.

The Contractor shall not commence any works affecting any public highway until all approved traffic safety measures conforming to the Project Manager's prior approval have been fully implemented to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall take necessary measures for the safety of traffic and third parties by providing, erecting and maintaining all signs, lamps, barriers, traffic control signals, road markings, etc. in a clean and legible condition, and shall position, re-position, cover or remove them as required by the progress of the Works. The barriers shall be strong. Red lanterns or warning lights shall be mounted on the barriers at nights and shall be kept lit till sunrise. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements; the Project Manager shall order a third party to rectify the shortcomings and shall recover the cost of such works from the Contractor.

101.5 Measurement and payment a. Measurement

All the costs related to the implementation and execution of the Traffic Safety and Management Plan shall be measured monthly. The quantity of work for payment during the month shall be assessed by the Project Manager based on the Contractor's claim supported with a check list to show key activities carried out. Suitable weightings may be agreed on key activities between the Project Manager and the Contractor to indicate the monthly payment based on performance.

Maintenance and repair of temporary diversion roads, if any shall be measured for payment as a Provisional Sum. 106

b. Payment

(i) Payment shall include all costs necessary and required for the proper implementation of the Traffic Safety and Management Plan in full accordance with the requirements of this Specification Section, including periodic up to date submittals. (ii) Payments shall be made monthly according to the Traffic Safety and Management Plan. The Contractor shall maintain the record book of the monthly activities and prepare a checklist for payment. (iii) The Project Manager may at any time with hold payments if (in the opinion of the Project Manager) the Traffic Safety and Control is not being provided in due compliance with the requirements and procedures of this Specification. Provision and maintenance of temporary diversion roads, if any; payment shall be made as per a Provisional Sum.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Management, Safety & Control & Temporary Diversion of 101(1) Traffic, including provision of a general traffic Month management plan Maintenance and Repair of temporary diversion roads, if Provisional 101(2) any Sum

102 CONTROL OF WORKS

102.1 Authority of the Project Manager

The Project Manager shall decide on all matters which may arise including the following:

1. The quality and acceptability of materials furnished 2. Rate of progress of work 3. Interpretation of, and change to, plans and specifications 4. Acceptable fulfillment of the contract on the part of the Contractor 5. Type of machinery and equipment to be used

Decisions regarding the above will be based on stipulations given in contract documents and sound Engineering practice taking into consideration all factors bearing on the issue including all regulations, instructions and guide lines established by the Client organization for the administration of the contract.

In this regard the Project Manager shall be free to exercise such powers as are conferred on him by the General Condition of Contract.

107

102.2 Conformity with Plans and Specifications

All works performed shall be in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with lines, grades, Cross-sections and dimensions shown on plans and working drawings. All materials furnished shall also be in conformity with the Specifications. In the event the work performed and/or the materials furnished are not in conformity with the Plans and Specifications and have resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, such work or material shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor.

Field Controls Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall set out such initial construction stakes and bench marks that will serve as the field controls for the construction work and obtain the approval of the Project Manager for the same. No work shall begin till such bench marks, stakes, setting out points, reference points and all control points are certified as corrected by the Project Manager or his representatives.

Submission Unless otherwise specified, at least 28 (twenty-eight) days before the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall submit Working Drawings and Method Statements for the Project Manager’s approval.

The Method Statements shall satisfy the requirements of the Contract and the following:

 Construction method  Quality control method  Measurement method  Safety precautions  Work schedule  Temporary Works plan  Plan for disposal of surplus soil  Plan for waste disposal  Environmental protection measures The plan for disposal of surplus soil, plan for waste disposal and environmental protection measures shall comply with the laws of Sri Lanka.

Temporary Works The Contractor shall furnish construction yards which shall be flat and suitably graded and covered with gravel to avoid any pooling of water and getting muddied. Construction yards shall be located at every Location and shall be prepared and facilitated with Contractor’s office with furniture, equipment, consumables, stockyard for various

108

materials and parking space etc. On completion of the Project, the construction yards including all facilities shall be demolished and the area shall be properly restored and returned to the legal owner.

Unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager, upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities including temporary roads, clean up and restore the land and vegetation to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall include the temporary work plan and working drawings in the Method Statements.

102.3 Construction Programming The Contractor shall program his work so as to reduce as far as is practicable, disruption to all road users during construction of the Works and maintain traffic control measures for the safety of traffic at all times. The Contractor shall provide with his time /location program and detailed construction schedule, a list of proposed working area with relevant location showing where he intends to commence his slope rectification work. The Project Manager shall approve these locations without undue delay subject to compliance with this Clause and the Contractor will then be given access to these sections. Subsequent sections shall be requested and the Project Manager shall approve them in accordance with the above procedure.

Where relevant the Contractor shall also provide with his programme, his proposal for soil nailing, indicating the nailing sources and high strength reinforced mesh, etc., his suppliers of above products, the programme of supplying of them and his resources schedule and their time of availability at site. He shall also provide a complete method statement explaining as to how be commences and proceeds with all major items of work in his programme.

If required, the Contractor shall take into consideration, the works to be completed by him in order to commence the works of the Service Agencies that would be made available to him by the Employer, in preparing his Time/Location programme.

The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient labour, equipment and material is available to complete the work. Before any subsequent 100 m section is made available to the Contractor, the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has sufficient labour, equipment and material available in approved stocks to progress the Works. If in the opinion of the Project Manager, this is not demonstrated the Contractor shall not be permitted to start work on the subsequent section.

102.4 Compaction – General

Compaction of materials shall be carried out in layers of uniform thickness using approved compaction equipment, including combinations thereof if required by the Project Manager to achieve the specified compaction.

109

During rolling, the top of the layer being rolled shall be checked for levels and any irregularities in these regards corrected by scarifying the material in the affected area and by removing or adding materials and continuing with the rolling until the entire area being rolled has been brought to a state of uniform and desired compaction.

102.5 Mixing and Control of Moisture Content before Compaction

Before compaction is commenced, each layer of un-compacted material shall be brought to a state of uniform composition, texture and moisture content by thorough mixing and addition of water or drying as required. The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken account of the fact that the materials encountered may vary widely with respect to their in-situ moisture contents and the moisture contents at which the materials are to be compacted is to be specified separately for each type of material. Accordingly, the materials may have to be wetted by adding water or dried to the required degree, along with intimate mixing of the entire mass of the materials.

102.6 Compaction Equipment

Mechanical equipment shall be used for compacting materials by rolling, tamping and watering the materials (if needed) before compaction. For other operations such as spreading, mixing and shaping, mechanical equipment only or a combination of mechanical equipment and manually operated tools and equipment shall be used. The choice of equipment and the procedure of their use shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager, upon his being satisfied about their effectiveness on the basis of trial compactions.

It shall be understood by the Contractor that different type of materials are likely to require different kinds of compaction equipment, including successive applications thereof, to achieve the specified degrees of compaction and the Contractor shall keep available a fleet of compaction equipment of the requisite kinds, sizes and numbers.

For compacting along narrow strips, for example in structure backfilling such as behind gabion wall, appropriate sized purpose made compacting equipment will be required and the same shall be provided by the Contractor.

All equipment shall be of modern construction, by established manufacturers, of proven efficiency, and shall be operated and maintained at all times by skilled personnel in a manner acceptable to the Project Manager.

102.7 Measurement and Payment

No separate payment shall be made for compliance of items under this section. Payments shall be deemed to be included in the contractor's rates and prices.

110

103 CONTROL OF MATERIALS

103.1 Source of Supply and Quality Requirements

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all materials required to construct the Works. All materials salvaged or removed from the Works remain the property of the Employer, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of replacement in the event of their unauthorized use or removal.

Quarry and borrow pit (if required) areas identified by the Employer as being likely to provide material shall be inspected and tested by the Contractor and it is the Contractor's responsibility to satisfy him as to the quality and quantity of suitable material to be gained from the identified sites. The Contractor is deemed to have checked carefully the availability of suitable material in sufficient quantities in preparing his bid and to have satisfied himself fully of the characteristics of the materials and the suitability of his equipment and methods of working on which he has based his rates and prices.

No claims relating to the quantity or quality of material at identified quarry or borrow areas shall be considered by the Employer.

The Contractor shall be responsible in obtaining at his own cost all permissions and licenses for openings up and operating all quarry and borrow areas and shall organize his method of operations so that only materials of a type and quality approved by the Project Manager shall be selected for use in the Works.

The Contractor is at liberty to select and use material from his own sources provided that the requirements of this section are fully met.

103.2 Storage of Materials

Materials shall be so stored as to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection. Approved portions of the right-of-way may be used for storage purposes. All storage sites from which the stored materials have been removed shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor at his expense. In case of materials, which need stockpiling for storage and measurements, these shall be stockpiled on level areas and to standard shapes so as to facilitate easy measurements and computations of volumes.

103.3 Handling of Materials

All materials shall be handled in such a manner as to preserve their quality and fitness for the work.

111

103.4 Approval of Sources of Materials

The sources of the materials shall be selected by the Contractor but approved by the Project Manager before the materials are used on the Site. For this purpose, the Contractor shall furnish all relevant test data for representative samples from each source area as desired by the Project Manager and also afford opportunities for the Project Manager to visit the sources areas.

Notwithstanding approval of sources of materials, materials brought to Site for use in the Works shall be subject to acceptance or rejection by the Project Manager based on quality control tests to be performed before use in construction.

The Contractor shall submit mill sheets, test reports or manufacturer's certificates on each material for the Project Manager’s approval at least 21 (twenty one) days before the commencement of works or procurement of materials whichever occurs earlier. The Contractor shall not commence the work or purchase the material without the Project Manager’s approval. In case the Contractor failed to submit appropriate documents satisfactory to the Project Manager and necessary for the approval by the Project Manager by the aforesaid period, the Project Manager’s approval will be issued 21 days after receiving satisfactory documents from the Contractor and the consequences of the delay incurred from such situation shall be borne by the Contractor.

103.5 Stockpiling of Materials

Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, natural gravels brought from borrow pits shall not be loaded directly from the borrow area for use in the Works but shall first be stockpiled. Such stockpiles shall be tested and approved by the Project Manager before the material comprising them may be used in the Works.

All materials brought to Site shall be stockpiled and stored carefully at approved locations and in a systematic manner so as to prevent deterioration or mixing of different materials or contamination. Materials which have suffered contamination or deterioration due to improper storage shall not be used in Works and shall be removed from the stockpiling area.

The materials shall be free from foreign, organic or any other deleterious substances such as vegetation and perishable matters, or any other substance which in the opinion of the Project Manager may affect placing, mixing and compaction of the material or adversely affect the future performance of the Works. Material may be tested in stockpiles by the Project Manager to check suitability for use in the Works.

Stockpiling of material is not permitted in landslide body, head or any area that is decided by the Project Manager or Employer as at a risk of activating landslide or slope failure.

112

103.6 Temporary Stockpiling of Materials

Where the work program is such that materials cannot be placed directly in their required position, or where mixing of two or more materials is required to meet the requirements of the Specification for a material, the Project Manager may authorize their removal into temporary stockpiles. Stockpile sites shall be to the Project Manager's approval and shall be prepared by clearing and grading followed by compaction.

The material shall be stockpiled in successive layers of approved thickness over the full stockpile area to the approximate dimensions required by the Project Manager and shall subsequently be reloaded and placed.

103.7 Payment

No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates and prices.

104 GENERAL RULES FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

All measurements shall be recorded in the metric system unless otherwise specified. Different items of work shall be measured in accordance with the procedures laid down in the relevant sections of Specifications read in conjunction with the relevant stipulations in the Contract. In respect of lump sum contracts, however, the procedure specified in the contract shall be adopted.

All measurements, unless otherwise specified, shall be recorded and computed nearest to the following units.

(i) Length and breadth ……. 10 mm (ii) Areas …….. 0.01 sq.m. (iii) Cubic contents …….. 0.01 cu.m. (iv) Height, depth or thickness of structural members ……. 5 mm (v) Height, depth or thickness of earthwork measured by tape ……. 10 mm (vi) Height, depth or thickness of earthwork measured with level and staff ……5 mm

In case of any difference between the above units and those specified under the relevant items of Specifications the latter shall prevail.

The measurement of materials stock piled shall be recorded for arriving at the cubic volume contents by measuring the length, width and height of piles. The quantity shall be calculated in Cubic meter (m3) corrected to two places of decimals.Unless stated to the contrary, any thickness, area or volume in any items of the Works shall be measured only on finished work after compaction.

113

The payments for the various items shown in the Bill of Quantities shall constitute full compensation for performing all of the requirements of the Contract for the item of work as specified including furnishing all necessary materials, labour, tools, equipment, supplies, testing, and incidentals.

104.1 Lead of Materials

Lead or transport distance where applicable shall be measured over the shortest practicable route and not necessarily the actual route taken for transport. The decision of the Project Manager shall be final in this regard.

(i) Carriage by manual labour shall be measured in units of 30 m. (ii) Carriage by animal/mechanical transport shall be reckoned in unit of 1.00 km. Distance of 0.50 km. or more shall be taken as 1.00 km. and distance of less than 0.50 km. shall be ignored. However, when the total lead is less than 0.50 km., it will not be ignored but paid for separately in stages of 30.0 m subject to the condition that the rate worked on this basis does not exceed the rate for 1.00 km by mechanical transport.

(iii) The measurements of materials stockpiled and measured as specified at Section 104 above shall be the basis of payment for arriving at the transport charges, in respect of materials transported unless otherwise specified. (iv) The rate for transport is inclusive of all operations including loading, transport, unloading and piling.

Haulage No haulage on materials shall be measured or paid. The cost of haulage is deemed to be included in tendered rates for supply of materials in accordance with Condition of Contract.

104.2 Measurement for Area and Volume Based Payment

(a) Area Basis When measurement of Clearing, Grubbing, Removing the objectionable material in designated areas is stipulated to be made on an area basis, the thickness of the layer shall be checked at regular intervals by level and staff or by other approved means, as directed by the Project Manager.

Dimensions used to determine area shall be measured on a plan area basis.

(b) Volume Basis The finished thickness of slope cutting or trimming to be paid on a volume basis shall be computed in the following manner, unless otherwise specified.

114

Initials levels shall be recorded before the commencement of the work at a grid of points normally not exceeding 5.00 m, centre to centre, longitudinally and at the profile changing points not exceeding 2.00 m transversely. Transverse levels however, shall include full width of the cross-section according to design. Final levels shall be similarly recorded at the same grid points after completion of each item of work listed separately for payment. The average thickness of the removal in any area shall be the mean of the difference of initial and final levels in that area but limited to the thickness stipulated in the relevant drawings, designs and Specifications.

104.3 Scope of Rates for Different Items of Works

In the absence of directions or stipulations to the contrary, the rates are to be considered as full compensation for all the operations, and the rates are to be considered as the full inclusive rates for finished work covering all labour, materials, wastage, temporary works, overhead charges and the obligations and risks arising out of the Condition of Contract.

104.4 Facilities for Verification of Measurements

The Contractor shall provide all the necessary facilities for checking and verification of the measurements at all stages of work, to the officers of the Project Manager or Employers organization.

104.5 Selection of Pay Items

Selection of pay items given under each section will depend on the method of measurement adopted on the Contract.

104.6 Sub Divisions within Pay Items

Where sub divisions within pay items become necessary, due to variations of type of material, thickness of layer, etc., letter suffixes in alphabetical order shall be used in the BOQ to denote the sub divisions within each such pay item. These letter suffixes shall be incorporated alongside the number given within the bracketed portion of the pay item number.

105 SIEVE DESIGNATIONS

The sieve size that the generally used in this Specification for grading of soils and aggregates are as stipulated in column 1 of Table 105–1, which also conforms to BS. It should be noted that sieves given therein are the metric equivalents for the original sieves in imperial units given in column 2 of Table 105–1, which conforms, to ASTM E11.

115

Table 105 – 1 Sieves used in these Specifications Sieve Sizes used in these Corresponding Original Specifications (BS metric sieves in imperial units sieves) Confirming to ASTM in mm μm Sieve number ch (1) (2) 75 3 2 63 ½ 50 2 1 37.5 ½ 28 1 20 ¾ 14 ½ 3/ 10 8 6.3 ¼ 5 4 2.36 8 1.18 16 600 30 300 50 150 100 75 200

Even though some of the above sieves are not in the standard ISO series they are selected for the purpose of these Specifications due to their common usage in Sri Lanka.

106 FACILITIES FOR THE CONTRACTOR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

106.1 Performance Security

The Contractor shall provide a Performance Security for proper performance of the Work, in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.

116

a. Measurement Performance Security shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of providing the required Performance Security. b. Payment

Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has provided satisfactory Performance Security, supported with proof of Premium payment.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.1(1) Allow for Cost of Providing Performance Security LumpSum

106.2 Insurances The Contractor shall provide all insurances for the performance of the Work, including at least, those required under the General Conditions of Contract except where specifically allowed for under other items.

The Contractor shall take all necessary measures such as photographic and other records of the third party properties adjacent to the work which, in his opinion, may be affected during construction activities.

Insurance policies shall be maintained and valid through the period of performance of the Contract and shall be extended when and as necessary. a. Measurement Insurance shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of providing all the insurances required during the period of performance of the Contract. b. Payment Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has provided all acceptable and satisfactory insurances valid for the Contract period. Payment shall be made on submission of the original Insurances, policies supported with confirmation of reinsurance if any and proof of payment of premium.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.2(1) Allow for Cost of Providing Insurances Lump Sum

117

106.3 Advanced Payment Guarantee

The Contractor shall provide an Advanced Payment Guarantee for the purpose of the Work issuing an interest free advanced payment, in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. b. Measurement

Advanced payment guarantee shall be measured as a lump Sum item for the cost of providing the required Bank Security. b. Payment

Payment shall be made as a lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has provided satisfactory Advanced Payment Guarantee, supported with proof of Premium payment.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.3(1) Allow for Cost of Providing Advanced Payment Lump Sum Guarantee

106.4 Mobilization, Maintenance and De-mobilization of Contractor's Facilities and Plant/Equipment

Description The Contractor shall be responsible for leasing or renting any extra land or building for the purpose of establishing his site offices and establishment of housing, stores, testing laboratory, temporary yards, equipment, plant and workshops and for all temporary works and for the reinstatement of such land or buildings on completion of the Contract, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and the owners of such lands / equipment.

The Contractor shall obtain the prior approval of the Project Manager for the plans and siting of his office and site establishment and for the leasing of any additional land before such land is leased. He shall indemnify the Employer against all claims and charges in respect of the occupation, use and reinstatement of leased land.

The Contractor’s site establishment shall include all his offices, housing, stores, testing laboratory, plant, equipment, workshops etc. but not limited to these

118

 Furnish all resources (incl. equipment) required to complete the specified work  Establish offices, testing laboratory as required under, housing, workshops and stores for the Contractor  Provide laboratory equipment  Install electrical power supply with sufficient capacity and a standby generator of similar capacity for use exclusively as a backup unit for this purpose  Install water supply  Provide access roads  Charges not otherwise itemised

1) The Contractor shall provide and maintain the offices, testing laboratory including their contents, access roads and hard standing as required by him in order that he may carry out his obligations under the Contract.

2) On completion of the Project, the following shall become property of the Contractor - All the furniture in the offices, laboratory, housing, workshops, stores and the standby generator of the Contractor. - Testing equipment of the laboratory.

Mobile Phones for the Contractor  The Contractor shall have adequate numbers of mobile phones (e.g. group package system) for their own use and to communicate with the Project Manager and the Employer within 1 month of the date for commencement of the Works.  The system shall have an operating range which ensures reception throughout the site.  The Contractor shall maintain their mobile phones. If they are non-operative for any reason, they shall either be repaired or replaced within 24 hours.  The Contractor shall pay the cost of the hardware and the communication charges, no separate payment will be made (mobile phones for the Project Manager will be included in the Project Manager’s contract).  Upon completion of the Contract, all mobile phones used by the Contractor shall remain as the property of the Contractor. a. Measurement Site establishment of the contractor including his site office and reinstatement of land shall be measured as a lump sum item as indicated in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be made as following order;

1. 35% upon provision or erection of contractor’s site establishment including office, testing, laboratory, housing, workshops, access roads, stores and equipment, etc., with all finishes and fittings. 2. 20% upon furnishing laboratory with equipment and furniture. 3. 45% upon establishment of plant and equipment which is required for the work. For the

119

purpose of payment certification the Contractor shall provide his schedule of plant and machineries to be mobilized. Maintenance of site establishment of the Contractor shall be measured as the number of months during which maintenance work is carried out. b. Payment

Payment for the Contractor’s site establishment under 106.4 above shall include for:

 Payment for leasing of any land required for his offices, laboratory, hard standing and access roads and temporary buildings and reinstatement of such land.  Provision and erection of the buildings, including any necessary foundations, refurbishment, improvements and equipping.  Provision of access roads, hard standing, fences and gates.  The connection of telephones, electrical, sewerage and water supply, including all costs associated with their provision and use.  All furniture, stationery and equipment necessary for the proper execution of the work.

Payment for removal of the offices of the Contractor shall include (if applicable),

 The removal of the buildings including its foundations.  The removal of access roads, hard standing, fences and gates.  The disconnection of telephones, electrical, sewerage and water supply including all costs associated with their use.  The reinstatement to the satisfaction of the Project Manager of the land used for the office, laboratory, hard standing and access road.

Maintenance of the office of the Contractor shall include for labour, materials and equipment necessary to ensure that they are maintained regularly and properly cleaned.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.4(1) Mobilization of Contractor's Facilities and Lump Sum Plant/Equipment De-mobilization of Contractor's Facilities and 106.4(2) Lump Sum Plant/Equipment 106.4(3) Maintenance of Site Establishment for the Contractor Month

120

106.5 Progress Reports

Monthly progress report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager and the Employer.

A minimum of thirty-six (4 sets) photographs shall be taken by the Contractor each month to record the progress of the Works. Photographs shall be 200 mm x 150 mm, in colour, and shall be marked with date of exposure, and location. Where conventional photography is used, the negatives shall be supplied to the Project Manager. High resolution digital photographs (minimum 10 Mb pixel format) will be acceptable, in which case a digital copy (CDR/W disc or equal) shall be supplied in lieu of negatives. a. Measurement Progress report and photographs shall be measured by the number of months or part thereof.

b. Payment

The rate shall include for:

 Taking the photographs;  Preparation of progress report;  Development of the film and prints;  Annotating and binding;  Delivery of the specified number of prints to the Project Manager /Employer;  Delivery of electronic copies of the progress report to the Project Manager by means of CDR/W discs or otherwise;  Delivery of negatives or, in the case of digital photography, submitting or transferring electronic copies of the prints to the Project Manager by means of CDR/W discs or otherwise.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.5(1) Progress Reports Month

106.6 Project Name Boards/ Inauguration Plaque

The Name Boards shall be erected to the following requirements;

121

Face plate size not less than 2.5 m by 2.0 m containing color messages and logos to include project name, name of the Employer, name of the Contractor, name of the Project Manager, name of the funding agency and anticipated completion date in all three languages (Sinhala, Tamil and English). The board shall be erected on double post supports with concrete foundations. The board shall be made of galvanized steel of gauge 18.The board shall be erected with the bottom of the board at a minimum of 2.3 m above the adjacent ground and clear of motor traffic.

The Project Inauguration Plaque shall be made of granite and the text will be decided by the Project Manager/Employer.

The Project Manager shall issue to the Contractor the text, letter sizes, and details. The Contractor shall remove all name boards on completion of the Contract Period. a. Measurement

Project name boards shall be measured as the number of boards/plaque satisfactorily provided, installed, maintained throughout the Contract period and removed after completion of works. b. Payment

Payment shall be made at the stated unit rate per signboard/plaque. The price shall be full compensation for all materials and labour required to perform the work described.

Project Inauguration Plaque and related services shall be measured as a provisional sum and payment to the Contractor for such services shall not exceed the Provisional Sum indicated for this purpose. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 15% overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 106.6(1) Provide and Maintain project Name Boards Number

106.6(2) Project Inauguration Plaque and related services Provisional Sum

122

107 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL

107.1 General

The Contractor is responsible for producing work which conforms in quality and accuracy of detail to the requirements of the Contract (see relevant clauses of General Conditions of Contract) and the Contractor shall, at his own expense, institute a quality control system and provide experienced Engineers, technical officers, surveyors, materials technicians, other technicians and other technical staff, together with all transport, instruments and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and quality control of the Works at all times.

The cost of all supervision and quality control, including testing, carried out by the Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the rates and prices tendered for the related items of work, except where otherwise specifically provided for in the Contract. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the provisions of the various sections of the Specification regarding the minimum frequency of testing that will be required for quality control. The Contractor shall, at his own initiative, increase this frequency where necessary to ensure adequate control.

The Project Manager shall have the authority to increase the frequency of testing to check the degree of compliance of works with the Specifications.

On completion of every part of the Works and submission to the Project Manager for examination, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the results of all relevant tests and survey checks that he has carried out indicating compliance with the Specification.

For cement, tor steel bars, mild steel bars, high tensile reinforce net, coir net and such materials, the Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager the manufacturer's test certificates of the actual material to be incorporated in the Works. When required by the Project Manager to carry out essential testing at a manufacturer's plants or at laboratories other than the Site laboratory, all costs involved shall be borne by the Contractor.

The methods of sampling and testing of materials shall be required under relevant clauses stipulated in these Specification or as approved by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment for each operation to establish its/their capacity to achieve the requirements to the Specification to the satisfaction of the Project Manager before commencement of the Work.

All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and purpose made for the required operation and shall be operated by skilled operators and maintained at all times to perform its proper function in a safe and efficient manner acceptable to the Project Manager. 123

107.2 Measurement and Payment

No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be deemed to be included in Sub-section 106.4.

108 STANDARDS

108.1 General

In the absence of any definite provisions in the Specifications on any particular issue reference shall be made to the latest Codes of SLS, BS, ASTM, or AASHTO in this order of sequence. Where these are unhelpful, the execution and completion of the Works and relevant tests shall conform to sound engineering practice and, in case of any dispute arising out of the interpretation of the above, the decision of the Project Manager shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Where BS tests are stipulated in the Specifications, the equivalent ASTM or AASHTO test method may be substituted as directed by the Project Manager. All codes of practice, standards and specifications applicable shall be the latest edition with all corrections and incorporations as at 30 days before the closing date for bid submission.

108.2 Supply of Codes of Practice, Standards and Materials References

These shall be the latest editions or as stated below or as decided by the Project Manager. The documents provided by the Contractor shall be original publications and not Photostat copies. These shall be the latest edition with all corrections and incorporations as at 30days before the closing date for bid submission. The publications shall become the property of the Project Manager upon completion of the Contract. The type of publications requested may include:

SLS - Sri Lanka Standards BS - British Standards AASHTO Publications- American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials ASTM Publications - American Society for Testing and Materials FIDIC Documents - Federation International Des Ingenieurs - Conseils HMSO Publications - Her Majesty’s Stationery Office, United Kingdom ICTAD Publications - Institute for Construction Training and Development TRL Publications - Transportation Research Laboratory, United Kingdom CIRIA Publication - Construction Industry Research and Information Association

124

108.3 Measurement and Payment Payment will be made for this item as a Provisional Sum. The Contractor shall verify with the Project Manager the individual items required and obtain approval from the Project Manager prior to purchase. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5% overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Allow for provision of standards / technical literatures 108(1) Provisional Sum as required by the Project Manager

109 WORK EXECUTED BY THE EMPLOYER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS

The Employer reserves the right to execute on Site work not included in the Contract and to employ for this purpose either his own employees or other contractors.

The Contractor shall ensure that neither his own operations nor the actions of his employees shall interfere with the operations of the Employer or his contractors on such works, and the same obligations shall be imposed on the Employer or contractors in respect of work being executed under the Contract.

The Contractor shall provide unhindered access to all parts of the Site to the Employer and authorized representatives of the Employer and of public bodies and corporations and to contractors employed by the Employer and he shall make available to such authorized persons the use of all temporary access tracks in or about the Site.

110 SERVICES

In the execution of Works by the Contractor, if any services, public or private may be damaged shall be undertaken by the appropriate Authority or by the Contractor under the supervision of the appropriate Authority, for reinstatement or repair.

110.1 Existing Services

The Contractor may be ordered to carry out certain works for and on behalf of various statutory service authorities and he shall also provide, with the prior approval of the Project Manager, such assistance to the various bodies as, may be authorized by the Project Manager.

No removal of or alterations to any public utility shall be carried out unless ordered by the Project Manager after authorization by the appropriate Authority.

125

The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to protect, and shall provide temporary support to, existing services during construction and during reinstatement or repair of damaged services.

Whenever services are encountered that interferes with the execution of the works and requires moving or relocation, the Contractor shall advise the Project Manager who will determine the extent of the work involved. Any pipe, cable, conduit or other known service of any nature whatsoever, which has been damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations shall be repaired and reinstated forthwith by the Contractor or by the authority concerned, at all the expense of the Contractor or the authority and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

The Employer will not be held liable or responsible for any delay in completion of the Works under this Contract which may occur due to any damage occurring to such services in consequence of the Contractor's operations.

110.2 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The work of temporary supporting and protecting public utility services during execution of the Works shall be paid under a Provisional Sum.

The amount of work involved in reinstatement or repair to damages of existing services shall be determined on Site and as instructed by the Project Manager. b. Payment

Payment for repair to damages of existing services shall be made under a Provisional sum. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5% overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Temporary supporting and protecting public utility 110(1) Provisional Sum services during execution of works

111 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS

111.1 General Obligations

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimize nuisance during the construction of the works. 126

All existing highway and roads used by vehicles of the Contractor or any of his subcontractors or suppliers of materials or plant, and similarly any new roads which are part of the Works and which are being used by traffic, shall be kept clean and clear of all dust /mud /extraneous materials dropped by the said vehicles or their tyres. Similarly, all dust /mud/extraneous materials from the Works spreading on these highways shall be immediately cleared by the Contractor.

Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and removal of debris, or, if directed by the Project Manager, by mechanical sweeping and clearing equipment, and all dust, mud and other debris shall be removed entirely from the road surface. Additionally, if so directed by the Project Manager, the road surface shall be hosed or watered using suitable equipment. The road surface shall be maintained in a better or similar condition at all times.

Any structural damage caused to the existing roads by the Contractor’s constructional plant or equipment shall be made good at Contractor’s expense.

a. Measurement and Payment

All these activities shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and prices and no separate payment will be made thereof.

112 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE THE COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORKS ON ALREADY COMPLETED WORKS

(i) The provision of temporary drainage works such as drains, open channels, bank, etc., and the furnishing and operation of temporary pumps and such other equipment as may be necessary to adequately drain, protect and dewater the Works and Temporary Works. This will be in addition to any permanent drainage works specified and installed, and in addition to any temporary drainage works specifically paid for separately. (ii) Fill and cut slopes shall be promptly repaired whenever damaged by surface water. (iii) The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of damage or defects to any work before repair or maintenance and the Project Manager shall instruct the extent and method of repair. b. Measurement andPayment

Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for separately and the cost thereof is deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and prices.

127

113 REMEDIAL WORK

When any part of the Works fails to conform to the Specification, or is at any stage before final acceptance damaged so that it no longer conforms to the Specification, the Project Manager shall instruct its complete removal and replacement with satisfactory work. In special cases the Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to apply remedial measures in order to make good any such defects or damage. The remedial measures taken shall be subject to the Project Manager’s approval regarding the details thereof.

In particular, remedial measures shall ensure that the final product is in full compliance with the Specification shall not endanger or damage any other part of the Works, and shall be carefully controlled and submitted to the Project Manager for examination when completed, or at any inter mediate stage as may be required.

For the guidance of the Contractor an indication of what may be required in the more common cases of defects or damage is given below, but the Project Manager will in no way be bound to approve of or adhere to the measures indicated, as the actual remedial measures will be dictated by the circumstances of each particular case.

113.1 Earthworks

Where a cut slope has been over-excavated, reinstatement by backfilling will not normally be permitted and the entire slope may need to be re-trimmed to obtain a uniform slope.

Where erosion has occurred on the surface of cuts or fills, the damage shall be made good by back filling with suitable material and re-trimming. In more serious cases the slope may have to be cutback and backfilled after benching, and compacted to the required standard of compaction with suitable small equipment, followed by re-trimming.

113.2 Concrete

Defective concrete work will normally need the cutting back and complete removal of any weak or honeycombed sections and making good using approved bonding agents to bind fresh concrete to old concrete. Cracks, if permitted to remain, shall be injected with approved compounds and test cores taken to confirm the efficacy of the injection process.

113.3 Measurement and Payment

Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for separately and the cost thereof is deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and prices.

128

114 WATER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the procurement, transportation, storage, distribution and application of water needed for construction and other purposes except where otherwise specified.

Only clean water free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious salts and other materials shall be used. All sources of water used shall be approved by the Project Manager.

Mechanically driven and operated water bowsers with effective spray equipment shall be provided at all times to ensure that compaction can proceed without any hold up on account of watering.

114.1 Measurement and Payment

No direct measurement or payment shall be made for providing water and the cost thereof shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for which water is needed.

115 SEETING OUT, SURVEY AND DRAWINGS

115.1 General The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of the General Conditions of Contract regarding setting out.

The Contractor shall check the condition of all permanent Ground Markers and shall satisfy himself they have not been damaged or disturbed and are true in regard to position and level. Where markers have been destroyed, damaged or displaced the Contractor shall reinstate a new marker based on the markers which remain. A new marker shall not be used unless it’s true position and level has been established and the new values verified by the Project Manager.

Where a marker is likely to be disturbed during construction operations the Contractor shall establish suitable reference markers at locations where they will not be disturbed during construction. No marker shall be covered, disturbed or destroyed before accurate reference markers have been established and the details of the position and levels of such markers have been submitted to the Project Manager and approved by him. The Contractor’s reference markers shall be of least the same quality and durability as that of the existing markers.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the method of setting out he proposes to employ. To ensure beyond doubt that the complex elements of the road or structure are truly and correctly located and the Contractor shall check all setting out by a different

129

approved method. The Project Manager may at any time request the Contractor to submit proof that his setting out has been satisfactorily checked.

The Contractor shall make all provisions necessary for the Project Manager to check and measure the setting out of the Works and shall be in attendance to agree measurements and levels before construction works commence.

115.2 Setting Out and Surveying

The Contractor shall set out the center line and establish location reference points which are to be marked out on site and recorded. Level Bench Markers at locations of structures requiring modification shall be established and checked regularly and tied into the Permanent Ground Markers.

The Contractor will be provided with a set of cross sections at 5.00 m intervals. The cross sections will be provided on computer disk in AutoCAD2013 version or latest version Format on a zip disk. The Contractor shall provide for the use of an AutoCAD technician/computer operator and a suitable computer and printer to enable the cross sections to be printed. The cross sections will show the existing ground levels and the finished design levels based on the design. The Contractor shall superimpose on these cross sections, plotted out to an appropriate scale approved by the Project Manager.

The Project Manager takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the computer disc information provide to the Contractor. The Contractor shall survey the original ground levels which will be jointly checked by the Contractor’s and Engineer’s Surveyors prior to the Project Manager’s approval and commencement of any construction work. The cross section once checked and approved by the Project Manager shall be the basis for measurement and payment.

The Contractor shall complete the setting out work within two weeks following the date of the Project Manager’s Notice to Commence the Works. Sufficient survey and drafting staff be available to enable the full setting out of the Works and for the drawing up of cross sections to be complete such that no delay is caused to the setting out of the Works.

The Contractor shall employ on the Works sufficient qualified surveyors with at least 2 years’ experience in similar works and have a thorough knowledge and experience of computer methods for calculating quantities. The surveyors shall have available sufficient modern survey equipment and instruments which shall be to the Project Manager’s approval. The Contractor shall assist and supply services of his surveyor and his team to the Project Manager whenever required by the Project Manager or his Representatives in checking and measuring the Works.

No construction work shall commence on any section until the cross sections for the whole of that section have been checked by the Contractor and checked and approved by the Project Manager.

130

115.3 Measurement

The quantity to be measured for cross-sections are detailed on drawings and approved by the Project Manager. No separate measurement for construction ground markers shall be made.

115.4 Payment

The prices shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish the required Setting out work, working drawings and cross sections as indicated.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 115(1) Setting out work, working drawings and cross sections Lump Sum

116 FACILITIES AND STAFF FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER AND HIS STAFF AND EMPLOYER

116.1 General

The following facilities and services for the Project Manager /Employer shall be provided by the Contractor:-

 Housing for the Project Manager and Employer with equipment and furniture  Site Office(s) with equipment and furniture including telecommunications equipment  Supply and keep refurnished at all times all consumable items such as tea, coffee, milk, sugar, insecticides, first aid supply, potable water and so forth  Vehicles (including drivers)  Removal of facilities and equipment upon completion  All necessary Personal Protective Equipment as required  Staff

All matters in respect of facilities or services shall be subject to the Project Manager’s formal approval. The Contractor shall submit details of all proposals prior to placing order or making any arrangements. All facilities and services shall be for the exclusive use of the Employer, Engineer and their staff during the period of the Contract and as further required to finalize measurement, payment etc. The Contractor shall provide the Office facilities and services as soon as is practical and not later than 30 days after the date of receipt of Letter of Acceptance. During the period prior to completion of construction or provision of the regular office accommodation the Contractor shall 131

provide fully functional office accommodation at a suitable location mutually agreed with the Project Manager. Refer Appendix A for more details. The Contractor shall provide the Employer/Engineer with staff to assist in the administration and supervision of the works. The staff provided shall be experienced and be capable of performing their allotted duties. The staff shall be nominated by the Employer and appointed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure the continuity of the services of the selected personnel.

In particular, site supervisor shall be capable of supervising similar works with NCT(Civil) qualification or equivalent with at least two years experience in similar works. Clerk shall be experience in using computers/word processors and be capable of using the latest version of Microsoft Office computer software and have a good command of the English Language.

The contractor shall pay EPF, ETF, etc in relation to their employment.

c. Measurement

Maintenance of each facility shall be measured as the number of months during which the maintenance for each facility is satisfactorily provided. Maintenance shall not be measured during any period occurring between the expiration of the contract period (including awarded Extension of Time – EOT) and the date the works are certified as complete. Measurement will be made for maintenance performed after the completion of the works, during the time the facilities are required by the Employer and Engineer’s staff for post-construction contract completion activities.

Providing of equipment and furniture for the offices and accommodations of Employers and Engineers shall be made under the provisional sum.

The providing of staff shall be measured under monthly basis. d. Payment

Payment for maintenance for each facility shall include all labour, materials and equipment required for satisfactory maintenance of the facilities and shall include all other costs including but not limited to supply of electricity, water and telephone facilities, cleaning, guarding, disposal of rubbish, repairing equipment and all other work required to ensure the facilities and equipment provided are in good operational order.

Payment for staff shall be made from the monthly rates. The monthly unit rates payable to the Contractor shall include EPF,ETF, etc payable by the Contractor in relation to their employment plus 5 % overheads and profits. .

132

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Provide and maintenance of office and other facilities 116(1) Month for the Project Manager Provide and maintenance of Accommodation and other 116(2) Month facilities for the Project Manager Provide furniture and equipment for the Project 116(3) Provisional Sum Managers office & accommodation Provide and maintenance of office and other facilities 116(4) Month for the Employer Provide and maintenance of Accommodation and other 116(5) Month facilities for the Employer Provide and maintain Vehicle for the Project Manager 116(6) Month and the Employer Provide equipment and furniture for the Employers 116(7) Provisional Sum office and accommodation

116(8) Site Supervisor Month

116(9) Clerk Month

116(10) Office Aide Month

The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5 % overhead and profit on top of the actual cost, on the payments which are made under provisional sum items.

117 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

117.1 General During the whole period of project the Contractor shall comply fully with National Environmental Protection laws and those pertinent to prevent nuisance to public stipulated by the democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka and the Environmental Management guidelines of the donor agency. This obligation shall extend to the construction sites themselves and all of the Contractor’s installations elsewhere within the national territories.

The project activities during site preparation, construction and post construction should comply but not limited to the National Environmental Act No. 47 of 1980 and amended Act No.1562/22 of 2008 with respect to emission of gaseous, liquid and solid waste, National Environmental Noise Control Regulations No.01 of 1996 for emission of noise, Interim Standards on Vibration Pollution control for Central Environmental Authority

133

(CEA), Fauna Flora Protection Ordinance (FFPO) and Forest (Amendment) Act No.22 of 2009), Forest Ordinance and Forest (Amendment) Act No.65 of 2009 (FO), Felling of trees under Act Felling of tree (Control) Act No 09 of 1951, and Soil Conservation Act No. 24 of 1996 and the excavated material (earth, rubble and aggregates) should be done under a license of Geological Surveys and Mines Bureau (GSMB) as per the Act No.33 of 1992 amended by No.66 of 2009.

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the Site and to avoid damage or nuisance to persons, private and/or public properties or others resulting from pollution, noise, vibration or other causes arising as a consequence of his methods of operation. The Contractor should fully aware with the implementation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP), and the pollution control facilities should be installed adequately and appropriately before commencement of the project actions where there is potential to emit pollutants to the environment.

The Employer/Engineer under any terms is not responsible either fully or partly for damage caused due to the Contractors’ failure to apply necessary pollution control measures, environmental protection measurers or measurers to minimize nuisance to public. The Employer/Engineer will not appear in courts, pay compensation or engage in public conflict resolution on behalf of the Contractor under such situations if arise.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for review and approval, a site specific “Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP)” based on the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to theEngineer within one month from the Letter of Acceptance but prior to commencing construction.

The Contractor shall appoint an Environmental Officer, whose duties throughout the period of the Contract shall be exclusively connected with the Environmental Management activities at the Site.

Monthly EMAP performance reports should be prepared and submitted, on-site checklists and log books should be maintained.

The EMP implementation and the costs should be included clearly according to the format given under “Payment Schedule”.

117.2 Environnemental Management Plan – EMP The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlines the framework for planning, implementation and monitoring of environment, measures required to ensure that potential adverse environmental impacts from the project activities are eliminated, offset, or reduced to an acceptable level. At the same time, it is expected that the plan will help the project enhance environmental benefits from the project interventions. The EMP is built based on relevant existing national policies, legislation, regulations and guidelines. 134

(a). All works should be arranged to cause the least possible disturbance to the environment and local residents/institutions, in particular soil erosion along the Right-Of-Way (ROW) and adjacent area, to the river/stream banks, irrigation canals and other water ways. Similarly, cutting of trees, tea shrubs and other vegetation of economic, religious and ecological value found outside of the ROW, whenever possible be avoided; else replacement planting in a place selected by the owner of the affected tree and/or vegetation will be carried-out by the Contractor at his own cost for the damages caused.

(b). Proposals shall be submitted for:

(1) Storage on Site i. Materials and equipment on Site shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent damage to the Site and adjacent areas, and minimize hazards to persons, materials and equipment and all Temporary and Permanent Works. Storage areas shall be kept organized, neat and tidy. ii. Areas assigned for carrying out Permanent Works shall not be used to store materials, plant and equipment, nor used as access to storage areas without prior approval of the Project Manager. iii. Hazardous materials (including fuel and oil) shall be stored and handled only within an area set-aside specifically for this purpose. This area shall be enclosed from the remainder of the Site with waterproof concrete flooring and rainproof roof, so as to contain any spillage, clearly marked and signs installed at a close distance from the storage area to warn unauthorized workers and visitors to stay away. iv. The area shall be located away from any natural waterways, drainage lines and open drains. In case of petroleum fuel and oil, a collection basin is to be installed in the storage area to gather any spillages, to facilitate the recovery of the petroleum products for reuse or proper disposal using government licensed recyclers or otherwise.

(2) Noise and Vibration i. The Contractor shall abide by the Central Environmental Authority (CEA) regulations and other applicable laws and regulations related to noise and vibration levels. ii. The Contractor shall take all practical precautions to minimize noise resulting from work under the Contract, especially Sites adjacent to residential and institutional areas, from polluting such areas and shall fit all equipment with noise suppressors so that noise levels are minimized. Similarly, as much as practicable, construction methods that produce minimal vibration be adopted, most especially in sites adjacent to residential and institutional areas where possible damage to the structures due to vibration may occur.

135

(3) Disposal of Contaminants i. Solid, liquid and gaseous contaminants shall be disposed in accordance with relevant Sri Lanka Environmental laws and contractual requirements. ii. Non-toxic and/or non-hazardous liquid waste shall be stored in approved containers for transport and disposal at locations approved by the Project Manager and local authorities. iii. Non-toxic and/or hazardous solid wastes shall be disposed of by removal from site, transport and depositing in approved locations. iv. Toxic and hazardous wastes must be temporarily stored using suitable containers at a designated place authorized by the Project Manager and local authorities, and disposed through a government licensed collection agent or otherwise.

(4) Disposal of Refuse i. The Contractor shall take adequate measures to ensure the Site and associated areas are maintained in a clean and orderly condition. Provision shall be made for the daily removal of rubbish, debris, surplus materials, etc., and for the stacking and storing of materials in authorized locations. ii. The excavated materials should be covered and stored safe until removed. The location of onsite storage should be sufficiently away from stream banks, water ways, runoff paths etc. iii. The final disposal site should be approved by the Project Manager before dumping. The disposed matter should not pollute water bodies iv. The contractor shall obtain approval from relevant Authority such as Pradeshiya Sabha, Municipal Council and other government agencies (as required), for disposal and spoil at the specified location, as directed by the Project Manager. Private land that will be selected for disposal should also require written consent from the land owner.

(5) Dust Control i. Dust screens and/or watering of open and unpaved areas shall be used to control dust and eliminate public health issues and/or nuisance to adjoining residential and institutional areas, national highways often travelled by commuters, and natural habitats frequented by wildlife during the period of the Works. ii. The on-site piles should be covered secularly to prevent particles to become air bone.

(6) Transport of construction materials and waste i. Transportation of material should be done covered always using tarpaulin ii. Precautions should be made to prevent spill of any material on ground during transportation and minimize damage to ground cover/ vegetation iii. Should not to be a nuisance to public: Transportation of material should be avoided during peak hours (e.g. office on off times, school starting and finishing time) iv. Transportation should be done only in the dedicated hull roads. Use of any other access roads should be strictly avoided. 136

v. The tyres of the vehicles should be inspected regularly when leaving the sites and disposal site, should clean mud in tyres before entering the hull road.

(7) Water i. Water removal Surplus water shall be promptly removed from the Site by draining off or mechanical means to keep the Works reasonably dry and so as not to interfere with construction work. The water removed from the Site is kept reasonably free of soil, oil/petroleum and other debris, and the discharge shall not adversely affect the adjoining landowner’s residential and livelihood assets, or to pose as a pollution hazard to waterways and farmlands

ii. Water quality The Contractor shall ensure that construction activities do not have a detrimental impact on the water quality of surface or ground water in the areas adjoining the Site. Specific measures shall be adopted to prevent the discharge of contaminated runoff from the Site. When necessary, potable water source of local people such as springs located immediately down slope of the Site shall be provided with protection (“spring box”) from contaminants originating from construction works as appropriate.

iii. Contaminated water The Contractor shall adhere to the CEA recommendation on disposal of wastewater. Wastewater shall not be discharged to ground or waterways in a manner that will cause unacceptable surface as ground water pollution.

iv. Siltation All drains, streams, and waterways shall be kept clear from mud, silt and other obstructions arising from the execution of work under the Contract. Soil and other debris removed from the drains, streams and waterways are to be deposited by the Contractor in suitable areas subject to the approval of the Project Manager and the concerned local authorities. The Contractor shall ensure that effective construction practices are employed to minimize siltation to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

v. Alternation of drainage paths Contractor shall not close or block existing canals and streams permanently. If diversion or closure user or blocking of canals and streams is required for the execution of works, Contractor must obtain the Project Managers approval. Contractor shall restore drainage paths back to its original status once the need for such diversion or closure or blockage no longer required.

(8) Flora and Fauna All works shall be carried out in a manner that the destruction to flora and fauna and their habitat is minimal. Trees and vegetation shall be felled /removed only if that affect directly on permanent works or necessary temporary works.

137

i. Contractor shall take effort to avoid removal/ destruction of religious, cultural, aesthetic species. ii. Contractor shall adhere to the guidelines and recommendations of CEA, if any with regard to felling of trees and removal of vegetation. iii. A list of trees to be removed during construction of site to be marked and forwarded to the Project Manager. iv. Measures shall be taken to avoid or minimise any adverse impacts on fauna and flora (either terrestrial/ aquatic) living in natural environments adjacent to the Site during the construction period. v. During construction, if a rare/ threatened/ endangered flora and or fauna is found, it shall be immediately informed to the Project Manager. All activities that could destroy such flora/fauna and its habitat shall be stopped with immediate effect. Contractor shall carry out works again only after the Project Manager’s approval. vi. Hunting and collection of wildlife from within the Site and adjacent area is strictly prohibited. The Contractor shall ensure that no damage occurs to any trees, tea shrubs and other vegetation with ecological, spiritual and/or economic value that are to be retained at the Site; and that none of its workers and subcontractors are engaged in wildlife hunting or collection. vi. Contractor shall take measures to avoid introduction of invasive species during transportation or refuse or spoil.

(9) Soil Erosion The Contractor shall take measures to minimize the soil erosion that may result from construction activities using any of the control measures. Control measures include but not limited to.

i. Install sediment filter, fences, hay bale filters drains, and filter strips, grass outlets, sediment transport basin traps around culverts, drains, soil stockpiles and all other areas which may have the potential to erode or be affected by soil erosion. ii. Install catch drains, slope drains and nearby dissipaters in conjunction with sediment traps installed to divert storm water around the Site. iii. Stabilize by grass, materials (excluding pavements and screenings) stockpiled for periods longer than one month. iv. Stabilize disturbed areas using measures such as drains and batters. v. Minimize as much as practicable, when the removal of existing vegetation within and around the project area at any time. vi. Plan the execution of work under the Contract in stages to minimize soil erosion during continuous periods of rainfall that will cause heavy run-off. vii. Soil erosion control devices shall be regularly inspected and maintained, especially after heavy and/or continuous periods of rain.

138

(10) Soil Contamination The Contractor shall undertake all practicable control measures to prevent the contamination of the soil in and around the site. Control measures include but not limited to;

i. Acceptance of Clean Fill: All fill material to be imported and used on the Site shall be free of contamination. ii. Fuel Chemicals and other Hazardous Materials: All practicable steps shall be taken to ensure contamination of soil does not occur through: fueling, maintenance of vehicles or equipment; storage of fuel, chemicals, and other hazardous materials; and spillage of such materials on to the soil, by ensuring all the above activities are conducted in bounded or sealed areas. iii. Clean up of Soil Contamination: All soils contaminated during construction shall be cleaned up by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, and at no cost to the Employer. Any contaminated spoil material (whether or not contaminated by the Contractor) shall be removed from the Site in an approved manner to prevent further pollution. iv. Installation of Oil Separators: Contractor shall install oil separator to prevent fuel, oil and other petroleum products from spilling into the existing drainage lines and then into the adjacent soil, resulting in its (soil) contamination.

(11) Borrowing Earth i. Earth available from construction site excavation works as per design, may be used as embracement materials, subject to approval by the Project Manager. ii. Contractor shall comply with environmental requirements/ guidelines issued by CEA and the respective local authorities with respect to the locating burrow areas and with regard to all operations related to excavation and transportation of earth from such sites. iii. Contractor can also find suitable soil materials from currently operated licensed borrow pits in the surrounding area, subject to approval of the Project Manager. iv. Borrow areas shall not be opened without having a valid mining license from the Geological Survey and Mines Bureau (GSMB) and the Contractor shall pay Royalty fees to the Government and provide evidence of payment to the Project Manager. v. All borrow pits/ areas should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the contractor in accordance with the requirement/ guidelines issued by the CEA and the respective Government Authority.

(12) Quarry Operations i. Utilizing the existing quarry sites available in the project influential area as much as possible which are approved by GSMB with valid Environmental Protection License (EPL) and Industrial mining license. 139

ii. If new quarries are to be opened, prior approval should be obtained from GSMB, NBRO (as applicable), CEA and Local authorities. iii. Selected quarry sites should have proper safety measures, such as warning, safety nets etc. iv. Quarry sites should not be established within protected sites under FFPO and FO.

(13) Maintenance of Vehicles and Machinery i. All maintenance and servicing should be done outside the site. ii. Waste clothes, wrappings, waste machine oil, rugs etc. should be collected separately and disposed outside through proper disposal channels iii. Operation of concrete mixer iv. Storage of construction materials cement, sand concrete aggregates and any other should be done in a dedicated place closer to the concrete mixture yard. Materials prone to wash off or air borne would be covered with impervious material. v. Separate places should be kept for cleaning concrete mixes away from storm water drains. Cleaning should be done with minimum quantity of water and wastewater generated should be allowed soaked into ground. If extra wastewater is generated, the drain water should be filtered through check dams and temporary sand mounds before letting to storm water drains.

(14) Disruption to Public i. Loss of Access At all times, the contractor shall provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock. ii. Work that affects the use of existing accesses shall not be undertaken without providing adequate provisions to the provisions to the prior satisfaction of the Project Manager. iii. On completion of the works, all temporary obstructions to access shall be cleared away, all rubbish and piles that obstruct access be cleared to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

(15) Utilities and Roadside Amenities i. The Contractor shall take care not to damage/destroy or affect the functional purposes of utilities such as water, electricity, telephone posts. The arrangements the Contractor made with those service providers shall be informed to the Project Manager. ii. In case of an unintentional damage cause to a utility, the Contractor shall immediately inform the service providers and help to restore the service without delay. (16) Visual Environment Enhancement i. Landscape plantations, re-vegetation and filling slopes and other slopes, edge treatment of water bodies shall be carried out.

140

ii. The Contractor shall remove all debris, piles of unwanted earth, spoil material, away from the roadsides and from other work places and disposed at locations designated to acceptable to the Project Manager. iii. On completion of the works, the temporary structures shall be cleared away in full, all rubbish burnt, waste dumps and septic tank shall be filled and closed and roadsides work places and labour camps cleared and cleaned. 117.3 Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP)

The selected Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for review and approval, the Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP) based on the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) that shall be implemented during the work execution, and shall be monitored on a daily basis. The Contractor shall take into account the regulations and all applicable Local Government by-laws in the preparation of the EMAP.

The directions on preparing EMAP will be given by the Project Manager for selected Contractor. The Contractor should submit the EMAP statement to the Project Manager within 28 days from the Letter of Acceptance but prior to commencing construction.

117.4 The Contractor’s Environmental Officer

Within 28 days before the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall appoint an Environmental Officer, whose duties throughout the period of the Contract shall be exclusively connected with the Environmental Management activities on the Site.

The Environmental Officer shall have an acceptable working knowledge of the ruling language of the Contract as stated in the Conditions of Contract, and shall be a suitably qualified and experienced person who shall prepare, supervise and monitor environmental management activities. The person should responsible for community liaison and to handle public complaints regarding environmental/social related matters.

The appointment and designation of the Environmental Officer shall be subject to the Project Manager’s approval.

Unless specifically agreed in writing by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall not undertake any work on the Site, which may affect the environment, until the Environmental Officer has commenced duties on Site, and the Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP) has been approved by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall not remove the Environmental Officer from the Site without a written permission of the Project Manager. Within fourteen (14) days of any such removal, or notice of intent of removal, the Contractor shall nominate a replacement Environmental Officer for the Project Manager’s approval.

141

117.5 Environmental Monitoring The contactor shall monitor the compliance of implementation of Environmental Management actions and the emission of pollutants with respect to the environmental regulations. The contractor shall include the monitoring plan in his site specific EMAP. The monitoring plan should be prepared in accordance with the monitoring regulations of National Environmental Act and that of the funding agency, and any other specific monitoring indicated in Environmental Assessment reports (EIA, IEE) as appropriated. The environmental monitoring plan should be approved by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall monitor the environmental aspects of the construction according the environmental monitoring plan, and control measures shall be implemented to minimize the environmental impacts. However, should the control measures put in place be found to be unsatisfactory as a result of monitoring, then the Contractor shall amend the control measures to provide a satisfactory result.

The contractor shall:

i. Prepare monthly and quarterly progress reports in three copies on the implementation of the EMP using a report format acceptable to the Project Manager. ii. Participate in coordination meetings called by the Project Manager to discuss the progress of the EMP implementation, among others, and act on agreements reached during the activity. iii. Participate in Site Inspections requested by the Project Manager, and/or the (Environmental and Social Development Division of the Road Development Authority) ESDD/RDA, to review the EMP performance. iv. Keep daily records of environment related incidents (if any), note the details, actions taken, identify persons responsible for these actions, the results of the actions, and any recommendations for further work. Also indicate in the record if the Project Manager had been informed of the incidents as well as other local authorities. Complaints and their status will also be included in the record.

Monitoring environmental parameters for regulations for pollutant emissions;

i. The contractor shall monitor the environmental parameters for regulations for pollutant emissions. The monitoring parameters should be decided based on the sensitive environmental elements within the project area and in its proximity. For this, the contractor should obtain the services of a competent local organization, to decide and conduct environmental monitoring as baseline and during construction for ambient air quality, surface and ground water quality, noise and vibration levels at the specific locations of the site. ii. The monitoring agency shall review environmental data obtained for conduct baseline monitoring for parameters as per the Table 1. The monitoring agency shall prepare environmental quality monitoring reports with the results of field sampling and laboratory analysis, interpretations of the results and recommendations.

142

iii. And shall set out same monitoring stations for the monitoring during the construction period. iv. The reports should be analyzed by the environmental consultants of the Project Manager to ensure that effectiveness of the mitigation measures implemented, the necessary environmental regulations are complied, and non-compliances should be acted according to conditions of the contract.

Table 117-1: Guidance to select Environmental Quality Monitoring Parameters Frequency and Activi Instructions for the Parameters monitoring ty Contractor Agency Air Quality The contractor shall parameters conduct a baseline Carbon Dioxide environmental assessment (CO2), Carbon for all sites before Monoxide

commencing the (CO), SO2, constriction activities. NO2, Total The assessment should Suspended include Ambient Air Particulate Matter (TSPM), quality, noise, vibration and water quality at closes Repairable

streams (reflecting Particulate upstream and downstream) Matter (PM10) as compliance to: &PM(2.5), Particulate *Base Lead (Pb) line Air quality - The National

surve Ambient Air Quality Noise ys standards stipulated under the Extraordinary Gazette, (15 min and 1 No. 1562/22 August 15, Once hour in 2008 -Central Morning, From a Environmental Authority of Afternoon, laboratory Sri Lanka. Evening and accepted by the Noise- Extraordinary Night in a day) Project Manager Gazette, No. 924/1- May Leq, L90, L50 23, 1996 -Central & L10 Environmental Authority of Sri Lanka. Vibration Vibration- The interim (Ground and standards on Vibration for Structural) the Machinery, PPV, Hz Construction activities and Vehicular Movements - Central Environmental Water quality Authority of Sri Lanka. parameters 143

pH, Ambient Water Quality- temperature, electricity Ambient water quality standards –CEA –EAIP- conductivity ,

DHV-2000 DO, BOD,

TSS, Oil and Grease, FC, Pb,

and any other specific

parameters Once by the Crack surveys should be deemd Contractor conducted if necessary on necessary existing buildings or structures before commencing the work by the contractor. The reports should be analyzed by the experts to identify cracks that might get aggravated Cracks in each by some project actions. building within And necessary precautions 50 m from the should be made during site boundary execution of project actions to keep such possible aggravation of the cracks if identified sensitive to specific project actions.

Ambient Air Quality, Air Quality Noise, vibration, water parameters quality Compliance to; Carbon Dioxide (CO2), Carbon Monoxide

(CO), SO2, Air quality - The National Ambient Air Quality NO2, Total Durin standards stipulated under Suspended g the Extraordinary Gazette, Particulate constr No. 1562/22 August 15, Matter (TSPM), uction Repairable 2008 -Central Environmental Authority of Particulate

Sri Lanka. Matter (PM10) &PM(2.5), Noise- Extraordinary Particulate Gazette, No. 924/1- May Lead (Pb) 23, 1996 -Central

Environmental Authority of Noise Sri Lanka. Vibration- The interim (15 min and 1 144

standards on Vibration for hour in the Machinery, Morning, Construction activities and Afternoon, In critical noise Vehicular Movements - Evening and and vibration Central Environmental Night in a day) monitoring Authority of Sri Lanka. Leq, L90, L50 activities & L10

Ambient Water Quality- From a Ambient water quality Vibration laboratory standards –CEA –EAIP- (Ground and accepted by the DHV-2000 Structural) Project Manager

PPV, Hz

Water quality parameters pH,

temperature, electricity conductivity , DO, BOD, TSS, Oil and Grease, FC, Pb, and any other specific parameters deemd necessary

Cracks in each building within 50 m from the site boundary An environmental officer from contractor should be present at site responsible Site for execution of EMP and inspection monitoring project actions s, in respect of environmental Execution compliance and giving of EMP necessary instructions at site to ensure satisfactory implementation of EMP After completio Post Crack Surveys n of works 145

117.6 Environmental Complaints

The Contractor shall maintain a register of all environmental complaints received and shall notify the Project Manager of each complaint. Complaints received by the Project Manager shall refer to the Contractor shall also be detailed in the complaint register.

The Contractor shall investigate all environmental complaints received and, where necessary, undertake measures to address the complaint. All measures undertaken to address the complaints shall be detailed in the register. A summary of the complaints received, actions taken and the ensuring results; and further actions needed (if any); are to be included in the regular reports submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager.

117.7 Environmental Incidents Should an environmental incident (being environmental nuisance, medium environmental harm, or serious environmental damage) occur during the construction phase, the Contractor shall immediately take appropriate action to minimize any impact and inform the Project Manager of the incident. The Contractor shall carry out any instructions received from the Project Manager to remedy the situation. The Contractor is responsible for the clean-up of any contamination caused by construction work and no additional payment will be made in this regard.

117.8 Environmental Training

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all employees (including Sub- Contractors’) have received training/orientation in relation to the Contractor’s Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP) and other related operating guidelines. Posters are to be placed on strategic places, as well as reading materials are to be made available, to remind workers and visitors on how each one can on a personal basis, help protect the environment. The Contractor will ensure that all machinery on the Site are operated within the appropriate guidelines in-order to minimize environmental impacts related to excessive noise and vibration; deteriorated air and water quality; waste and pollution control; as well as damages to the natural ecology in and around the project area. All construction materials used on the Site shall be utilized in a manner to minimize negative environmental impacts. Reusable containers no longer needed at the Site, can be donated to the local schools or government units for use in their community development projects.

117.9 Reporting and Maintenance of Records

(a) Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP): The Contractor should prepare an EMAP and obtain approval. (b) Monthly EMAP performance reports shall be prepared and submitted. (c) On-site checklists shall be maintained regularly.

146

(d) Logbooks shall be maintained at site with daily inspection entries, issues noticed, action taken and produced to the Project Manager on-site inspections. (e) Emission test reports and approvals etc. shall be made available officers of the Project Manager at on-site inspections.

117.10 Attending to Progress Meeting The Project Manager will hold monthly progress meeting at a venue that will be either at the head office or at a pre informed location in the proximity of the project site. An authorized officer responsible for EMAP should attend the meeting and should present the progress.

117.11 Performance Monitoring by the Project Manager

The Environmental Officer (EO) shall be appointed by the Project Manager to monitor performance of EMP at site. The monitoring shall include site inspections, checking on- site environmental records, reviewing EMAP, raise non compliances on EMAP where performance is not satisfactory. The EO of the Project Manager shall endorse log entries and on-site checklists, and shall prepare monthly performance review reports including non-compliances and present at the progress meetings. All claims are subjected to approval of the EO.

117.12 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

(i) Environmental Officer shall not be measured separately and shall be included in construction management staff as stated in Section 120.1. (ii) Submission of EMAP and site arrangement before commencing the Works shall be measured as a Lump Sum. (iii) Baseline Environmental Monitoring shall be measured as Lump Sum. (iv) Environmental Quality Monitoring reports during construction shall be measured as a Provisional Sum. b. Payment

(i) Environmental Officer shall not be paid and all the expenditure incurred by the Contractor in keeping the personnel at the Site and all the facilities provided to such personnel to discharge his duties satisfactorily shall be deemed to be included in contractor’s staff. (ii) Environmental Quality Monitoring and mitigation measures shall comprise all the expenditure incurred by the Contractor in carrying out this work, according to the Environmental Quality Monitoring Parameters as instructed and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

147

(iii) All the other obligations of the Contractor under this Section are deemed to be included in the rates and no separate payment shall be made in respect of them.

- Submission of claims– All claims regarding the EMAP implementation are subjected to submission of reports followed by approval by the Project Manager. The format for claim form and authorized signatories should be informed prior to commencement of the project. The incomplete claims or those with inadequate information will not be paid and the Project Manager holds no responsibility for delays encountered in submission of such claims. All claims are subjected to approval of the EO certifying satisfactory performance. Full payment, No or partial payment or payment suspension will be based on the endorsement by the EO on the claims of Contractor. - Reporting large number of NCs in the given month, not attending to rectify the NCs within minimum possible time, unsatisfactory performance of implementation of EMP will be subjected to decision of suspension of payments disregarding the submission of monthly report. - Performance of environmental officer at site and attending the progress meetings– No or partial payment will be made, or payment will be suspended for unsatisfactory performance of environmental officer of contractor. - Performance of on-site EMAP– No or partial payment will be made, or payment will be suspended for unsatisfactory performance - Suspension of work – If the contractor is seriously violating the norms of environmental regulations, the Project Manager reserve the right to suspend the project activities until satisfactory control measures are set in place. The under such situations the Project Manager will not pay any delay claims. Damage Surcharge – If substantial damage has resulted to environment or public due to contractor poor performance of EMAP the contractor should remedy it from its own expense. The contractor inability or unsatisfactory delay in attending to remediation the Project Manager reserve right to deduct specified fraction from the payment as remediation cost Pay Description Pay Unit Item Implementation of satisfactory Environmental 117(1) Management Action Plan (EMAP) and on site Lump sum arrangement before commencing the project action. Baseline Environmental Monitoring and submission 117(2) Lump sum of the report ( If Required) Monitoring Environmental Quality Parameters and 117(3) Environmental mitigation measures during Provisional Sum construction ( If Required)

The Contractor will entitle to additional 15% overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.

148

118 HEALTH AND SAFETY

118.1 General

The Contractor shall, as a priority in all its activities, undertakings and endeavors, ensure the continuous safety measures of the public and all persons directly or indirectly associated with the Works. The Contractor shall comply with all safety and industrial health legislation and regulations of Sri Lanka and shall submit a Health and Safety Plan (HSP) for the Project Manager’s approval. The Contractor shall appoint aSafety Officer for all safety on the site.

The Contractor will be responsible for the safety of the public legitimately passing through or adjacent to the Site. All excavations, plant or items of potential danger to the public must be barricaded and sign-posted to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and the Contractor must provide sufficient watchmen to ensure the safety of the public at all times. All existing pedestrian routes shall be maintained in a safe condition unless an alternative route is provided to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

Availability of Safety-related Documents: The Contractor shall comply with the Project Manager’s requirements insofar as displaying in each of its site offices andworkshopscopy of such safety and industry health posters and keeping on the Site copies of such regulations and documents. All regulations and documents shall be translated into languages which are understood by the workers and operators engaged by the Contractor or subcontractors and such translations shall be displayed or kept alongside those in Sinhala, Tamil and English languages.

Assistance to the Project Manager: The Contractor shall provide full co-operation and assistance in all safety surveillance carried out by the Project Manager or the Employer.

118.2 Health and Safety Plan (HSP)

e. (a) Submission, Approval and Change

i. Within 28 (twenty-eight) days before the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall submit his Health and Safety Plan (HSP). The Contractor shall cooperate and comply with Engineer’s instruction to have HSP approved by Engineer before start of site works. ii. The Contractor shall comply with the approved HSP and any of the Project Manager’s instructions on safety. iii. If the Project Manager makes any subsequent recommendation or instructions on the HSP in writing, the Contractor shall revise the HSP accordingly. iv. Where the Contractor proposes to change, he shall give at least (7) calendar days’ notice in writing. Proposed changes are subjected to the Project Manager’s approval. 149

(b) Contents of Health and Safety Plan

Main contents of the Health and Safety Plan shall include following:

i. Safety Organizations and Communication - Safety control staff organizational structure, which should identify the personnel to be engaged solely for safety assurance (including Safety Officer will be responsible for all safety on the Site), their responsibilities and authorities - Proposed interaction and communication procedures between the Contractor’s construction personnel and safety assurance staff - Frequency and coverage of site safety meetings, and regular site safety reports - Safety information and training - Records to be prepared and maintained by the Safety Officer.

ii. Measures for compliance by Subcontractors

iii. Safety equipment and faciliti iv. es - Safety equipment, rescue apparatus and protective clothing which will be required for the Works. Such equipment shall include, but not limited to, eye protectors, hearing protectors, safety harnesses, safety equipment for working underground and in the confined spaces, rescue equipment, fire extinguishers, first aid equipment, lanyards, hard hats and, where appropriate, associated shock absorbers, chest harnesses - Testing, inspection, and replacement of safety equipment, scaffolds, guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access, lifting, lighting, signing, and guarding equipment - Equipment of the specified first aid station - Emergency and rescue procedure and associated equipment - Any other equipment, gear and facilities necessary for prevention of accidents

v. Protection of authorized and unauthorized visitors to the site (including people from the vicinity)

vi. Supervision of Safety systems

vii. The means by which the Safety systems will be supervised, monitored and audited by the Safety Officer to ensure due compliance with the principles and objectives of the Health and Safely Plan; Procedures for updating the Health and Safely Plan 150

viii. Safety of Construction methods ix. Proposals to ensure that construction methods do not compromise the Contractor’s commitment to the Health and Safety Plan or his compliance with regulations x. Types of Hazards and Emergency Measures - An appreciation of the industrial health hazards, and proposals for minimization of the risks associated with such hazards. xi. Personal Health and Sanitation program which focus on measures to be adopted by the Contractor in the worker’s camp to ensure that the health of every personnel hired in the Project is properly taken care of. This program includes the following: 1. Installation of a temporary workers camp that is provided with sleeping quarters, sanitary toilet and shower rooms, adequate potable water supply and lighting facilities - Location for worker camps shall be approved by the Project Manager and comply with guidelines recommendations issued by the CEA/local Authority - Worker camps should be located 200 m away from water ways or site of religious cultural or archeological importance or near schools 2. Personal hygiene and sanitation training for workers; 3. Orientation on the prevention of communicable diseases. 4. Prevention on vector borne diseases. 5. For foreign workers, an orientation on local customs and traditions. - Worker camps shall be provided with appropriate facilities for disposal of solid waste and sewerage. - Garbage bins shall be provided the camps and regular emptied.

The design and location of the worker’s camp is subject to the approval of the Project Manager and local authorities.

118.3 Safety Officer (a) The Contractor shall appoint Safety Officer whose duties throughout the period of the Contract shall be exclusively connected with Safety activities on the Site. (b) The Safety Officer shall be a suitably qualified and experienced person who shall supervise and monitor compliance with the Health and Safety Plan and shall carry out auditing of the operation of the Health and Safety Plan in accordance with a rolling program to be submitted, from time to time, to the Project Manager for his approval. I(c) The Safety Officer’s selection shall be subject to the Project Manager’s approval. (d) The Contractor shall provide the Safety Officer with supporting staff in accordance with the staffing levels set out in the Health and Safety Plan. (e) The Contractor shall empower the Safety Officer and his staff to instruct employees of the Contractor and of its Subcontractors to cease operations and to take urgent and appropriate action to make safe the Site and prevent unsafe working practices or other infringements of the Health and Safety Plan or regulations.

151

118.4 Safety Reports and Notification of Accidents

(a) Safety Reports The Contractor shall submit regular site safety reports to the Project Manager as a requirement of the Project Health and Safety Plan. A summary report shall be submitted as part of the Monthly Progress Report. Prior to submission, the Contractor’s Representative shall endorse the Report. Site safety reports shall comprehensively address all relevant aspects of site safety and industrial health regulations and, in particular, report on all site safety audits undertaken during the period covered by the report. (b) Notification of Accidents The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager immediately when any accidents occur whether on-site or off-site in which the Contractor, his personnel or Contractor’s Equipment, or those of his Subcontractors are directly or indirectly involved and which result in any injuries to any persons. Such initial notification may be verbal and shall be followed by a written comprehensive report in the format approved by the Project Manager within 24 hours immediately after the accident. . 118.5 Safety Equipment and Clothing

The Contractor shall ensure that safety equipment and protective clothing as described in the Health and Safety Plan are available on the site at all material times and that measures for the effective enforcement of proper utilization and necessary replacement of such equipment and clothing are incorporated into the Health and Safety Plan.

(a) The Contractor shall provide all authorized persons on the Site (including the Employer’s and Engineer’s personnel) with protective clothing, where the minimum items (Personnel Protective Equipment-PPE) shall be as follows;

- protective headgear (hard hat or similar), - a reflective jacket - safety boots (with steel toe caps and steel sole plate)

Other items such as safety glasses, gloves, safety harness, rubber boots etc. will be provided as necessary to the operation being undertaken. (b) The Contractor shall provide other necessary safety equipment, clothing and facilities as instructed by the Project Manager. (c) The contractor shall provide all persons of sub-contractors with Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE)

152

118.6 Safety Inspections

The Contractor shall regularly inspect, test and maintain all safety equipment, scaffolds, guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access, lifting, lighting, signing and guarding equipment. Lights and signs shall be kept clear of obstacles and legible to read. Equipment, which is damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not in working order, shall be repaired or replaced immediately.

118.7 First Aid Facilities

The Contractor shall establish, maintain at least one fully equipped first aid box at each Location prior to start the any construction activities at site. All provided facilities should be maintained during construction at site.

118.8 Health and Safety Information and Training

(a) The Contractor shall ensure that safety, rescue and industrial health matters are given a high degree of publicity to all persons regularly or occasionally on the Site. Posters, in Sinhala, Tamil and English languages, that draw attention to site safety, rescue and industrial health regulation, shall be made or obtained from appropriate sources, and shall be displayed prominently in strategic areas within the Site. (b) The Contractor shall carry out regular safety training courses, the frequency, coverage and application of which, shall be in accordance with the Health and Safety Plan. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors’ employees to participate in relevant training courses appropriate to the nature, scale and duration of the subcontract works. (c) The Contractor shall carry out monthly general meetings and give out safety awards to deserving laborers employed in the project, as motivation for all to be more safety conscious.

118.9 Plant, Equipment, and Qualified Personnel

All construction plants and equipment used on or around the Site shall be fitted with appropriate safety devices. These shall include but not be limited to:

(a) Effective safety catches for crane hooks and other lifting devices, (b) Functioning automatic warning devices and, where applicable, an up-to-date test certificate, for cranes and hoists.

All construction plants and equipment used on or around the Site, shall be operated by suitably qualified personnel.

153

118.10 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

All the costs related to the implementation and execution of Health and Safety shall be measured in months during which they are carried out to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

Provisional Sum is allocated in the Bill of Quantities for conducting awareness programmes regarding Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STDs). Minimum three (03) numbers of awareness programmes shall be conducted by the Contractor during the period of construction, and the amount allocated for this Provisional Sum shall not be exceeded, without prior approval of the Project Manager. b. Payment

Payment for health and safety measures during the construction period shall include all costs necessary and required for the proper implementation of the Project Safety and security in compliance with the safety plan, and also incompliance with the requirements of this Specification, including updating, monitoring and submittals, monthly.

Payment to the Contractor for preparation and implementation of STD program shall not exceed the Provisional Sum indicated for this purpose. Payment shall be based on the rates and sums assessed and agreed by the Project Manager for the completed works to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, which shall include full compensation for providing all materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the work. The payment for awareness programmes shall be made upon conducting programmes and submission of evidence reports regarding the work to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. The Contractor will entitled to additional 5% overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.

The Project Manager may at any time withhold payments if, in his opinion, the Project Safety has not been provided in due compliance with the requirements and procedures of this Specification.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Health & Safety measures during construction 118(1) Month confirming to the latest industrial standards 118(2) Awareness Programme for STDs Provisional Sum

154

119 PROGRAMME OF WORKS

119.1 General The Contractor shall submit the programme of work mentioned in the Conditions of Contract, to comply with following: (i) The programme of work shall be prepared using the scheduling software Microsoft Project or other similar project management software approved by the Project Manager. Notwithstanding the above, the software must be capable of fulfilling the requirements described below. The Contractor’s programme shall be submitted in both hard and soft copies to the Project Manager at intervals mentioned in the Conditions of Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall provide facilities to the Project Manager and Employer to study the submitted programme and to track and monitor the progress of work, and carry out their obligations under the Contract which need the use of such project management software, within 14 days of receiving notice under the Conditions of Contract. Such facilities shall include, but not limited to, installing the software in the computers of the personnel handling the progress tracking in the Employer’s and Engineer’s team and imparting the required training. Cost of providing such facilities is deemed to be included in the rates. (ii) The Contractor shall maintain on Site the necessary computing, printing and plotting facilities together with suitably experienced staff to enable the Programme to be reviewed and updated daily and, where necessary, revised. (iii) The Programme shall be structured to allow the Contractor and Engineer to appreciate the general progress of the Works, while also providing sufficient detail for the Contractor to control, and the Project Manager to monitor, day-to-day progress against scheduled progress. (iv) The Programme shall be continually updated by the Contractor to include actual progress of the Works. (v) The Programme shall clearly identify, at whatever level of detail necessary, the order of precedence of the Works, the interdependencies between the component parts of the Works and the critical path. (vi) The unit of time for the Programme shall be the day and it shall show all rest days and public holidays. (vii) Each discrete activity shall be made up of tasks of sufficient detail to identify the individual resources needed for the task. (viii) In addition to showing the starting dates, finishing dates, and the duration of activities, the Programme shall show or incorporate, amongst other things: - The dates and periods allowed for the design of important Temporary Works. - The quantities and productivities used to calculate the duration of all activities. - Resource histograms showing the daily and cumulative requirements for the major categories of labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the Works in accordance with the Programme.

155

- The cost to the Employer of each activity based upon the rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities. - In the case of a sequential requirement for possession of Site, the areas involved, the dates upon which possession will be required and the expected duration of such possession. - Proper allowance for adverse weather conditions and any consequent disruption to the Works. - Proper allowance for any increase in traffic over during week-ends and public rest days. (ix) The Project Manager shall review the programme within 7 days, and where required by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the programme for the consent of the Project Manager. (x) Two copies of the Programme, in both electronic and printed form, and two copies of associated method statements are to be submitted each time. (xi) This version of the Programme, initially submitted under the Conditions of Contract and agreed by the Project Manager shall be used as a “Baseline Programme”. Any revised Programme shall be presented such that the Project Manager can identify the departures from the Baseline Programme and the revised resources necessary to meet the demands of the revised Programme.

119.2 Measurement and Payment

No separate payments shall be made for compliance under this Section. Payment shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates.

120 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND STAFF

120.1 Description

Contractor shall seek Engineer’s approval to employ following key personnel as fulltime engagement for construction management staff and technical supervisory staff with required qualifications as specified in the Bidding Document and accordance with these specifications.

a) Project Manager/ Contractors Representative Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 10 years of post-qualification in relevant field and full membership of recognized professional institution of Engineers or equivalent qualifications b) Geotechnical Engineer Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil/Earth Resource Engineering which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 5 years of post-qualification in 156

relevant field or equivalent qualifications c) Site Engineer Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 5 years of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications d) Quantity Survey or equivalent Bachelor’s Degree in the Quantity Surveying which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications e) Technical Officer NCT with 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications f) QA/QC Manager/ Material Engineer Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 3 years of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications g) Safety Officer 5 years of post-qualification in Health & Safety field in civil construction or equivalent qualifications h) Environmental Officer Bachelor’s Degree in Science which is recognized by the University Grants Commission with at least 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications

120.2 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement

Expenses of employing all necessary construction management staff &technical supervisory staff shall be measured monthly basis. The Project Manager may time to time withhold or deduct fully or partly payment under this section due to non- employment of key personnel or employment of incompetent under qualified personnel.

b. Payment

Payment shall include only for above mentioned key personnel. No separate payment shall be made for other staff of the Contractor. Pay Description Pay Unit Item Employing all necessary construction management staff 120(1) & Month technical supervisory staff

157

200 SITE CLEARING

201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

201.1 Description

This work shall consist of clearing and grubbing necessary for the performance of the work covered by the Contract in accordance with the Specification.

The work shall consist of clearing and grubbing the designated areas within the right of way including trees girth less than 300mm, dead wood, snags, vegetation, rubbish, loose boulders and objectionable material and shall include grubbing stumps and roots and disposing of all material resulting from the clearing and grubbing. It shall not include the demolition, removal and disposal of structures that obtrude into or encroach upon or obstruct the work, which are covered under Clause 202.

201.2 Preservation of Property

Existing roads, improvements, facilities, adjacent property, utilities, services, and trees and plants designated for preservation shall be carefully protected from injury or damage, which could result from the Contractor's operations.

201.3 Construction Methods a. General

Generally clearing and grubbing shall be performed on the areas designated by staking or detailed in the Contract. If no areas are so designated the areas, shall in principle be carried out over the entire area covered by right of way unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager. b. Clearning and Grubbing

All surface objects, all trees, including stumps and roots, stumps and roots of previously felled trees, overhanging branches, except those trees and objects the Project Manager directs to be left undisturbed, shall be cleared and grubbed subject to the following provisions:

(i) Outside the limits of the earthworks these are allowed to remain provided that the top of the stumps is not more than 300 mm above ground level. However, trees within these limits shall be cut so that the stumps are in line with the natural ground level as far as practicable.

158

(ii) Where lined drains or ditches are to be constructed stumps and roots shall be removed to a minimum depth of 250 mm below the excavated bottom or into the shaped slope. (iii) In cut areas removed to a depth of at least 0.15 m below the top of the existing ground level. (iv) All fences, buildings, structures, and encumbrances of any character, except those to be removed by others, upon or within the limits of the right of way, shall be removed by the Contractor and carefully placed on the abutting property or otherwise disposed of as indicated on the drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Materials so removed, including any existing drain or culvert pipes, which the Project Manager may order salvaged, shall be carefully removed and shall be the property of the Government. c. Disposal of Cleared Material (i) Saleable timber as designated by the Project Manager shall be neatly stored in an approved accessible place within or near the right of way as directed and shall be trimmed and staked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Government agency to which the timber belongs. (ii) Un-saleable timber may be used by the Contractor for his own purposes in connection with the Contract always provided that he has ascertained and complied with the requirements of the appropriate Government Agencies or Authorities. (iii) All un-saleable timber except that to be used, and all brushes, stumps, roots, logs and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be burned or be disposed by other means approved by the Project Manager. In such cases the Contractor will be solely responsible for making the necessary agreements and for paying the resulting expenses. Piles of material for burning shall be placed either at or near the centre of the cleared area, or in adjacent open spaces where no damage to trees, other vegetation and adjacent property shall occur. All burning shall be done in conformance with the regulations and at such times and in such a manner as to prevent the fire from spreading to areas adjoining the right of way.

(iv) At the end of such operations the roadway and adjacent areas shall be left with a neat and finished appearance. No accumulation of burnt, half burnt or other material shall remain on or adjacent to the right of way.

201.4 Back-filling of Holes and Depression Caused by Removal of Stumps or Loose Boulders As instructed by the Project Manager, holes and depressions caused by the removal of stumps or loose boulders shall be back-filled in layers with excavated or other approved materials and compacted at the appropriate moisture contents with vibrator tampers to required densities as per Section 304. The control of quality shall be exercised in accordance with Section 702.

159

201.5 Tests and Standards of Acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

201.6 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

Clearing and grubbing will be measured on a plan area basis by the square metre (m2), as indicated in Drawing on the actual work done at site. The work of clearing and grubbing at disposal sites, material sites, and borrow pit sites shall not be paid for when such areas outside the areas designated for clearing and grubbing.

Any areas occupied by existing asphalt, concrete or sealed road or otherwise maintained area are excluded from the designated areas and shall not be included in measurement.

Removal of trees, including stumps and roots unless otherwise specified, of girth less than 300 mm and overhanging branches of girth less than 300 mm shall be considered as included in clearing and grubbing.

Removal of trees including stumps and roots, as well as stumps and roots of previously felled trees of girth greater than 300 mm, shall be measured in numbers and separately assessed according to the size categories given below:

(a) Girth greater than or equal to 300 mm and less than 600 mm (b) Girth greater than or equal to 600 mm and less than 1,200 mm (c) Girth greater than or equal to 1,200 mm and less than 2,000 mm (d) Girth greater than or equal to 2,000 mm

Girth shall be measured at a level of 1.0 m above average ground level, or in case of stumps shorter than 1.0 m, at the highest level of the stumps.

Overhanging branches of trees of girth greater than 300 mm shall be measured as directed by the Project Manager. The girth shall be the girth of cut.

160

b. Payment

(i) Cleaning and grubbing

This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate. The rates shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to do the work and for doing all the cleaning and grubbing in the designated areas and as specified in these Specifications and the Special Provisions and as directed by the Project Manager including the removal, backfilling and compaction, reinstatement and making good, preservation of property, storage, transporting and disposal of all the resulting material.

(ii) Removal of Trees and Removal of Stumps of previously Felled Trees.

Payment for removal of trees and stumps shall be made at the Contract unit rates and shall be the payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. These will include felling, excavating, backfilling with suitable material in layers and compacting as per Section 201.4, handling, transporting, reinstatement and making good, preservation of property, storage and disposal.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

201(1) Clearing and grubbing inclusive of backfilling holes Square meter and trenches caused by removal of stumps 201(2) Removal of trees: 300 ≤ Girth < 600 mm Number 201(3) Removal of trees: 600 ≤ Girth < 1,200 mm Number 201(4) Removal of trees: 1,200 ≤ Girth < 2,000 mm Number 201(5) Removal of trees: 2,000 ≤ Girth mm Number Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 300 ≤ Number 201(6) Girth < 600 mm Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 600 ≤ Number 201(7) Girth < 1,200 mm Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 1,200 ≤ Number 201(8) Girth < 2,000 mm Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 2,000 ≤ Number 201(9) Girth mm 201(10) Removal of overhanging branches: 300 ≤ Girth mm Number

161

202 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

202.1 Description

This work shall consist of dismantling and removing existing retaining wall structures (i.e. gabion wall, mass & reinforce concrete, masonry and etc.), masonry structures and other structures such as guard rails, manholes, catch basins, inlets and the like which are in place, but interfere with the Works and are not suitable to remain in place, and salvaging and disposing of the resulting materials. It shall include the demolition, removal and disposal of buildings or parts thereof necessary to widen the existing right of way where such has not been undertaken or completed by the Employer or the building owners.

All materials obtained from dismantling shall be the property of the Employer.

Dismantling and removal operations shall be carried out with such equipment and in such a manner as to leave undisturbed any adjacent pavement, structures or other items specified to be left in place. All operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure which might endanger new work shall be completed prior to the start of the new work.

Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit his “Disposal Plan” to the Project Manager for approval.

202.2 Dismantling of Structures Structures shall be dismantled carefully and the resulting materials so removed as not to cause any damage to the serviceable materials to be salvaged, the part of the structure to be retained and any other properties or structures nearby.

Unless otherwise specified, the superstructure portion of culverts shall be entirely removed and other parts removed to below the ground level or as necessary depending upon the interference they cause to the new construction. Removal of overlying or adjacent material if required in connection with the dismantling of the structures shall be deemed to be included in this item.

Where existing culverts or retaining structures or drains are to be rehabilitated only such part or parts of the existing structure shall be removed as are necessary to provide a proper connection to the new work. The connecting edges shall be cut, chipped and trimmed to the required lines and grades without weakening or damaging any part of the structure to be retained. Reinforcing bars, which are to be left in place, so as to project into new work as dowels or ties shall not be damaged during removal of concrete.

Pipe culverts shall be carefully removed in such a manner as to avoid damage to the pipes.

162

Masonry structures shall be dismantled to the extent shown in the Drawings and as directed by the Project Manager. The serviceable materials shall be transported and stacked at locations approved by the Project Manager, and the unserviceable materials shall be disposed of as directed by the Project Manager

202.3 Salvaged Materials

Materials which may be used directly in the Permanent Works shall be stockpiled separately from those which require processing for reuse. The materials selected for processing should be of such quality as will meet the Specification after breaking, screening and mixing with better quality materials if necessary. The responsibility of selecting a particular material for processing or incorporating in the Permanent Works shall lie with the Contractor.

Acceptability of the materials (after processing as the case may be) shall be determined by the Project Manager and only such materials that satisfy the Specification in all respects shall be permitted for incorporation in the Permanent Works.

The materials failing to satisfy the Specification may be used in the Temporary Works or may be used in the lower layers of structure backfilling or to fill depressions, stump holes, boulder holes and the like with the approval of the Project Manager. The materials not required by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works, but which are of use to the Employer, shall be neatly stockpiled as directed by the Project Manager.

Structural and reinforcing steel obtained from dismantling existing structures shall not be considered suitable for use in the Permanent Works and shall be stored in a neat and presentable manner in locations suitable for loading. Structures or portions thereof which are specified in the Contract for re-erection, shall be stored in separate stockpiles. Pipe culverts that are removed in good condition shall be cleaned and neatly stockpiled at points designated by the Project Manager.

All the products of dismantling operations which in the opinion of the Project Manager cannot be used in the Works or reused by the Employer shall be disposed of outside the right of way or may be spread in deep borrow pits, as directed by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall comply with the laws, ordinances, building regulations, etc. as prevailing in Sri Lanka. Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain suitable barricades to prevent personal injury or damage to property.

202.4 Removal of Fences and Guard Rails

The work shall consist of removal of fences and guard rails at locations as instructed by the Project Manager. The re-useable material shall be removed with due care and stacked 163

and stored for re-use. The unusable material and debris shall be transported and disposed as instructed by the Project Manager.

202.5 Backfilling As instructed by the Project Manager, holes and depressions caused by dismantling operations shall be backfilled with excavated or other approved materials and thoroughly compacted to match surrounding areas as per section 201.4.

202.6 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The required and accepted work of dismantling and removing structures shall be measured as the cubic metre (m3) of structural material in place before demolition. Removal of fences shall be measured per linear metre (m). b. Payment

The Contract unit rate specified for the work concerned shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete all the work required by the Contract and as directed by the Project Manager.

Payment shall include full compensation for carrying out the operations described including but not limited to excavation, backfilling of excavations using approved materials, preparing and shaping, handling, sorting out, salvaging, stockpiling and disposing of material.

Pay Item Description Pay Unit 202(1) Dismantle and removal of rubble Cubic meter masonry structures 202(2) Dismantle and removal of gabion Cubic meter structures 202(3) Dismantle and removal of concrete Cubic meter (R/F and mass) structures 202(4) Dismantle and removal of dress stone Cubic meter masonry structures 202(5) Removal of fencing and Guard rail Linear meter

164

203 UTILITY RELOCATION

203.1 Description

Where utility relocation is encountered in construction work, it shall be executed by the Contractor under the co-supervision of the Project Manager and the utility agency with the consent of the utility agency.

203.2 Measurement and Payment

Payment shall be made as a Provisional Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has completed the works to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall also submit relevant proof documents. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5 % overhead and profit on top of the actual cost, in this regard.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Relocation of utility services as per requirements of Provisional 203(1) the utility service agency Sum

165

300 EARTHWORKS

301 SIDE SLOPE EXCAVATION OR TRIMMING

301.1 Description

Side slope excavation or trimming shall consist of all the required excavation within the limits of the right of way except excavation otherwise classified. The work shall include the removal, stockpiling, multiple handling, hauling and proper utilization in the Works or disposal to spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager of all excavation materials, and shaping of excavation and preparation of exposed surfaces of excavation on the entire length of the slopes, in accordance with the Specification and the lines, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and as required by the Project Manager.

Slope excavation or trimming shall include the following:

(i) All excavated material indicated on the Drawings within the faces of the cross- sections, excavation of all materials for approach roads, streets, intersections and all other areas but not including excavation for ditches, channels, berm ditches, drains and flumes.

(ii) Excavation for stream and channel diversion except where covered under Section 303.

(iii) Excavation not specified elsewhere but nonetheless required for a proper execution of the Works.

301.2 Classification of Materials a. Soil Suitable for Fill

Soil suitable for fill shall include all suitable materials excavated in accordance with the Specification which is not otherwise specified below as hard rock, soft rock, boulders, unsuitable soil, and material from slips /slides. b. Hard Rock Slope or retaining wall foundation excavation classified as hard rock shall include only slope or retaining wall foundation excavation which, in the judgment of the Project Manager, is not practicable without the use of pneumatic tools or drilling and chemical blasting operations. Hard rock shall not include boulders less than 1m3 in size. Hard rock shall not include material which, in the judgment of the Project Manager, can be loosened or excavated with equipment equivalent to that of the following description: 166

(i). Tractor Unit: Equipment with a minimum weight of 17 tones and net horse power rating of 150 HP or more. The tractor unit is to be in good condition and operated by experienced personnel skilled in the use of ripping equipment.

The ripper to be attached to the tractor shall be the most efficient parallelogram type recommended by the tractor or ripper manufacturer. The ripper shall have a single shank in first class condition with sharpened cutting point.

(ii). Bucket Excavator (backhoe): Equipment able to be fitted with a bucket of maximum size 0.3cubic metre. c. Boulders

Boulders shall comprise solid pieces of rock that are weathered on all faces (boulders) that are between 0.25 m3 and 1.0 m3 in volume. Boulders that exceed the stated volume shall be classified as Hard Rock. Boulders that are less than the stated volume shall be measured as Unsuitable Soil.

Measurement of boulders will take as the maximum dimension along the longest axis of the boulder (length) multiplied by the area of a circle of a circumference equal to the measured girth of the boulder at its widest point. d. Unsuitable Soil Excavation of soil from cuts above road level judged by the Contractor to be unsuitable in accordance with the Specification for use in the Works and approved as such by the Project Manager. No soil shall be classified as unsuitable without the approval of the Project Manager. Such unsuitable soil shall be excavated and disposed of to spoil tips as instructed by the Project Manager.

Normally highly organic clays and silts, peat soils containing excess of roots, grass and other vegetable matter shall be considered unsuitable. Materials that are soft or unstable merely because they are too wet or too dry shall not be classified as unsuitable unless otherwise so classified by the Project Manager. e. Material from Slips/ Slides

All the loosened and unstable debris such as soil, rock boulders and fragments, trees, vegetation must be cleared and removal from the site prior to commencement of implementing any mitigation measures. However, since there is a high tendency of slope instabilities followed by them, all such earth removal works must be undertaken under full supervision and instructions of the Project Manager. Hence in this regard, prior written approval must be obtained from the Project Manager for a clearly described methodology of statement.

167

f. De-Watering

If water is met within the cut area due to seepage, springs or rain, it shall be removed by suitable means as and where required by the Project Manager.

Care shall be taken to discharge the drain water so as cause no damage to the works or any adjacent property.

301.3 Construction Requirements

a) All excavation or trimming work shall be performed as specified required alignment, levels, grades and cross sections. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, excavation in hard rock shall extend a minimum of 200 mm below the required level for the entire width and shall be backfilled and compacted with suitable materials as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the

b) Engineer Topsoil encountered in excavation and classified as suitable for re-use shall be removed to such a depth as the Project Manager may direct and be neatly stockpiled. The topsoil so stockpiled shall be made available for the Works without additional charge. No topsoil shall be disposed of without prior written approval of the Project Manager.

All suitable excavated materials shall be deemed to be used in constructing the structure backfilling and slope rectification work. Unsuitable material and slope excavation in excess of that needed for executing the Works shall be known as spoil. Spoil shall be removed and disposed of at designated areas or spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager in such a manner as to present a neat appearance and to avoid obstruction to drainage or drainage to any road or road works or other property. The final condition of spoil tips shall be to the approval of the Project Manager.

All slopes shall be finished in a neat and workman like manner and to accuracy appropriable to the material and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. Breakages and slides shall be removed and disposed of as instructed.

168

All material derived from any excavation required for the Works shall be deemed to be the property of the Employer and the use of all such materials shall be in accordance with the Contract and to the approval of the Project Manager.

301.4 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

Unless otherwise specified, all required and accepted slope excavation/trimming shall be measured in its original position after clearing and grubbing; wherever applicable and the volume determined in cubic metres by the average end area method as computed from the original and final cross-sections of required and completed work. No allowance shall be made for bulking or shrinkage. Separate measurements shall be made for each class of material encountered.

Measurement of rock excavated as required in Section 301.2 herein shall be computed on the basis of excavation to the specified minimum depth only and no over break shall be included. Interim payment may be made on measured volumes of required excavation actually executed, before final shaping, provided the Co’ntractor's intention to complete the work is clear. Excavation for removal of slides, breakages and cave-ins shall not be measured nor paid for and shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates unless otherwise decided by the Project Manager. b. Payment

The quantities of excavation of soil suitable for fill are measured as specified above will be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for the various types as detailed below. Such rates shall include laboratory and field test, excavating, chemical blasting, drilling, breaking, uphold the sides, working space, taking precaution to avoid property damage, compaction, loading, transport, stockpiling.

The quantities of disposal of excess materials; any remainder after using materials, measured as specified above will be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for disposal of all type excess of excavation, to designated spoil tips or to spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, for shaping, dressing and completion of all surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. The rate for top soil shall include stockpiling or disposal as instructed.

The quantities of excavation of unsuitable materials measured as specified above will be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for the various types as detailed below. Such rates shall include laboratory and field test, excavating, chemical blasting, drilling, breaking, uphold the sides, working space, taking precaution to avoid property damage,

169

compaction, removal, stockpiling, multiple handling and satisfactory disposal of all type of excavation of unsuitable materials, to designated spoil tips or to spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, for shaping, dressing and completion of all surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. The rate for top soil shall include stockpiling or disposal as instructed.

The Contract unit rate specified for the work concerned shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, including compaction and trimming to specified tolerances as instructed by the Project Manager.

The slides cause due to the contractor’s less caution will not be measured or pay.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Excavation of slope(soil suitable for fill including soft 301(1) Cubic meter rocks) up to required angle (for reuse) Excavation of Boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3 (Provisional Cubic meter 301(2) Quantity) Excavation (chemical blasting) of Hard rock Cubic meter 301(3) (Provisional Quantity) 301(4) Excavation of Un-suitable soil disposal away from site Cubic meter Disposal of excess excavated materials, disposal away Cubic meter 301(5) from site

302 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL OF STRUCTURE

302.1 Description

This work shall consist of necessary excavations for retaining walls, lined drains and other structures. The work shall include the necessary diverting of streams; construction and subsequent removal of necessary cofferdams and cribs: all necessary sheeting; shoring, bracing, dewatering and pumping: removal of logs, stumps and other deleterious matter and obstructions for placing foundation; trimming and excavation: backfilling clearing the site of debris and disposal of excess excavated material.

The work shall be carried out in accordance with these Specifications and with the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

170

a. Line Drains

Excavation for lined drains shall be measured as excavation for structures and shall be measured to the dimensions of the drain as shown on the Drawings. Casting of concrete against the excavated earth faces will be permitted subject to the Project Manager's approval.

Drains shall be cleared of all debris prior to backfilling and any structural concrete above the top of bed level of proposed lined drain shall be removed and disposed of as noted in Section 202 herein. Drains shall be backfilled with suitable material in layers of appropriate thickness as detailed on the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Any spaces between the lined drain and over excavation for drains shall be cleared of debris prior top backfill. Such spaces shall be backfilled with suitable material in layers of appropriate thickness as detailed on the drawings and as directed by the Project Manager.

302.2 Classification of Materials a. Excavated Materials

The classification of excavated material shall be as given in Section 301.2 herein. b. Backfill Materials

Backfilling shall be with material approved as suitable soil. It shall be obtained from the structure excavation if the material is approved as suitable for backfilling. Any additional material needed shall be obtained from slope excavation or trimming unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager. c. Concrete for Foundation Fill

Concrete shall conform to the general requirements of Section 600 and concrete to be placed under water shall conform to the requirements of Section 601.10. Concrete to be used as foundation fill in dry excavation shall be made with aggregate and cement conforming to the requirements of Section 601 and shall be mixed and placed in accordance with Section 601.10, except that minimum cement content shall be 275 kilograms per cubic metre. d. Foundation Fill Material

Material for foundation fill shall consist of graded sand, gravel or crushed stone as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

171

302.3 Construction Requirements a. General

Prior to commencement of excavation operations, the limits of excavation shall be send out as shown in Drawings and as directed by the Project Manager.

The depth/thickness of excavation shall be as shown in the Drawings, unless the foundation strata encountered is such as to require changes. In the latter case the depth of excavation shall be as directed by the Project Manager. Where chemical blasting is required it shall be carried out under the Project Manager’s instructions and all necessary precautions given therein carefully observed.

After each excavation is completed the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager to that effect, and no bedding material or structure shall be commenced until the Project Manager has approved the depth of Excavation and the characteristics of the foundation material. b. Excavation for Foundation above Water Table

Unless otherwise directed excavation for foundations above water table shall be carried out to the width of the lowest step of the foundation and the sides lest vertical without shoring where the nature of the soil and the depth of excavation allow it. Where this is not possible the Contractor shall erect all necessary shoring, shuttering and planking for the safety of personnel and works, subjected to the approval of the Project Manager. c. Excavation for Foundation below Water Table

Where water is encountered within the excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs etc. the Contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing, pumping, construction of diversion channels and bunds, coffer damming and any other measures to keep the foundation trenches free from water as necessary.

Where coffer damming is required, these shall be constructed to adequate depths and heights with due regard to safety and stability and made as water-tight as necessary to permit work to be carried out inside them. The interior dimensions of the cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the construction and inspection and to permit installation of pumping machinery etc., as may be required within the enclosed area. d. Preparation of Foundation

The bottom of the foundation shall be to the lines and levels as given in the Drawings or as required by the Project Manager. Where this is in soil and above the water table it shall be watered where necessary and rammed and where it is below the water table it

172

shall be prepared as directed by the Project Manager.

Where rock strata are encountered, soft and weathered material shall be removed as necessary and the surface trimmed and dress as directed by the Project Manager.

If the excavation has been carried out deeper than necessary, as given in the Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the extra depth shall be made good with concrete or masonry of the foundation grade or any other approved material at the cost of the Contractor.

When, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the foundation material is soft, contains organic matter, or is otherwise unsuitable, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and insert foundation fill material, sand, rubble or concrete as specified or shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Project Manager. If foundation fills material is instructed it shall be placed and compacted in layers not more than 200 mm compacted thickness or as instructed by the Project Manager. The degree of compaction shall be the same as for embankment fill. Rubble used shall confirm to Section 603.2 herein and sand used shall confirm to Section 801.1 and Table 801-3 herein. e. Backfilling

Backfilling of the foundation shall be carried out in accordance with sub section 304.3 h (ii). As stated therein it shall be noted that the backfilling shall be done only after the foundation concrete or masonry has been in portion for at least 7 days and in a manner not to cause undue thrust on any part of the foundation. Wherever possible, the sides of the pit to be backfilled should be brought to the straight shapes enabling the use of small compactors or rollers. A step of 150 mm on every two layers of backfill and as directed by the Project Manager shall be maintained, especially on the road side to avoid differential settlements.

Where backfilling is required to the same level on more than one side of the structure, it shall be maintained at heights not differing by more than 400 mm on opposing sides of the structure as backfilling proceeds, unless otherwise agreed by the Project Manager.

If backfilling is required on more than one side of the structure, due to over excavation or collapse of sides or due to any other reason, backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with sub section 304.3 h (ii).

302.4 Test and Standards of Acceptance

The material shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall be prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

173

302.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement All excavation shall be according to dimensions as given in the Drawings prepared for the purposes of excavation and as directed by the Project Manager, in Cu.m., for each class of material encountered. Excavation for working spaces and contractors convenient will not be measured. Excavation shall be measured using undisturbed volume excavated from the top of the surface after doing necessary excavation, clear and grubbing.

Any excavation in excess of above other than what had been allowed by the Project Manager shall be considered as carried out for the convenience of the Contractor in exceeding the work and shall not be measured for payment.

For lined drains, excavation shall be measured as lined drain excavation and shall be measured to the dimensions of the drain as shown on the Drawings. Excavation for working spaces and contractors convenient will not be measured. Excavation shall be measured using undisturbed volume excavated from the top of the surface after doing necessary excavation, clear and grubbing.

Backfilling shall be measured using undisturbed volume in Cu.m., using the types of materials given in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. Backfill below the design levels and outside the dimensions as given in the Drawings prepared for the purposes of excavation will not be measured. b. Payment

The quantities of excavation for structures as measured above will be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for each class of material encountered. Such rates shall include full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment, safety measures and incidentals necessary to carry out the work to this Specification. This work shall include;

(i) Setting out (ii) Removal of all logs, stumps and other deleterious matter and obstructions for placing for foundations (iii) Cleaning the site and disposal of all surplus material (iv) Shoring, Excavation (v) Compaction, ramming (vi) Constructing and disposing all cofferdams, dewatering (vii) All safety precautions (viii) Preparation of base of foundation (ix) Diverting of streams.

174

The quantities of backfilling for structures as measures above will be paid for at the contract unit rate for filling for each type of fill material used. Such rates shall include full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment, safety measures and incidentals necessary to carry out the work to this Specification. For line drains, no separate or extra payment shall be made for backfilling which shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates. No extra or separate payment shall be made for over-excavation and there shall be no allowance for bulking or shrinkage.

No separate payment shall be made for the excavation for the working space.

Payment for cleaning of site shall be made under Pay Item 201(1) at Section 201.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Excavation for structures, soil suitable for filling 302(1) Cubic meter including soft rock for reuse Excavation for structures, boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3 Cubic meter 302(2) (Provisional Quantity) Excavation for structures (chemical Blasting), hard Cubic meter 302(3) rock (Provisional Quantity) Excavation for structures, unsuitable soil, disposal Cubic meter 302(4) away from site 302(5) Backfill with crush stone aggregate (20-200mm) Cubic meter 302(6) Backfill with suitable soil for structures Cubic meter

303 CHANNEL EXCAVATION

303.1 Description

This work consists of excavation for all channels, drains, ditches and the like both inside and outside the right of way where shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. The work shall include the proper utilization and hauling or disposal of all excavated materials, backfilling where required, constructing, shaping and finishing all earthwork involved in conformity with the required alignment, levels, grades and cross- sections.

All drainage works in any section shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Project Manager before approval is given to commence pavement operations.

175

303.2 Classification of Materials

Materials excavated shall be classified as noted in Section 301.2 herein.

303.3 Construction Method

The channels, drains, ditches and the like shall be excavated to the alignment, levels, grades and cross sections, required on the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Any excavation beyond the limits required shall not be paid for.

303.4 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

Channel or unlined drain excavation shall be measured as channel excavation and classified in accordance with Section 301.2 herein.

Quantities of channel excavation shall be measured in cubic metres determined by the average end area method computed from the original and the final cross-sections of the authorised and completed excavations. No allowance shall be made for bulking and shrinkage. b. Payment

The payment shall be full compensation for all excavation, dewatering, backfilling where required, multiple handling, hauling and otherwise properly using and disposing of materials in spoil tips, for establishing and maintaining access to channels and for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals. Pay Description Pay Unit Item

303(1) Channel excavation, soil suitable for fill Cubic meter Channel Excavation– boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3 Cubic meter 303(2) (Provisional Quantity) Channel Excavation (chemical blasting) – Hard rock Cubic meter 303(3) (Provisional Quantity) 303(4) Channel Excavation, unsuitable soil Cubic meter

176

304 FILLING WORK

304.1 Description

This work shall consist of the construction of filling and other miscellaneous backfill with approved material obtained either from the excavation of the roadway, slope excavation or trimming, borrow pits or other sources in accordance with these Specifications and lines, levels, grades, dimensions and Cross-sections shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

304.2 Materials

All materials which are deposited in place prior to compaction shall confirm to Section 804 herein and shall be evenly spread over the whole of the designated area for the layer concerned and in such quantity that the thickness of anyone layer, when measured after compaction, shall comply with the requirements specified.

Any new layer less than 75 mm in compacted thickness shall be bonded to the previous layer by scarifying the previous layer to a depth not less than 25 mm or to such greater depth so that the total compacted thickness of the new layer plus the scarified portion of the previous layer will not be less than 100 mm.

304.3 Construction Requirements a. Sources of Supply of Filling Material

All suitable material available from the roadway and other excavation shall be used for filling construction as directed by the Project Manager. Where additional materials are necessary they shall be obtained from approved borrow pits or other approved sources. b. Setting Out

The pegs or stakes showing the limits of the filling shall be fixed a suitable distance outside the actual limits of the fill and such pegs or stakes shall be painted in a distinctive colour for vicinity. c. Removal of Top Soil

Where the height of fill is more than 500 mm and less than 3.0 m, the topsoil shall be removed as described in Section 201 herein. Topsoil shall also be removed under fill whose height is greater than 3.0 m and where topsoil is required in other locations or on the instructions of the Project Manager. If the in-situ material conforms to Type II filling material it shall be compacted to a minimum depth of 150 mm to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density of the material at moisture content within 5% of the predetermined 177

optimum moisture content as determined by BS 1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T-180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS 1377 Test 15) at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as instructed by the Project Manager.

Where the height of fill is less 500 mm, the topsoil shall be removed as described in Section 201 herein. If the in-situ material conforms to Type I filling material, it shall be compacted to a minimum depth of 150 mm below formation level, or to such depth as instructed by the Project Manager, to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density of the material at moisture content within 5% of the predetermined optimum moisture content as determined by BS 1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T-180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS 1377 Test 15) at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as instructed by the Project Manager. d. Placing and Compaction of Filling Material

The material placed on the filling area shall be thoroughly broken down throughout the layer by means of equipment suitable for this purpose. During such processing the layer shall be frequently bladed using a grader to bring oversize material to the surface to facilitate breaking down. The material shall be broken down to a size not exceeding 70% of the compacted layer thickness. The compacted thickness of the layers will be dependent upon the size to which the material can be broken down by the technique used but shall in general not be greater than 225 mm.

In order that layer thicknesses are not dictated by the presence of isolated larger rocks or stones, the Project Manager shall instruct that the material which cannot be broken down to the size generally achievable for the rest of the material in the layer be removed from the fill.

Any water required before material is compacted shall be added to the material in successive applications by means of water bowsers fitted with sprinkler bars or by means of pressure distributors all capable of applying the water evenly and uniformly over the area concerned.

The water shall be thoroughly mixed with the material to be compacted by means of motor graders or other suitable equipment. Mixing shall continue until the required amount of water has been added and until a uniform mixture is obtained. Compaction may proceed when the moisture content of the un-compacted layer is within 5% of the predetermined optimum moisture content.

If the material is too wet it shall be dried by aeration and if it is too dry the material shall be sufficiently watered prior to compaction. Compaction shall be carried out as a continuous operation covering the full width of the layer and to be compacted with the available equipment before drying out

178

The types of compaction equipment to be used and the amount of rolling to be done shall be such as to ensure that specified densities are obtained without damage to the underlying layers or to structures. During compaction the layer shall be maintained to the required shape and cross section and all holes filled and ruts and laminations shall be removed.

The Project Manager may permit thicker layers than as specified above to be constructed, provided that he is satisfied that the specified densities can be obtained throughout the full depth of each layer and that the layers will be uniformly compacted by using equipment specifically suited to this purpose. Fill shall be placed in successive layers whose planes are parallel to the final surface, wherever this is practicable.

Each successive layer shall be placed only after the previous layer has been tested and found satisfactory as specified in Section 304.3(e) herein.

If at any time after compaction the layer is damaged by drying out or is damaged by rain, it shall be scarified, and re-compacted to the requirements of the specifications at the Contractor’s expense and to the approval of the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall ensure that oversize material be disposed of or utilized elsewhere in the construction of the Works. The Contractor shall exercise all reasonable care to avoid bringing onto the road material which cannot be broken down to the required size by processing on the road. This shall be avoided by proper selection in excavation in cut or in borrow. In cut such material shall be taken directly to spoil or shall be utilized as instructed by the Project Manager.

Unless otherwise specified, the top 500 mm of the embankment shall be constructed using Type I material and the lower layers of the embankment shall be constructed using Type II material, as specified in Section 804 herein. e. Degree of Compaction of Filling

The top 150 mm layer of the filling shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density of the material at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum moisture content as determined by BS-1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T- 180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS-1377 Test 15) at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as instructed by the Project Manager. The top of the layer shall be trimmed to line and level.

The remainder of the embankment shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density of the material at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum moisture content as determined by BS1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T- 180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS-1377 Test 15) at the rate specified in Section 702 herein.

179

f. Drainage of Protection of Filling

All permanent drains shall be constructed at the earliest opportunity, along with any temporary drains that may be necessary to protect the fill, and they shall be maintained in working condition throughout the construction period.

g. Finishing Operation

The fill shall be finished to levels, grades, slopes and Cross-sections shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Project Manager. Where specified the slopes of fill shall be top soiled and grassed, measured and paid in accordance with Section 501 and 502 respectively.

h. Filling Work under Special Condition

(i) Fill on Hill Slopes

Where filling are to be constructed on hill slopes, adequate bonding between the existing slope and new filling shall be established by removing the top soil and benching into the existing slope in vertical and horizontal faces including rock and the fill built in successive layers. (ii) Filling around Structures The Contractor shall take special precautions to see that the construction work of structures is not disturbed as a result of the filling operations and that the filling in the vicinity of a structure shall not be carried out till the concrete or masonry or gabion had been in position at least for 7 days, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager.

Filling around structures shall be carried out using suitable material and compacted to densities given in sub section 304.3(e) using special equipment such as mechanically operated hand rammers. The control on the quality of materials and works damage is done to the structure by these operations.

The filling shall be brought up simultaneously on each side of the structure to avoid unequal pressure acting on it. Any damage that is caused to the structures by the negligence of the Contractor shall be made good by him at his own expense.

304.4 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement Filling work shall be measured as compacted in Cu.m. The undisturbed volume of fill material within the design area shall be computed by the average end area method on Cross-sections given in the Drawings or on Actual Cross-sections taken at site before and after the construction of the fill. No measurement should take for the settlements and voids for such as culverts should be excluded. 180

Filling work using rock shall be measured in Cu.m. in the same manner as for earth fill. The trimming, levelling and compaction of original ground shall be measured in Sq.m.

Application of topsoil on filling slopes and verges shall be measured as given in Section 501. Filter medium behind earth retaining structures shall be measured separately as given in Section 405.

b. Payment

Payment will be based on the Contract unit rate for the separate items as measured above and shall include full compensation for all labour, materials, transport, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete the work to the Specification. This work shall include the following where applicable.

(i) Setting out and pegging (ii) Scarifying and benching slopes of existing fill and hill sides (iii) Special arrangements and equipment that may be necessary for working under restricted conditions such as in the vicinity of structures. (iv) Laying and compaction of suitable material.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 304(1) Fill in slope by using excavated soil including soft rock Cubic meter 304(2) Filling work using rock material Cubic meter

305 NON – EXPLOSIVE BLASTING OPERATIONS 305.1 Description

This work shall consist of the breaking of rock or boulders using non-explosive expansive silent cracking agent for removing of unstable boulders, formation of foundation for structurers and excavation of hard rock in accordance with these Specifications and lines, grades, levels, dimensions and Cross-sections shown in the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. The work shall include the removal, stockpiling, multiple handling, hauling and proper utilization in the Works or disposal to spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager of all excavation materials.

181

305.2 Materials

Material used for blasting operation shall be non-explosive expansive silent cracking agent. The Contractor shall get prior approval for the blasting material.

305.4 Construction Requirements

Design of blasting operation and drilling design shall be done by a Mining Engineer and design shall be submit to the Project Manager for approval.

The Contractor shall submit a method statement for the approval of the Project Manager. The method statement shall consist with blasting design, drilling design, safety management etc. and shall submit for the approval of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager 14 days prior to commencing of the blasting operation and the Work shall be carried out according to the method statement approved by the Project Manager. Blasting operation shall not produce any noise or vibration.

305.5 Measurement and Payment

Measurement and payment shall be made according to the Sections 301, 302 and 303.

182

400 DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION

401 CUT-OFF DRAINS, CASCADE DRAINS AND SURFACE DRAINS

401.1 Description

The construction of drains, un-lined or lined, and covered where required, to dimensions, grades and in positions shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Project Manager.

401.2 Materials

The materials used for lining the drains shall meet the requirements of the following, unless otherwise specified.

a) Reinforcing steel to SLS 375, SLS 26 or BS 4449 b) Formwork used shall be of steel or any other material approved by the Project Manager conforming the Section 604 c) Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications. d) The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified in Section 602.

401.3 Construction Requirements a. Excavation for Drains

The excavation shall be carried out as detailed in Section 302. b. Line Drains

All drains that are designated to be lined shall be constructed as shown in drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

In-situ construction with concrete Grade C25 or C20 shall be carried out as shown in the Drawings or as instructed

In cascade drains, the fixing of dowels into the designated depths shall be as shown in Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. c. Expansion Joints

10 mm thick expansion joint should be provided as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. The Contractor should be get prior approval for joint sealant material applies for expansion joint from the Project Manager. 183

d. Weep holes for Raised Drainage Walls

Weep holes shall be made of PVC pipe (Type 600) for the raised drainage walls to facilitate the drainage of any water collected at the back of the structure, as per the drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. When pipes are embedded in the drainage walls, they shall be laid to the slope given in Drawings or required by the Project Manager and shall extend from the rear face to the front face of the structure. They shall be protected from ingress of materials during construction and shall be cleaned before backfilling is placed behind the structure.

401.4 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement The excavation for lined drains shall be measured and paid as provided in Section 302 herein.

Measurement of lining of drains shall be in cubic metres. Reinforcement and Formwork for concrete shall be measured separately in kilograms and in square metre respectively.

The weep holes for raised drainage walls shall be measured in linear metres of weep holes. b. Payment No separate payment shall be made for compliance of expansion joint works and polythene cover for concrete, payments shall deemed to be included in the concrete rates and prices.

Payment for supply and installation of dowels shall include drilling, grouting, cutting, tying etc., to complete the works.

The excavation for lined drains shall be paid as provided in Section 302.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Concrete C15/20 for beds poured on or against earth or 601(1) Cubic meter un-blinded hardcore 601(2) Concrete C20/20 for walls and base of drains Cubic meter 601(3) Concrete C25/20 for walls and base of drains Cubic meter 602(1) Tor – Steel reinforcement Kilograms

604(1) Formwork for concrete sides of drains plain smooth Square meter 184

finish

605(1) Supply and installation of 20 mm dia. hot dipped Linear meter galvanized Mild steel dowels

401(1) 50mm dia. PVC Weep holes (type 600) for raised Linear meter drainage walls

402 SUB-SURFACE DRAINS (UNDERDRAINS OR TRENCH DRAINS)

402.1 Description

This work shall consist of construction of subsurface drains (under drains or trench drains) and drains outlets using perforated pipes, non-perforated pips and granular filter material. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Plans or as directed by the Project Manager.

402.2 Materials

The non-perforated pipes shall be of concrete, PVC or earthen, conforming to following standards.

 Concrete pipes to SLS 452  PVC pipes to SLS 147  Earthen ware pipes to SLS 449

The filter material shall be Geotextile/filter fabrics to requirement given in Section 805.

Unless otherwise instructed, the perforated pipe to be installed shall be 110mm PVC (Type 600) pipe. The pipe shall be drilled with 100 mm x 5 mm grooves at 100 mm centres on the bottom half of the perimeter of the pipes as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

Granular filter material, for bedding and for surrounding the pipe under-drains, shall be single graded aggregate of maximum size 37.5 mm conforming to the requirements of Section 801 unless or otherwise specified by the Project Manager.

402.3 Construction Requirements

a. Sub-surface drains

Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required and a minimum of 150 mm thick bedding layer of granular filter material shall be compacted in the bottom of the trench for its full width and length.

185

Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of the granular filter material with soil or silt or other deleterious material during construction of the sub surface drains and all filter material contaminated shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Perforated pipes unless otherwise required, shall be laid with the perforations down and the pipe sections shall be securely jointed as specified or directed.

After the pipe installation has been approved, granular filter material shall be placed to a depth as specified so as to completely surround the pipe as shown in the Drawings or required by the Project Manager. Single sized aggregate of nominal maximum size of 37.5 mm, instead of granular filter material can be used with the approval of the Project Manager. The remaining portion of the trench shall then be filled and compacted in layer of 300 mm with impervious materials, as specified.

Where specified or ordered by the Project Manager, geo-fabric filter as specified in Sub- section 805.6 shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Filter fabric shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for prolonged and shall be protected from mechanical damage during installation and construction. b. Subsurface Drain Outlets

Trenches for the outlets shall be excavated, to the dimensions required by the Project Manager. The outlet pipes shall be laid on approved compacted bedding in the trench with their ends firmly jointed as required. On approval of the pipe installation the trench shall be back filled with approved suitable material and compacted in layers in accordance with section 304.3(d). c. Aggregate Drains

Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required and fill with filter material (20mm single graded aggregate) shall be compacted of the trench for its full width and length.

Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of the granular filter material with soil or silt or other deleterious material during construction of the gravel pack drains and all filter material contaminated shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Where specified or ordered by the Project Manager, geo-fabric filter as specified in Sub- section 805.6 shall be installed as shown in drainage drawings.

186

402.4 Test and standard of acceptance

402.5 Measurement & Payment

a. Measurement

Excavated and approved soil back fill shall be measured and paid for as provided for Section 302.

For subsurface drains; perforated and outlet drain pipes shall be measured by the linear meter along the centre line of the pipe for each type and size specified. No separate measurement for granular filter material and filter fabric. For aggregate drains shall be measured by linear meter along the centre line of the drain including filter fabric.

b. Payment

The quantities as determined above will be paid for at the Contract unit price which shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing of all materials such as geo-fabric, granular filter and PVC perforated pipe and including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed.

No separate payment shall be made for outlet preparation of the sub-surface drains and aggregate drains.

The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows: Pay Description Pay Unit Item

402(1) Sub-surface drain – PVC pipe Dia 110 mm (type 600) Linear metre 402(2) Aggregate drains Linear meter

403 CATCHPITS AND INLETS

403.1 Description

This work shall consists of construction of manholes, catch-pits and inlets for underground drainage systems in accordance with these Specifications and with the lines

187

and levels as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

The inlets may be of gully type or side entry type or a combination of both as shown in the Drawings.

403.2 Materials

Materials shall conform to the requirements of the following unless otherwise specified.

 Reinforcing steel to SLS 375 or CS 26  Cement mortar for jointing to Section 802  Mastic joint filler shall be of the approved varieties  Frames, grating, covers and any other incidental items shall be as given in the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract documents

403.3 Construction Requirements

All excavation and backfill required for construction shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Section 302.

Inlets, catch-pits and manholes shall be constructed in-situ. In-situ construction of catch- pits shall be carried out using concrete as specified or instructed at site. Depth of the catch-pit as specified or instructed at site.

In-situ construction of inlets shall be carried our using concrete Grade C25.

Formwork for in-situ concreting of units shall conform to the requirements of Section 604.

403.4 Tests and standards of acceptance

403.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The excavation for inlets and catch-pits new or reconstructed shall be measured and paid as provided in Section 302 herein.

188

Measurement of Concrete inlets and catch-pits new or reconstructed shall be in cubic metres. Reinforcement and Formwork for concrete shall be measured separately in kilograms and in square metre respectively.

b. Payment

The excavation for manholes, inlets and catch-pits shall be paid as provided in Section 302.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Concrete C15/20 for beds poured on or against earth or 601(1) Cubic meter un-blinded hardcore 601(3) Concrete C25/20 for walls and base of catch pits Cubic meter 602(1) Tor – Steel reinforcement Kilograms Formwork for concrete sides of drains plain smooth Square meter 604(1) finish

404 BERM SEALING

404.1 Description

The work shall consist of construction of berm seals in accordance with these Specifications and locations and thicknesses as specified in Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

404.2 Materials Materials shall conform to the requirements of the following unless otherwise specified.

 Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications.  Mastic joint filler shall be of the approved varieties

404.3 Construction Requirements

In-situ construction of berm seals with concrete Grade C25 shall be carried out as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. At every 5 m interval should be maintained 10 mm width expansion joint and sealed the joint with joint sealant approved by the Project Manager.

189

404.4 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement

Measurement of Concrete for berm sealing shall be in cubic metres.

b. Payment

No separate payment shall be made for expansion joint and polythene cover for concrete as per drawings and payments shall deem to be included in the concrete rates and prices.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 601(3) Concrete C25/20 for berm sealing Cubic meter

405 DRAINAGE BACKFILL BEHIND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

405.1 Description

This work shall consist of the construction of a permeable layer of aggregate behind retaining structures to facilitate the free drainage of the retained soil layers (including any backfill) through the weep-holes of the structure.

The layer shall consist of a layer of large sized aggregate backfill immediately behind the wall and a layer of graded small aggregate, referred to as the filter medium placed along the sloping face of the aggregate backfill.

All works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specification and in conformity with Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager

405.2 Materials

(a) Aggregate Backfill

The aggregate backfill shall be free draining and normally consist of aggregate larger than 20 mm and smaller than 200 mm, shall consist of hard and durable crushed stone.

(b) Filter Medium

190

The filter medium shall be Geotextile/ filter fabrics to requirement given in Section 805.

405.3 Construction Requirements

Prior to placement of the larger size aggregate behind the structure, the soil layer, on which the aggregate is placed, shall be well compacted and made impervious either by constructing a clay puddle or by the application of a bituminous binder or gauge 1000 polythene as required.

The aggregate backfill shall be placed along the wall and to a stable configuration and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed. The material shall be hand packed using a hand tamper.

405.4 Tests and standards of acceptance

405.5 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement

The quantity to be measured shall be the number of Cu.m placed, compacted and accepted in place, separately for the aggregate backfill and the filter medium.

b. Payment

The work measured as provided above will be paid for at the unit price per Cu.m of drainage backfill behind earth retaining structures. The price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals required to finish and acceptably place the materials.

There shall be no separate payment for the impervious layer and payment shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 405(1) Aggregate backfill – 20-200 mm Cubic meter

191

406 WEEPHOLES FOR EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURE 406.1 Description

This work shall consist of providing opening in earth retaining structures to facilitate the drainage of any water collected at the back of the structure, as given in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager and in accordance with these Specifications.

The weep holes may either be cast in-situ or consist of pipes embedded in the structure.

406.2 Materials

Unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager, weep holes shall be made of PVC pipe (Type 600).

406.3 Construction Requirements

When pipes are embedded in the earth retaining structure, they shall be laid to the slope given in Drawings or required by the Project Manager and shall extend from the rear face to the front face of the structure. They shall be protected from ingress of materials during construction and shall be cleaned before backfilling is placed behind the structure.

406.4 Tests and standards of acceptance

406.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The weep holes for earth retaining structures shall be measured in linear metres of weep holes. b. Payment

Payment shall be based on the Contract unit price for the item and shall include full compensation for all materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work to the Specifications.

192

The pay Items and pay Units will be as follows;

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Weep holes using PVC pipes (Type 600) – diameter to 406(1) Linear metre be specified

193

500 INCIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION 501 TOP SOILING

501.1 Description

This work shall consist of supply of topsoil furnished and transported from approved sources or stockpiles and spread in conformity with these Specifications at locations shown on Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. Generally where top soil is stockpiled adjacent to the Works, filling slopes shall be top soiled in accordance with the Project Manager's instructions.

501.2 Materials

Top soil provided by the Contractor or salvaged during clearing and grubbing shall consist of loose friable natural surface soil free of admixtures of sub soil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, weeds or other material which would be conductive to proper development of vegetative growth.

501.3 Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager at least 7 days before he intends to start collecting top soil from specified areas.

Unless otherwise specified top soil shall not be spread on slopes steeper than 1:1.5 (1 vertical to 1.5 horizontal). Slopes steeper than 3:1 shall be scarified to depths indicated in Plans or established by the Project Manager, prior to placing top soil. The area to be top soiled shall normally be roughened by hand scarifying, or by any other means approved by the Project Manager, to ensure the stability of top soil spread.

After the Project Manager has approved the prepared and graded areas, top soil shall be spread to a thickness after settlement shall not be less than 75 mm or the depth shown on Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Spreading shall not be done when the ground or the top soil is excessively wet or in a condition considered detrimental to the work. The topsoil layer shall be leveled off and raked.

The slope surface shall be kept clean during hauling and spreading operations. After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones larger than about 40 mm in diameter and any roots, stumps and other litter shall be raked up and removed and disposed of at an approved location. 501.4 Test and standards of acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the 194

prescribed standard of acceptance.

501.5 Measurement and Payment

No separate payment shall be made for compliance of items under this section. Payments shall be deemed to be included in the Section 802.

502 GRASSING

502.1 Description

This work shall consist of providing grass cover by seeding, sprigging or sodding, including soil preparation, fertilizing, mulching and watering as required, in conformity with these Specifications and with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

502.2 Materials a. Grass Seeds

The grass seeds shall be of an accepted variety reputed to produce a good grass cover. Seeds shall be furnished by the Contractor in standard sealed containers along with seed name, weight and other details as necessary.

Where required, a certificate from the vendor stating that the seeds have been tested within a stipulated period of time, not exceeding 6 months, and prior to the time of delivery shall be furnished. b. Grass Sods

Grass sods shall be of living vigorous growth of the type of grass to the size of 200 mm x 150 mm and thickness specified, having a dense root system, contained in suitable sods and free form noxious weeds and diseases and shall contain a minimum of 50 mm of topsoil. c. Fertilizer Fertilizer shall be from a standard commercial grade conforming to all relevant regulations and shall provide the minimum percentage of nutrients specified.

The fertilizer shall be evenly applied over all surfaces where grass is to be planted and shall then be thoroughly mixed with the soil to a depth of 100 mm either mechanically or manually.

Where the type of fertilizer is not specified the Contractor shall obtain the Project 195

Manager approval prior to use of a particular fertilizer. d. Mulch Mulch used shall be straw, hay, saw dust or any other similar material specified in the Contract. They shall be free from material injurious to plant growth. e. Water

Water used in planting or care of vegetation shall be free from oils, acids, alkalis, salts or any other substance injurious to plan life. f. Plants

Plants used in soil nailed surface shall consist of deep root system such as Vetiveria.

502.3 Construction Requirements

The area to be grassed shall meet the specified finish grades, be free of any weeds or plant growth, stones and other debris.

If top soiling is required it shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Section 501. The surface, where required, shall be loosened by raking. a. Planting/Seeding on soil nailed surface

Plants or seeds shall be filled in to the coir mesh pockets along with soil and fertilizers prior to laying of high tensile wire mesh on soil nailed surface as per the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. The Contractor should get prior approval for the method of Planting/Seeding from the Project Manager. b. Sodding (Turfing)

Sodding shall be done just before or during the rainy season or as instructed by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager not less than 7 days before cutting of sods begin. Sods shall be approved by the Project Manager, in its original position before cutting and delivery to the site. Areas to be covered with sods shall be given a layer of top soil 75 mm thick unless, due to the presence of suitable subsoil, the Project Manager orders that the topsoil be omitted.

The areas to be covered with sods shall be thoroughly watered beforehand so that they are wet to a depth of at least 150 mm when sodding is done. Sods shall be laid on the prepared sod-bed within 24 hours after cutting expect where the Project Manager has approved their being stored in stacks or piles, grass or root to root, for a period not

196

exceeding 3 days.

The moving and laying of sods shall be done as far as possible, when weather conditions and soil moisture are favorable. Sodding may be done in one of the following methods as designated in the Drawings or as approved by the Project Manager. a) Solid sodding b) Strip sodding c) Spot sodding

In solid sodding, sods shall be laid edge to edge with staggered joints and the joints where necessary shall be filled with suitable top soil. After laying and joint filling, sodding shall be tamped in an approved manner to provide and eve surface. On slopes of 2:1 or steeper sods shall be pegged after tamping, at approximately 0.6 metre centres and close to the center of sods.

Strips sods shall be laid in parallel rows as indicated in Drawings or as required by the Project Manager. Each strip of sod shall be of width shown in Drawing or approved by the Project Manager and shall be laid in a shallow trench and firmly tamped until the surface of the sod is approximately level with the adjacent ground.

Spot sodding shall consist of sod blocks laid as shown on Drawings or as required by the Project Manager. The piece of sod shall be firmly tamped so that the surfaces of sod blocks are approximately level with the adjacent ground.

All grassed areas, be it by seeding or by sodding, shall be watered and cared for and maintained for a minimum period of 3 months in a satisfactory condition until final inspection and acceptance of the work.

Hydro seeded areas where grass has not taken root and sodded areas where grass has died, shall be made good by the Contractor by suitably replanting before final acceptance. At the time of acceptance, areas considered by Engineer as poorly grassed shall not be measured for payment and the Contractor may be given a further extension of time for replanting and correction of such areas as required.

502.4 Test and standard of acceptance

502.5 Measurement & Payment

a. Measurement

197

The quantity measured for payment, in each method of grassing (i.e. planting/seeding on soil nailed surface or sodding) shall be the area measured along the slope in Sq.m. and accepted in place by the Project Manager. Transporting to site, soil mixing to improve the soil, miscellaneous works, such as preparation of temporary working platforms and maintenance will not be measured separately, but their cost shall be deemed to be included in the rate for grassing.

b. Payment

The work measured as above will be paid for at the Contractor’s unit rate for the particular method of grassing. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing of materials, labour, equipment, tools, fertilizer and incidentals necessary to complete the work and for the supply and placing of timber stakes and top soiling under Section 501 and for all other incidentals that may be required to establish an acceptable cover and to maintain the grass.

The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows: Pay Description Pay Unit Item

502(1) Planting/Seeding on nailed surface Square meter 502(2) Sodding/Turfing Square meter

503 GABION WALLS AND MATTRESSES USING WIRE MESH

503.1 Description This section covers the construction of gabion walls and mattresses for the construction of retaining walls, lining of channels, revetments, aprons and other anti-erosion structures to hill slopes, filling slopes, stream banks and etc.

The Gabions/mattresses shall be flexible, box/mattresses shape with galvanized steel wire mesh cages of rectangular sides, packed with rock and in constructing the walls/mattresses, as indicated in Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

503.2 Materials

Unless otherwise specified the material used shall meet the following requirements.

a) Double twisted hexagonal mesh made of zinc coated mild steel conforming to BS 1052:1980, BS 443:1982.

b) Binding and connecting wire of at least 3.2 mm diameter galvanized to the same 198

standard as the mesh wire.

c) Broken rock for filling baskets shall preferably be of sizes normally varying from about 100 mm in minimum dimension to about 300 mm in maximum dimension and they shall be clean, hard and durable, free from weathered pieces and extraneous matter. The rock shall be reasonably well graded between the two limiting size d) Where indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Project Manager, a layer of filter fabric, or approved equivalent material shall be placed on the prepared surface prior to the placing of the gabions. The filter fabric shall be placed as instructed in vertical strips with a minimum overlap 300 mm and shall be properly fastened to prevent any movement or slipping during the placing of gabions.

e) Granular backfill material to Section 801

503.3 Construction Requirements

The hill slopes, filling slopes or stream banks which the Gabion walls are to abut shall be suitably trimmed and the ground on which the Base of gabion walls is to be constructed shall be leveled and compacted required.

Where no firm Base layer is specified the ground shall be well compacted and leveled prior to placing of the gabions as specified in Drawings or as required by the Project Manager. A thin layer of Nominal single graded aggregates shall be spread over the compacted soil, if required by the Project Manager. Basket shall, where appropriate, be maintained square and with an inclination as specified in Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager during filling. Internal tie wires shall be inserted and baskets shall be tensioned.

The wire basket for gabions shall be made out of double twisted hexagonal mesh. The size of gabion boxes will be 1 m x 1 m x 1 m or as instructed by the Project Manager. The length shall be multiples of one metre subject to a maximum of 4.0 m. The gabions shall have diaphragm walls at 1.0 m intervals.

The general Specifications of gabions are as follows:

Thick Mesh Wire Dia. Stone size D50 ness Type (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm x mm) 500 100 x 120 2.70 120 – 250 190 1000 100 x 120 2.70 120 – 250 190

199

The filling of baskets shall be carried out in-situ, unless otherwise directed. This requires that the empty baskets, open on the top, be positioned on the Base or top of the gabions and in-filled with the rock pieces in such a manner as to completely fill up the baskets leaving only the minimum of voids prior to closing and securely tying the lid using wire of approved gauge. In building the wall the gabions shall be placed with staggered joints and where so required they shall be tied together using standard of wire.

The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of gabions, except the bottom edge of the diaphragms and end panels, shall be selvedge with galvanized wire having a diameter of at least 0.5 mm more than that of the mesh wire.

The diaphragms and end panels shall be selvedge on the top and vertical sides only.

Sufficient binding and connecting wire shall be supplied with the gabion cages to perform the connecting operations in accordance to these Specifications. The diameter of the wire shall be at least 3.2 mm.

The methods of assembly shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions but the Contractor shall ensure that sufficient connecting wire braces are provided to prevent deformation of the cages as they are being filled with stone.

It is essential that the corners of the gabions / cages be securely wired together to provide a uniform surface and to ensure that the structure does not appear as a series of blocks or panels.

Particular care shall be exercised in filling visible faces of gabion boxes, for which only selected stones of adequate size shall be used and be so prepacked that a fair faced finish is obtained. The filling of boxes shall be done in stages in order to prevent deformation and bulging.

As the wall is being constructed the spaces between the gabions and the slopes shall be backfilled in stages with granular backfill material after placing the filter behind gabion wall. After which the granular backfill material shall be compacted well by rodding and other suitable means approved by the Project Manager without damaging the filter fabric.

The filling of mattresses shall be carried out by spreading, random stones on the first layer and using selected stones for the top layer so as to present a dry stone-pitch surface.

503.4 Test and standards of acceptance

200

503.5 Measurement & Payment

a. Measurement

The gabion walls shall be measured in Cu.m, completed and accepted.

The filter fabric and mattresses shall be measured in Sq.m.

b. Payment

The quantities determine for gabion walls as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including mesh, assembling, tying, fixing, staking, tensioning, fill, compacting cutting and shaping the slopes and forming the ground and preparing the base on which the wall was built.

The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows: Pay Description Pay Unit Item

503(1) Gabion wall and base preparation using Rubble Cubic meter 503(2) Filter fabric/Geotextile Square meter

504 WOVEN WIRE FENCE

504.1 Description

This work shall consists of construction of safety fences of the type indicated and constructed in accordance with the Specification and with the dimensions, lines and levels indicated in Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

504.2 Materials

Unless otherwise specified the material used shall meet the following requirements.

a) Steel section for posts to CS 73 (Ceylon Standards)

b) Woven wire mesh for fences to SLS 407, 793 and 1148 (wire diameter minimum 3 mm) c) Anti-corrosive paints and enamel paints for steel section

201

504.3 Construction Requirements

Prior to planting the fence posts in the required manner, the ground should be graded where necessary, so as to provide a neat appearance of the fence line. All the post shall be set vertically. The posts shall be embedded in concrete and the Contractor shall install temporary supports as may be required to hold the posts in proper positions, until such time as the concrete has set sufficiently to hold the posts. Unless otherwise specified a minimum period of 7 days shall be allowed before such posts are subjected to any stress. Bracing shall be provided to posts where specified or where required by the Project Manager.

Woven wire mesh of the type and size required, shall be firmly attached to the fence, a braced in the manner indicated in the Drawings or directed by the Project Manager. All woven wire mesh shall be stretched out and shall be installed to the required elevations.

504.4 Test and standards of acceptance

504.5 Measurement & Payment a. Measurement

Unless otherwise specified, fence shall be measured by the length metres as accepted by the Project Manager.

b. Payment

The unit rate of payment for each item of work shall be full compensation for all labour, equipment, tools, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete the work including painting as specified.

The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows:

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

504(1) Woven wire fence (wire diameter minimum 3 mm) Linear meter

202

600 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

601 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

601.1 Concrete Grades

Concrete Classes shall be replaced by concrete grades defined per BS 5328 as follows;

Table 601-1 – Concrete Grades Characteristic Strength Grade (MPa) C15 15 C20 20 C25 25 C30 30 C40 40 C50 50

The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 20 mm for all grades except for grade C15 for which 40 mm shall be permitted.

601.2 Minimum Cement Content and Water/Cement Ratio

The minimum cement content and water / cement ratio for different grades of concrete shall be as follows:

Table 601-2 – Minimum Cement Content and Water / Cement Ratio Type of Minimum Maximum Concrete cement free content (kg / water/cement m3) ratio Unreinforc 275 0.65 ed Reinforced 300 0.60 Pre- 325 0.55 stressed

The cement content shall not exceed 550 kg/m3

203

601.3 Volume Proportioning of Concrete

Volume proportioning (Batching) shall not be permitted for structural concrete except for grade 20 and under.

601.4 Workability of Concrete

The concrete shall be of suitable workability for full compaction to be obtained. The slump shall be measured in accordance with BS 1881.

Table 601-3 – Workability of Concrete Use of Concrete Nominal Permitted Slump Deviation Reinforced Concrete in slabs, beams, 75mm 士 25 walls, precast components and columns Reinforced Concrete i slabs, beams, 125 mm 士 25 walls, precast components and columns containing congested reinforcement

601.5 Chloride and Sulphate Content

The Chloride and Sulphate contents in concrete from all sources shall conform to values shownin the Table below:

Table 601-4 – Chloride and Sulphate Contents in Concrete

Maximum total Maximum total acid Type or Use of cement Chloride content soluble sulphate expressed content expressed as Chloride ions by SO3 by mass of mass of cement cement Pre-stressed concrete or 0.1 % 4 % steam cured reinforced concrete Concrete made with Sulphate 0.2 % 4 % resisting Portland cement to BS 4027 All other 0.3 % 4 %

601.6 Trial Mixes

204

The Contractor shall prepare trial mixes having workability, strength, and surface finish criteria, to satisfy the Project Manager regarding these qualities. The trial mixes shall be made and compacted in the presence of the Project Manager; using the same type of plant and equipment as will be used for the works. The concreting plant and means of transport employed to make the trial mix and to transport them representative distances shall be similar to the corresponding plant and transport to be used in the Works.

From each trial mix, test cubes shall be taken as follows. For each mix a set of six cubes shall be made from each of three consecutive batches. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of 28 days and three at an earlier age approved by the Project Manager. The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. The tests shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the Project Manager.

From the same mix as that from which the test cubes are made, the workability of the concrete shall be determined by the Slump Test in accordance with BS 1881 or other method approved by the Project Manager. The remainder of the mix shall be cast in a metal mould and compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mould shall be struck and the surface examined in order to satisfy the Project Manager that an acceptable surface can be obtained with this mix

A trial mix for a particular grade shall be accepted when the average strength of the nine cubes, tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the current margin minus 3.5 MPa. In addition the consistency shall be to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

The characteristic strength of the various classes of concrete shall be determined as soon as the first 30 test results of each class become available.

The characteristic strength shall be calculated by the equation:

X0 = X̅ - kS

Where: Xo : characteristic strength, X̅ : mean or average of the series of results k : 1.64. S : standard deviation given by the equation:

S = {Ʃ–(X- X̅ )2 / (N - 1)}1/2

Where X : the individual result N : the total number of results When a proposed mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the mix 205

proportions, or in the type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents without the consent of the Project Manager who may require further trial mixes to be made before any such variation is approved. Until the results of trial mixes for a particular grade have been approved by the Project Manager, no concrete of the relevant grade shall be placed in the works.

When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, trial mixes may be dispensed with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Project Manager that the factory regularly produces concrete, which complies with the Specification. The evidence shall include details of mix proportions, water-cement ratios, slump and strengths obtained at 28 days.

601.7 Sampling and Testing

The Contractor shall take samples of the concrete for testing. The number frequency and location shall be decided by the Project Manager.

Unless otherwise requested by the Project Manager, cube tests shall be made at the rate of 1 set of cubes per 10m3 of concrete. The times of day at which samples are taken shall be chosen at random. At least one sample shall be taken on each day that a particular grade is used.

The procedure for sampling and making cubes and testing shall be carried out strictly in the manner described in BS 1881. In addition, the Project Manager may order at his own discretion, additional samples of concrete to be cured at the job site, in order to verify actual strengths obtained.

For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following requirements:

(a) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test cubes shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.5 times the current margin (b) Each individual test result shall be greater than 85% of the specified characteristic strength.

If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement (a) then all concrete mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last batch from which samples were taken to make the test cubes, together with all the intervening batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.

If only one cube fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cube was taken.

206

The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order, including the removal of the relevant concrete, and shall, before proceeding with the concreting, submit for the Project Manager's approval details of the action proposed to ensure that the concrete complies with the requirements of the Specification.

Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes exceeds the characteristic strength of the concrete and that the difference between the greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.

The 7 days test results shall generally be made use of as an indicator of the strength at 28 days and unless otherwise decided by the Project Manager, no decision regarding non acceptance of the concrete shall be made using these results.

601.8 Materials a. Portland Cement Cement shall conform to the provisions of the following British Standards or the corresponding Sri Lanka Standard:

BS 12 Ordinary Portland Cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) BS– 146 Portland - blast furnace cement BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement BS 1370 Low heat Portland cement

The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against dampness. Fully covered storage areas with floors protected from rising dampness shall be provided. Bagged or bulk cement which has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used bags will not be permitted.

b. Water The water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be tested by methods described in BS 3148. All water shall be clean and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substance injurious to the finished product. Sources of water shall be maintained at such a depth and the water shall be withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials. Water from the sea or tidal rivers shall not be used.

Potable water supplied by the National Water Supply and Drainage Board (NWSDB) shall normally be acceptable.

207

c. Admixtures Admixtures shall not be used without the written approval of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall submit technical data of any admixtures he proposes to use to the Project Manager at least 28 days prior to the date of placing orders for such giving particulars of the structure on which he intends to use such admixtures.

Admixtures containing Calcium Chloride in any form are not permitted. d. Aggregate Unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Project Manager aggregate shall comply with the requirements of BS 882, (aggregates from natural sources for concrete, including granolithic).

(i) Fine Aggregate The grading of fine aggregate when determined by a test according to BS 882 shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in the Table below:

The fine aggregate shall be described as fine aggregate of the grading zone into w–hich it falls - e.g. BS 882, Grading Zone C, M, F or Overall.

Table 601-5 – Grading Limits for Fine Aggregate Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve Sieve Additional limits for grading Size Overall limits C M F 10.00 mm 100 - - - 5.00 mm 89 to 100 - - - 2.36 mm 60 to 100 60 to 100 65 to 100 80 to 100 1.18 mm 30 to 100 30 to 90 45 to 100 70 to 100 600 μm 15 to 100 15 to 54 25 to 80 55 to 100 300 μm 5 to 7 to 40 5 to 48 5 to 70

150 μm 0 to 15 - - -

NOTE: Individual sands may comply with the requirements of more than one grading. Alternatively, some sands may satisfy the overall limits but may not fall within any one of the additional limits C, M or F. In this case and where sands do not comply with the above table an agreed grading envelope may also be used provided that the supplier can satisfy the Project Manager that such materials can produce concrete of the required quality.

208

(ii) Coarse Aggregate The grading of coarse aggregate, when determined by a test according to BS 882 shall be within the limits of one of the grading given in Table below and the nominal maximum size of aggregate shall be 20 mm for reinforced concrete and 40 mm for un-reinforced concrete.

For the control of Alkali-Silica reaction non-reactive aggregates shall be used. Provided they are not contaminated with opal, tridymite or cristobiline or contain more than 20% (by weight) of chert, flint or chalcedony. The following types of aggregate are considered to be non-reactive Dolerite, Dolomite, Feldspar, Gneiss, Granite, Limestone, Schist and Tuff. On no occasion shall the amount of equivalent sodium oxide exceed 3.0 kg in any cubic metre of concrete.

The Project Manager will permit hand broken stone to be used as coarse aggregate for Grade C15 concrete. Table 601-6 – Grading Limits for Coarse Aggregate Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve Size Sieve for nominal sizes Single- (mm) sized aggregate 20 mm 5 mm 50.0 - - 37.5 100 - 20.0 85 to 100 - 14.0 0 to 70 - 10.0 0 to 25 100 5.0 0 to 5 45 to 100 2.36 - 0 to 30

All aggregates shall be stored in such a way that they shall be kept free from contact with deleterious matter. Aggregates of different sizes shall be stored separately and in such a way as to avoid segregation in each stockpile.

The Contractor shall provide copies of the results of routine control tests carried out by the aggregate producer and obtain the Project Manager's approval prior to placing orders.

601.9 Equipment and Tools a. General

Equipment and tools necessary for handling material and performing the work, and satisfactory to the Project Manager as to design, capacity and mechanical condition, shall 209

be at the site of work before work is started.

If any equipment is not maintained in full working order or if the equipment as used by the Contractor proves inadequate to obtain the results prescribed, such equipment shall be improved or other satisfactory equipment substituted or added at the direction of the Project Manager.

b. Mixers

(a) General

All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixers manufactured in accordance with BS 1305 or tested in accordance with BS 3963. It may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central plant or in transit. Each mixer shall have attached to it in a prominent place ’a manufacturer's plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum.

(b) Mixers at site of construction

Mixers at the site shall be approved drum-type capable of combining the aggregate, cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and of discharging the mixture without segregation. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable charging hopper, water storage, and a water-measuring device, accurate within 1%. Controls shall be so arranged that the water can be applied only while the mixer is being charged.

The discharge lever shall lock automatically until the batch has been mixed the required time after all materials are in the mixer. Suitable equipment for discharging the concrete in the form shall be provided. The mixer shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. The pick-up and throw over blades in the drum shall be replaced when they have lost 10% of their depth.

601.10 Placing Concrete a. General Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid segregation and the displacement of reinforcing bars and shall be spread in horizontal layers where practicable. Concrete shall be placed where necessary inside forms by hand shovels and in no instance shall vibrators be so manipulated to transport concrete inside formwork. Care shall be taken to prevent mortar from spattering on forms and reinforcing steel and from drying ahead of the final covering with concrete. Where spattering has occurred, the forms and steel shall 210

be cleaned with wire brushes or scrapers before concrete is placed around steel or in forms. Troughs, pipes or short chutes used as aids in placing concrete shall be positioned in such a manner that segregation of the concrete will not occur. All chutes, troughs, and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coating of hardened concrete or mortar.

Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, unless otherwise agreed by the Project Manager, during the operation of placing, and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, tendons or duct formers, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free of voids. When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner that does not promote segregation of the ingredients.

Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided as far as is practicable.

Concrete shall not be subject to disturbance between 4 hours and 24 hours after compaction except with the agreement of the Project Manager. Wherever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and disposition of vibrators shall ensure efficient compaction and the avoidance of surface blemishes.

There shall be no excess water on the top surface on completion of compaction.

Concrete shall not be dropped freely over a vertical distance of more than 1.20 metres

Concrete shall be placed continuously throughout each section of the structure or between joints if shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. If, in an emergency it is necessary to stop placing concrete before a section is completed, bulkheads shall be placed as the Project Manager may direct and the resulting joint shall be deemed a construction joint. b. Concrete Columns

Concrete in columns or bents shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager. c. Walls, Piers, etc

Where walls, columns, struts, posts and other such structural members allow horizontal construction joints, concrete shall not be placed on top of other concrete which has not been allowed to set for 12 hours or more. Work shall not be discontinued within 450 mm of the top of any face, unless provision 211

has been made for a coping less than 450 mm thick, in which case, if permitted by the Project Manager, the construction joint may be made at the underside of the coping. d. Culverts

The slabs of box culverts shall be placed for their full depth in one layer and allowed to set not less than 12 hours before any additional work is done on them. For culverts of exceptional length under high embankment details of construction joints are shown on the Drawings. The entire length of slabs between indicated construction joints shall be placed for their full depth or layer and allowed to set for not less than 12 hours before any additional work is done on these lengths.

Before concrete is placed in sidewalls, bottom slabs shall be c1eaned of all shavings, sticks, sawdust and other extraneous material.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval his proposals for pouring culvert walls before commencing culvert construction. Concrete shall not be placed in layers more than one metre high relative to the concrete already placed. Deposition shall proceed in a systematic manner. e. Depositing Concrete Under Water

Concrete shall not be deposited in water except with the approval of the Project Manager and with his immediate supervision and in this case the method of placing shall be by tremie and as defined below.

Concrete deposited in water shall contain 10% by weight extra cement to that approved by the Project Manager for the grade of concrete used. To prevent segregation, it shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie tube or pipe, or a bottom dump bucket and shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Special care must be exercised to maintain still water at the point of deposit. Concrete shall not be placed in running water. The method of depositing concrete shall be so regulated as to produce approximately horizontal surfaces.

Concrete seals shall be placed in one continuous operation. When a tremie tube or pipe is used it shall consist of a tube or pipe not less than 250 mm in diameter. All joints in the tube shall be watertight. The means of supporting the tremie tube shall be such as to permit free movement of the discharge end over the entire top of the concrete and to permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. The tremie tube shall be filled by a method that will prevent washing out of the concrete. The discharge end shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times and the tremie shall be kept full.

When concrete is placed with a bottom dump bucket, the bucket shall have a capacity of

212

not less than one half cubic metre and the top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom door shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when empty be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete. The slump of the concrete used shall be maintained between 100 and 200 mm.

Dewatering shall proceed only when the concrete seal is considered strong enough to withstand any pressures to be exerted upon it. This time will be decided by the Project Manager.

All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed surface by scraping, jetting, chipping or by other means, which will not injure the seal unduly.

f. Construction Joints

A concreting schedule shall be prepared for each completed structure and the Project Manager shall approve the locations of construction joint on this concreting schedule. These locations shall not be altered, unless in case of emergency, when construction joints shall be positioned as directed by the Project Manager. At horizontal construction joints, gauge strips 20 to 30 mm square shall be placed inside the forms along all exposed surfaces to give the joints straight lines. Before placing fresh concrete, the surfaces of all construction joints shall be hammered with a sharp hand tool until the aggregate is exposed, cleaned and a small quantity of neat cement slurry added. At the same time forms shall be checked to see that they are tight against the concrete already in place. Concrete in substructures shall be placed in such manner that all horizontal construction joints will be truly horizontal.

Where vertical construction joints are necessary, reinforcing bars shall extend across the joint in such a manner as to make the structure monolithic. Special care shall be taken to avoid construction joints through wing walls. g. Precast Concrete Units

When the method of manufacture has been approved, no further changes shall be made without the approval of the Project Manager

The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager in advance of the date of commencement of manufacture and casting of each type of unit.

A copy of all 28-day cube test results relating to the work shall be sent to the Project 213

Manager as soon as they become available. h. Concrete shall not be pumped or discharged via Aluminium alloy conduits or chutes.

Concrete shall not be subject to disturbance between 4 hours and 24 hours after compaction except that re-compaction of the upper layers of deep lifts to prevent or annul settlement cracking may be carried out.

601.11 Curing

All concrete surfaces shall be kept wet for at least 7 days after placing. Newly exposed concreted surface shall be covered with wet burlap immediately after final finishing of the surface. This material shall remain in place for the full curing period or may be removed and replaced with sand when the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring. In both cases the materials shall be kept thoroughly wet for the entire curing period. All other surfaces if not protected by forms shall be kept thoroughly wet, either by sprinkling or by the use of wet burlap until the end of the curing period. If timber forms are allowed to remain in place during the curing period, they shall be kept moist at all times to prevent the opening of joints.

’The Contractor's proposals for the use of liquid membrane curing compound shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager.

601.12 Removal of Formwork and False work a. Time of removal

The minimum period before striking forms shall be as shown in Table below subject to mandatory Engineer's approval. The Project Manager's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed at the same time as the forms and in no case shall any portion of the forms be left in the concrete.

Table 601-7 – Minimum period before striking formwork Vertical forms of walls, columns 24 beams and similar components hours Soffit forms to culvert top slab 8 days (props left in) Props to culvert top slab 21 days Soffit formwork to beams (Props 8 days left in)

214

Propos to beams 21 days

Forms used on exposed vertical faces shall remain in place for periods, which shall be determined by the Project Manager.

False work and forms under slabs, beams, and arches shall remain in place for 21 days after the day on which placing of concrete were completed. When high early strength cement is used, forms for all structures may be removed after less than 14 days but only with the written approval of the Project Manager who will decide the time for removal as a result of tests. Formwork and false work for the whole of special structures shall remain in place until such time as the Project Manager will decide after all concrete has been poured. b. Patching

As soon as the forms are removed, all wire or metal devices used for securing the formwork which project from or appear on the surface of the finished concrete shall be removed or cut back at least 25 mm from the finished surface of the concrete. All holes and pockets so formed shall be filled with cement mortar mixed in the same proportions as the fine aggregate to cement of the concrete mix used for that particular section of the structure, after the surface to be patched has been thoroughly cleaned and wetted to receive the patch c. Cause for rejection Excessive honeycombing shall be sufficient to cause rejection of portions of the structure containing this honeycombing. The Contractor, on receipt of written orders from the Project Manager, shall remove and rebuild such portions of the structure to Engineer’s requirements.

601.13 Finishing Concrete

All concrete surfaces exposed in the completed work shall comply with the requirements where the Drawings indicate otherwise directed by the Project Manager.

601.14 Tests and Standards of Acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria.

The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

601.15 Measurement and Payment 215

a. Measurement

Concrete shall be measured by the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted. In computing quantities the dimensions used shall be those shown on the Drawings or ordered in writing by the Project Manager but the measurement shall not include any concrete used for the construction of temporary works. No deduction from the measured quantity shall be made for holes, pockets, sockets and the like not exceeding 0.15 cubic metres each in volume, reinforcement or individual fillets, chamfers, splays, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves and the like of 100 mm total girth or less when measured over the faces in contact with the formwork.

b. Payment Concrete work measured as provided above for the grade or grades of concrete specified, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per cubic metre for concrete as detailed below. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, testing, placing and curing all materials, including labour, tools, equipment, etc., incidental thereto including the provision and construction of drainage falls and systems and weep holes, the forming of holes, pockets and sockets and the like not exceeding 0.15 cubic metres each in volume, forming construction joints and unformed surfaces. Separate payment will not be made for testing of concrete mixes the cost of which shall be included in the rate for concrete works.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

601(1) Grade C 15 Concrete Cubic meter 601(2) Grade C 20 Concrete Cubic meter 601(3) Grade C 25 Concrete Cubic meter

602 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES 602.1 Description

This work shall consists of furnishing, fabricating and placing of reinforcement of the specified grade and type in concrete structures in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the details shown in the Drawings or as approved by the Project Manager.

602.2 Materials

Steel reinforcement used shall meet the requirement of the followings:

a. Hot rolled MS bars to CS or SLS 26

216

b. Cold worked high yield steel bars to CS 375 c. Steel fabric to CS 95 d. Hot-rolled and cold-worked steel bars shall comply with BS-4449 except that no bar shall contain a flash weld. e. Hard-drawn mild steel wire shall comply with BS-4482. g. Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS-4483 and shall be delivered to Site in flat mats or pre-bent.

602.3 Construction Requirements a. Protection and Storage

Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose rust and mill scale, dirt, oil, grease and paint at the time of fixing in position and subsequent concreting; Reinforcement for structures shall be handled and stored in a manner that will prevent deformation. b. Cutting and Bending

Bars shall be cut and bent cold by applying a slow, even pressure with equipment and methods approved by the Project Manager to the dimensions given in the Bar Bending Schedules given in the relevant Drawings.

Bends and hooks shall conform to the requirements given in the Drawings or established by the Project Manager.

The bars shall be cut and bent within the tolerances given in BS 4466. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct fit of the bars and achieving required cover as given on the Drawings or established by the Project Manager.

Any bar that has already been bent shall not be re-bent at the location of the original bend without the approval of the Project Manager. c. Placing and Fixing of Reinforcement

All reinforcement bars shall be placed in positions shown in Drawings and shall be firmly held in position, with the specified spacing, prior to concreting operations using necessary wire ties at bar intersections, spacer bars, steel chairs of approved type or by other approved means. Wire ties shall be black annealed M.S or G.I. wire, not less than 1.0 mm in diameter and shall be firmly tied and folded so that they do not project into concrete cover region. The adequacy of supports and ties to secure the reinforcement 217

properly shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager. Layers of bars shall be separated by spacer bars, pre-cast mortar blocks or other approved devices. All horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be supported on motor bocks, of approved shape conforming to cover requirements, with tie wires embedded in them, made out of 1: 1 ½ or 1:2 Cement sand mix. Supports which are in contact with the external face of the concrete shall all be mortar blocks. The use of small stones or wooden blocks shall not be permitted. As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case this is not possible splicing of bars shall be done as specified in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. (All splices shall have a lap length at least equal to the anchorage length required to develop the stress in the smaller of the bars to be lapped). Laps and joints shall be made only where shown on the Drawings or with the approval of the Project Manager.

Where welding is specified or approved by the Project Manager, as an alternative, the reinforcement shall be butt welded by the metal arc process using covered electrodes, complying with standard Specifications for such work. Where screwed joints are specified for reinforcement they shall be butt joints made by using screwed coupling boxes of approved types capable of developing strength at least 10% more than that of the bar which is to be jointed, and the joint as a whole shall be capable of developing the same strength as the coupling. Before the Project Manager approves the welding of reinforcement or screwed joints of reinforcement, the Contractor shall submit such samples as the Project Manager may require for testing.

Substitution with different size of bars or with different type of steel will be permitted only with the prior approval of the Project Manager

No concreting shall commence until the reinforcement have been inspected and approved by the Project Manager.

Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clean condition until completely embedded in concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent any displacement of reinforcement in concrete already placed. All bars protruding from concrete and to which bars are to be spliced and which are likely to be exposed for a considerably long period shall be protected by the a thick coat of neat cement grout.

602.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria.

The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

218

602.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The quantity of reinforcement shall be computed by weight in kilogram for each types of material used and accepted as shown in the Drawings, provided that the quantity shall not include the reinforcement in any item of work the basis of payment for which includes the reinforcement. Lengths shall include hooks at ends. Wastage over laps, coupling welded joints, spacer bars and annealed steel wire for binding shall not be measured and cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the rate for reinforcement. b. Payment

This works measured as provided above, will be paid for at the unit rate per kilogram of reinforcement for each type and size of steel. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing of steel and for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this section.

The Pay Items and Pay Units will be as follows:

Pay Description Pay Unit Item 602(1 ) Tor Steel reinforcement Kilogram

603 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY

603.1 Description

This work shall consist of construction, in Random Rubble Masonry (RRM), of walls, drains and other structures. Work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and with the lines and dimensions shown in the Drawings, or as directed by the Project Manager.

603.2 Materials

Stones used in Random Rubble Masonry shall be obtained from approved quarries, and be approved by the Project Manager. They shall be hard, durable, fresh rock free from fractures and other imperfections, and shall generally be of maximum dimension not exceeding 300 mm.

Through stones shall be specially made approximately to square Cross-section, 150 x 150

219

mm minimum dimensions, and of minimum length 600 mm or the thickness of the wall whichever is less. They may be pre-cast concrete units, if so specified.

Cement mortar used shall conform to requirements of Sub-section 802.2 of the specification.

603.3 Construction Requirements

a. Random rubble masonry using cement mortar

All stones, chips and spalls used shall have clean surfaces to facilitate adherence of mortar to them and shall be wetted before laying. Every stone shall be set flush in cement mortar of 1:5 or any other approved mix proportions, and there shall be no dry work or hollow spaces left. Smaller stones shall be used to roughly fit the spaces between the larger stones, and chips and spalls shall be wedged in where necessary to prevent thick beds of mortar. The stones in each course shall overlay the joints in the preceding course as far as practicable.

A sufficient number of through stones shall be used in building walls. At least one through stone shall be built into walls at intervals of 2 m horizontally and 600 mm vertically. They shall run through the full thickness of the walls which are up to 600 mm in thickness. In case of walls exceeding 600 mm in nominal thickness, more than one through stone shall be used to run though the full thickness of the wall. In such cases the overlaps shall not be less than 150 mm.

Where the faces of walls are to be plastered, their mortar joints shall be raked to depths of 12 to 20 mm to form a key, and the plastering shall be done using cement mortar of specified proportions and to the specified thicknesses. The faces which are not to be plastered shall be provided with struck off mortar joints unless otherwise specified. In the latter case selected stones shall be used with straight edges as far as practicable, to provide close fitting mortar joints of uniform width not exceeding 20mm. The bushings of the stones shall not project more than 25mm from the plane of the joints.

Where pointing of joints is specified it shall be carried out as given in the Drawings or as directed.

Vertical construction joints in walls shall be avoided and at horizontal or sloping construction joints, the mortar in the last course at the joint shall be omitted, for at least half the nominal thickness, to be later placed with the succeeding course of masonry.

When placing rubble masonry on or against construction joins all laitance shall be removed from exposed hardened mortar surfaces; and feather edges and hardened mortar shall be removed from exposed stone surfaces.

220

When rubble masonry is placed against a fill or excavation, surface irregularities in such surfaces shall be filled with stone chips, spalls or other free draining materials. Drains and formed weep holes shall be constructed as shown win the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

All rubble masonry work shall be maintained in constantly wert condition for a period of at least 3 days commencing from the time of final setting of the cement.

b. Dry Random Rubble Masonry

Larger stones shall be set in such a manner that they are interlocked with adjacent stones and spalls, and chips shall be wedged into the resulting hollow spaces using a hammer where necessary. Bushings of the stones shall not project more than 25mm from the face of the walls. The stones in each course shall overlay the joints in the preceding course as far as practicable. The faces of the wall shall be constructed with stones having straight edges to provide close fitting edges. Through stones where specified shall be used as indicated in subsection 603.3(a).

603.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to theses Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

603.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

Dry RR masonry shall be measured in Cu.m of completed and accepted work.

RRM using cement mortar and Dry RR masonry shall be measured separately in Cu.m of completed and accepted work.

Work of plastering shall be measured in Sq.m of completed and accepted work. No separate measurement for pointing work. b. Payment

The unit rate of payment for each item of work shall be full compensation for all materials, labour, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

221

No separate payment will be made for necessary trimming of local voids in the excavated or filled surface against which rubble masonry is placed.

The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows;

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

603(1) RR Masonry using cement mortar Cubic meter 603(2) Dry RR Masonry Cubic meter 603(3) Plastering Square meter

604 FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURES

604.1 Description

This work shall consist of providing all temporary or permanent forms and moulds required casting concrete, together with all temporary construction required for their support which include props, staging, centering, scaffolding and temporary construction including piles where necessary.

This work shall be carried out in accordance with these Specifications and with the shape, dimensions and surface finish as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

604.2 Materials

All formwork shall be of timber, metal or any other material approved by the Project Manager

Timber for forms shall generally be of approved quality, well-seasoned and of uniform thickness, sound, free from warps, loose knots. Whist, wavy edges, saps and shakes or other defects affecting the strength of formwork and appearance of the finished structure, where so required the surface of the timber shall be suitably dressed

Metal sheets for forms shall be free from rust and dents with no surface blemishes that will impair the concrete surface finished

Supports and scaffolding shall be of metal, sawn timber, round timber or of any other material approved by the Project Manager. 222

604.3 Construction Requirements a. False work

Temporary staging shall be provided by the Contractor to enable the constructional operations to be performed in the required sequences and in a safe manner

The false work shall be properly designed and constructed, to provide the necessary rigidity and to carry the loads which it will be required to support. Where necessary, it shall also include safe walkways to enable the Project Manager to inspect the formwork, reinforcement and concreting. Complete details of the arrangements proposed shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his approval.

b. Construction of formwork

All formwork shall be so constructed that there shall be no loss of material from the fresh concrete. Forms shall be mortar tight and shall be made sufficiently rigid by the use if ties and bracing to prevent any displacement or sagging and shall be capable of withstanding all incidentals loading during concreting. Formwork shall be such that hardened concrete shall be in the position and of the shape, dimensions and surface finish described in the Contract.

Where internal ties are permitted they or their removable parts shall be extracted without damage to the concrete to a depth of at least 25 mm from the finished concrete surface and resulting holes filled with mortar. No permanently embedded metal nuts shall have less than 25 mm cover from the finished concrete surface.

Formwork shall be constructed so that the side shutters of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit shutters, and if the Contractor wishes to leave some of the props in place when the soffit shutters are removed. These props shall not be disturbed during the striking. When specified the detailed arrangements of the props shall be submitted in advance to the Project Manager, for his prior approval. c. Formed surface and finish

Surface shall be finished smooth or rough as specified. Normally, exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth. Where smooth finish is required, the forms shall be made of dressed timber with or without form loner approved by the Project Manager or shall be of metal. Where metal forms are used, all bolts and reverts shall be counter sunk necessary and well ground to provide a smooth, plane surface. For surfaces that are not designated to be finished smooth sawn timber without dressing (rough timber) may be used

223

d. Re-use of formwork Where formwork has to be re-used the shape, strength, rigidity water tightness and surface smoothness of the reused forms shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged timber shall be resized before being used; Formwork which is unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be reused. e. Preparation of formwork before concreting Immediately before concreting, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned either by water jetting or by any other suitable method, temporary openings being provided for the purpose. The inside surfaces of the forms shall then, if necessary, be coated with approved materials such as mould oil to prevent adhesion of the concrete. This material must not come into contact with the reinforcement. f. Inspection by Engineer prior to placing concrete No concrete shall be placed until the Project Manager has inspected and approved the formwork, false work and reinforcement. g. Removal of formwork

The Project Manager shall be informed in advance as to when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork

The minimum period between concreting and the removal of forms shall be as follows:

Sides of beams, walls, columns - 01 day Soffit of secondary slabs (Propos left in) - 04 days Soffit of main slabs (Propos left in) - 08 days Soffit of beams (Propos left in) - 08 days Removal of props - Secondary slabs - 10 days Removal of props – Beams and main slabs - 21 days

The periods in the above table are given as a guide and based on average weather conditions and the ordinary Portland cement. They shall be increased in areas of extremely cold weather unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, and may be changed, if other types of cement or additives are used, subject to the Project Manager’s approval.

604.4 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

Where it is stipulated in the Contract that formwork will be paid for separately, measurement for formwork shall be taken in sq.m of the area of concrete for each type of finished surface in smooth or rough finish.

224

Where it is not specifically stated in the description of the items that formwork will be paid for separately, the rate for pre-stressed and of reinforced cement concrete items shall be deemed to include the cost of all formwork.

b. Payment

The rate for formwork, where this is provided as a separate item, shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools and plant hire required for construction and removal of forms as described above and also for framing required for properly supporting the members for at least the periods specified under 604.3 (g) unless otherwise specified.

The pay items and pay units will be as follows:

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

604(1) Formwork smooth finish Square meter 604(2) Formwork rough finish Square meter

605 HOT DIPPED GALVANIZEDMILD STEEL DOWELS

605.1 Description

The work shall consist of providing hot dipped galvanized mild steel dowels supplied, fixed and grouted at fixed ends as per these Specifications and Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

605.2 Material

The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified in section 602.

The grouting shall be of Portland cement and shall confirm to Sub-section 802.1.

605.3 Construction Requirements

The fixing of dowels shall be done as shown in the Drawings. The dowels shall be inserted into the holes (hole diameter 1.25 to 1.5 times of the dowel diameter) to the depth specified in the drawing and grouted well.

Hot-dip galvanize for dowels in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian

225

standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly) to a minimum coating thickness of 85 μm.

605.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance

The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of acceptance.

605.5 Measurement and Payment a. Measurement

The dowels will be measured for payment by the linear meter length provided in the finished work and as accepted by the Project Manager. The length will be calculated as marked on the Drawings. b. Payment

This work measured as provided above will be paid for at the contract unit price for this item. Such price and payment constitute full compensation for all material, galvanizing, drilling, grouting, labour (inclusive of drilling), tools and equipment, scaffolding work, platforms and incidentals, needed to complete all works. The complete work includes work associated in the Drawings, Bills of Quantities or elsewhere in the specifications.

The pay item and Pay unit shall be as follows.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item Supply and installed (specify dia.) hot dipped 605(1) Linear meter galvanized Mild steel dowels

226

700 QUALITY CONTROL OF WORK

701 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

The Contractor shall prepare a Quality Control Plan which shall detail quality control procedures such as to demonstrate that the requirements of the Conditions of Contract in respect of quality are met. The Quality Control Plan shall provide a formal framework for the approval of the Works by the Project Manager.

In particular the Quality Control Plan shall include:

1. Quality control procedures in respect of the selection and control of materials, distinguishing between approval testing and compliance testing;

2. Quality control procedures in respect of construction operations, identifying procedures for production control and procedures for survey control;

3. Procedures for the Contractor and Engineer to approve construction works.

In preparing the Quality Control Plan the Contractor shall take into consideration the requirements and obligations of the Project Manager in respect of checking and inspection of the Works.

The Contractor shall appoint a Quality Control Manager who shall be responsible for ensuring that the quality control procedures set out in the Quality Control Plan are adhered to. The Quality Control Manager shall have independent control of all quality control activities.

702 QUALITY CONTROL TESTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

The material supplied and work carried out shall conform to the relevant sections of these Specifications covering each type of work. For ensuring quality of construction, the materials and work shall be subjected to quality control tests prescribed in Table 702-1. These tests shall be carried out as specified in Chapter 900. The testing frequencies given in Table 702-1 are desirable minimum values and the Project Manager may direct the Contractor to carry out tests as frequently as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself that the materials and the work comply with the appropriate Specifications.

227

Table 702–1 – Quality Control Tests and their Frequencies QUANTITY OF MATERIAL or part TYPE OF TYPE OF TEST thereof for which MATERIAL minimum one test set to be carried out Acceptance testing of cement such as One test per source and - Fineness Cement - Chemical composition as required by the Project - Compressive strength Manager - Setting time - Soundness Fine - Sieve analysis As directed by the aggregates - Water absorption Project Manager (Sand) - Turbidity

- Sieve analysis - Aggregate impact value Course As directed by the (AIV) aggregates Project Manager - Water absorption - Flakiness Index

- Slump test As directed by the Concrete - Crushing strength test Project Manager Tor steel As directed by the reinforcem - Tensile strength Project Manager ents

- Grab strength - Sewn seam strength - Tear strength As directed by the Geo-textile - Puncture strength Project Manager - Permittivity - Apparent opening size - Test for bleeding As directed by the Grout - Flow cone efflux time test Project Manager - Crushing strength test - Sieve analysis - Liquid limit Fill/Backfil - Plastic limit As directed by the l - Modified Proctor test Project Manager - Layer thickness at spreading - Field moisture content

228

- Degree of compaction

Shotcrete Concrete As directed by the - Crushing strength test and Project Manager Grouting

- Tensile strength As directed by the Nails (Soil) - Galvanized thickness Project Manager High One test as per source - Tensile strength of wire tensile wire and as requested by the - Galvanized thickness mesh Project Manager

A fresh series of construction control tests shall be undertaken every time there are changes in the sources of the materials or in the appearance of the materials as visually assessed by the Project Manager.

Additional numbers and type of construction control tests shall be carried out if it is considered necessary to do so by the Project Manager for monitoring the variability of materials brought to work site or stockpiled by the Contractor.

703 MATERIAL TESTING The physical properties and engineering characteristics of the materials mentioned in the Specification shall be established through appropriate tests on representative samples collected in such a manner and at such a frequency as specified and instructed by the Project Manager. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with test methods mentioned in the Specification after taking into account the appropriateness of the test methods for particular applications under consideration.

229

800 MATERIAL DETAILS

801 AGGREGATE

801.1 Aggregate for Cement Concrete (Section 1001 and Others)

Aggregate for concrete shall consist of coarse aggregate (aggregate substantially retained on the 5 mm sieve) and fine aggregate (aggregate substantially passing the 5 mm sieve).

Unless otherwise specified the coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock from an approval quarry and the fine aggregate shall either be crusher fines or river sand.

Aggregate from marine sources will not be approved. The aggregate shall be free of salt and organic matter. The permissible maximum salt content shall be as follows:

Table 801-1 – Permissible maximum salt content in aggregate MATERIA SODIUM SOLUBLE L CHLORIDE SULPHATES Fine 0.10 % 0.25 % Aggregate Coarse 0.05 % 0.25 % Aggregate

The aggregate both coarse and fine shall be hard durable and clean and shall be from weathered, soft, laminated or elongated pieces, deleterious matter, dust and clay.

The Aggregate Impact Value (AIV) of the coarse aggregate determined as given in Section 901 shall not be greater than 45.

The flakiness index of the coarse aggregate when determined by the sieve method described in BS-812 shall not exceed 35%.

Where crusher fines are used as fine aggregate, they shall be derived from rock meeting the requirements of coarse aggregate given above.

The preferred grading for concrete aggregate, fine aggregate and combined aggregate are given in Table 801-2, 801-3 and 802-4 respectively. The aggregate grading shall be determined as given in Section 901.

230

Table 801-2– Preferred Grading for Coarse Aggregate for Concrete PERCENTAGE PASSING SIEV Nominal size of graded Nominal size of single sized E aggregate (mm) aggregate (mm) SIZE (mm) 37.5 20.0 14 37.5 20.0 14.0 to 5 to 5 to 5 75.0 100 - - - - - 63.0 - - - 100 - - 95- 37.5 100 - 85-100 100 - 100 96- 87- 20.0 40-72 100 0-30 100 100 100 95- 88- 14.0 - - - - 100 100 67- 10.0 12-42 35-62 0-6 0-30 0-58 88 5.0 0-5 0-13 0-16 - 0-6 0-13 2.36 - - - - 0 -

Table 801-3– Preferred Grading for Fine Aggregate for Concrete SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE PASSING Zone Zone Zone mm μm 1 2 3

100 100 100 10 91- 91- 91- 5 100 100 100

75- 85- 2.3 60-95 100 100 6

75- 1.1 30-70 55-90 100 8 600 15-34 35-59 60-79 300 5-20 8-30 12-40 150 0-10 0-10 0-10

231

Table 801-4– Preferred Grading for all-in Aggregate for Concrete SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE PASSING 37.5 mm 19.0 mm Μ mm m Nominal Nominal size size 75 100 -

37. 95-100 100 5 20 48-82 92-100 5 25-50 35-55 600 8-30 10-35 150 0-6 0-6

802 CEMENT

Cement used shall normally be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) complying with the requirements of SLS 107 or blended hydraulic cement to SLS 1247. The cement shall conform to the requirements given therein, in respect of the following:- a) Fineness

b) Chemical composition

c) Compressive strength

d) Setting time

e) Soundness Tests in respect of the above shall be carried out as specified in Section 903.

Unless or otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, only one brand of the approved brands of cement shall be used on one project.

Cement shall be brought to Site in quantity not exceeding three months requirements. Each consignment of cement delivered to Site shall be accompanied by a certificate of 232

testing as per BS or SLS. Any extra test instructed by the Project Manager whose result proves the material to be out of specification shall be carried out at no extra cost. If for any reason the period of storage of consignment of cement exceeds three months, a representative sample of the cement shall be retested to confirm its suitability before use at no extra cost. The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against dampness, Cement which, for any reason has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected.

No additives for cement shall be used unless agreed by the Project Manager.

802.1 Cement Grout

Cement grout for grouting dowels shall consist of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and water mixed in the proportions necessary for the intended purpose.

Cement used for grouting soil nails shall be Type – A, Portland cement complying with (BS196 or BS197). Grout material should be non-expansive and non-shrinkage material. Therefore, admixture has to be added to avoid shrinkage effect of cement. The Contractor should be obtained prior approval for the admixture before use site at site from the Project Manager.

The grout shall be mixed until a uniform consistency is obtained and shall normally be used within 45 minutes of mixing.

802.2 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall normally consist of Ordinary Portland Cement, sand and water in the proportions specified.

Mortar shall mix with thoroughly, either by hand or mechanically until its colour and consistency are uniform. It shall be mixed in small quantities only as and when required and shall normally be used within 45 minutes of mixing. Mortar which had been mixed for more than 1 hour and shows signs of hardening shall be discarded.

The constituent materials shall normally be volume proportioned as accurately as practicable making allowance for bulking of sand and also of the cement. Water shall be added in stages until the required consistency is reached.

803 CONCRETE ADMIXTURE

Concrete admixture as retarders, accelerators or as plasticizers shall be used with the prior approval of the Project Manager only and they shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 233

In the use of additives particular attention should be paid to the accurate proportioning of the additive and its homogeneous introduction in the mix.

804 SOILS a. Filling Material

Soils used as filling materials shall be naturally occurring soils and shall not include highly plastic clay, silt, peat or other organic soils or any soil that is contaminated with top soil vegetable and other deleterious matter. The material used for the top 500 mm of filling shall conform to the requirements of Type I material, and the material for lower layers of filling shall conform to the requirements of type II material as given below.

Table 804-1:Material Characteristics for Filling - Type I and Type II SPECIFICATION TEST LIMIT PROPERTY METH OD FILLING FILLING TYPE I TYPE II AASH Liquid Limit (LL) % TO ≤ 50 ≤ 55 T89 AASH Plasticity Index (PI) % TO ≤ 25 ≤ 25 T90 AASH Maximum y Density (MDD) ≥ 1,600 ≥ 1,500 TO (Modified proctor Test) kg/m3 T180

805 GEOTEXTILES / GEOFABRIC

805.1 Referenced Documents

These Specifications:

. Section 903.1 Particle size Analysis of soils

. Section 903.3 Determining the plastic limit and plasticity index of soils

. Section 903.4 Moisture – Density Relations of soils using a 4.5kg Rammer and 450mm Drop 234

ASTM standards:

. D 123-00a, Standard terminology Relating to textiles

. D276, Test Methods for Identification of fibers in textiles

. D4354-99(04), Practice for Sampling of Geo synthetics for testing

. D4355-05, Test method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from exposure to Ultraviolet light and water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus)

. D4439 -04 Terminology for Geo synthetics

. D4491-99a (04), Test Method for water permeability of Geotextiles by permittivity.

D 4533-04 Test method for trapezoid tearing strength of Geotextiles

D4632-91(2003), Test method for grab breaking load and elongation of Geotextiles

D4751-04, Test Method for determining apparent opening size of geotextiles

D4759-2, practice for determining specification conformance of geo synthetics

D4833-00 Test Method for index puncture resistance of geotextiles, Geo membranes and related products

D4873- 02, Guide for identification, storage and handling of geotextiles

D 5261-92(03), Test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles

D 6140-00(05), Test method for determining the asphalt retention of paving fabrics

235

805.2 Physical Requirements

(a) Fibers utilized in the manufacture of geotextiles and the threads used in joining geotextiles by sewing. Shall consist of long chain synthetic polymers, composed of at least 95 percent by weight of polyolefin or polyesters. They shall be formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns, including salvages, retain their dimensional stability relative to each other.

Subsurface drainage, separation stabilization and permanent erosion control applications, geotextiles conform to the physical requirements of sub section 805.6.

All values of properties, with the exception of Apparent Opening Size (AOS), in these specifications represent Minimum Average Roll Values (MARV) in the weakest principal direction (i.e., average test results of any in a lot sampled for conformance or quality assurance testing shall meet or exceed the minimum values provided here in). Values for AOS represent maximum average roll values (MARV).

805.3 Certification

(A) The contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, a certificate stating the name of the manufacture, product name, and style number, chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and other pertinent information to describe the geo-textile fully.

Contractor shall obtain the supplies of geotextiles from a manufacturer who shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program to assure compliance with the requirements of the specifications. Documentation describing the quality control program shall be made available upon request from such manufactures.

Such manufacture’s shall certificate shall state that the furnished geo-textile meets MARV requirements of the specification as evaluated under the manufacturer’s quality control program. A person having legal authority to bind the manufacturer, shall attest to the certificate.

Either misrepresentation of materials or mislabeling shall be a reason to reject those geotextile products of the manufacturer.

236

805.4 Sampling, Testing and Acceptance

(a) Geotextile materials shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance with these Specifications. Sampling shall be in accordance with the most current ASTM standards D 4354, using the section titled, “procedure for sampling for purchaser’s specification conformance testing”. In the absence of purchaser’s testing, verification may be based on manufacturer’s certifications as a result of testing by the manufacturer of quality assurance samples obtained using the procedure for sampling for Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance (MQA) testing. A lot size shall be considered to be the shipment quantity of the given product, or a truckload of the given product, whichever is smaller.

(b) For the indicated application, testing shall be performed in accordance with the methods referenced in these specifications. The number of specimens to test per sample is specified by each test method. Geotextile product acceptance shall be based on ASTM D 4759.Product acceptance is determined by comparing the average test results of all specimens within a given sample to the specimen MARV. Reference shall be made to ASTM D 4759 for more details regarding geotextile procedures f (c) or acceptance.

805.5 Shipment and Storage

(a) Labeling, shipment and storage of geotextile shall follow ASTM D 4873. Product label shall clearly show the manufacture or supplier name, style name and roll number. Each shipping document shall include a notation certifying that the material is in accordance with the certificate of the manufacturer.

(b) Each roll of geotextiles shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geotextile, including the ends of the roll, from damage due to shipment, water sunlight and contaminants. The protective wrapping shall be maintained during periods of shipment and storage subsequently.

During periods of storage, the geotextile rolls shall be elevated off the ground and adequately covered to protect them from the following: site construction damage, precipitation, extended ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are strong acids or strong bases, flames including welding sparks, temperatures in excess of 71 0C (160 0F) and any other environmental condition that may damage the geotextile physical property values.

237

805.6 Geotextile Property requirements for Subsurface Drainage and Horizontal Drains Physical Characteristic – Should be Continuous filament, nonwoven needle punched. Polymer – 100% Polypropylene, UV stabilized.

No Code No. Description Property Value

Exceeds 70% Tensile Strength Strength retention Geo-synthetics. BS EN ISO Retention after 3 months out 1.0 Wide-width tensile 10319:2008 door weathering test. Tensile Strength (avg) Exceeds 10 kN/m

Geo-textiles and geo-textile-related products. Determination of Less Than 100 BS EN ISO Vertical Water Flow 2 2.0 water permeability 1/m /s 11058:2010 50mm Head characteristics (mm/s) normal to the plane, without load.

Geo-textiles and geo-textile-related BS EN ISO products. Effective Opening size Less Than 0.10 3.0 12956:2010 Determination of mm (O90) the characteristic opening size.

Geo-textiles and 20 kPa Exceeds 5.0 1/m.h geo-textile-related BS EN ISO products. 4.0 12958:2010 Determination of water flow capacity 200 kPa Exceeds 2.0 1/m.h in their plane

BS EN ISO Geo-synthetics. 5.0 9863- Determination of Thickness 2 kPa Exceeds 1.5 mm 1:2005 thickness at specified pressures.

238

Single layers.

Standard Test ASTM D Methods for Water 6.0 4491 – Permeability of Permittivity Less Than 2.5 s -1 99a(2009) Geo-textile b Permittivity

Standard Test Methods for ASTM D Determining g Apparent Opening Size Less Than 0.25 7.–0 4751 - 04 Apparent Opening (O90) mm Size of a Geo- textile

239

900 TESTS FOR QUALITY CONTROL OF MATERIAL AND WORKS

901 AGGREGATES AND SOIL Table 901-1–Quality Control Tests for Aggregates and Soil Clau se Quality Control Test Reference Standards No BS EN 932-1-1997 or ASTM 901.1 Sieve Analysis C 136-96a or AASHTO T27- 99 Clay, silt and dust BS 812:103.2 (2000) or ASTM 901.2 fraction (fraction passing C 117-95 or AASHTO T11-97 the 0.075 mm sieve) Aggregate Impact Value 901.3 BS EN 1097-2:1998 (AIV) Flakiness index BS 812: Part 105.1:2000 901.6 Elongation BS 812: Part 105.2: 2000 BS 812: Part 2:1975 or ASTM Specific Gravity of 901.7 C 127-88 (1993) or AASHTO Coarse Aggregate T85 – 91 (2000) BS EN 1097: 5: 1999 or ASTM Specific Gravity of Fine 901.8 C 128-97 or BS 812: 2000 or Aggregate AASHTO T84 – 00

902 CEMENT AND CONCRETE 902.1 Cement Table 902-1–Quality Control Tests for Cement Clau Quality Control Test Reference Standards se No SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 187-04 902.1 (a) Standard Consistency or BS EN 196-3: 2005 or AASHTO T129-01 SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 191- 902.1 (b) Setting Times 04b or BS EN 196-3: 2008 or AASHTO T131-01 SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 204-00 902.1 (c) Fineness or BS EN 196-6: 1992 or AASHTO T152-01 SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 902.1 (d) Compressive Strength 109/C109M-05 or BS EN 196-1: 2005 or AASHTO T106-02 240

BS 4550: Part3: Sec 3.7 or 902.1 (e) Soundness Test BS EN 196-3: 2005

902.2 Concrete

Table 902-2–Quality Control Tests for Concrete Clau se Quality Control Test Reference Standards No BS 1881: Part 108: 83, BS EN Casting of Concrete 12390-1:2000 or ASTM 902.2 (a) Cubes C31/C31M-03a in field or ASTM C192C/192M-05 in laboratory Testing of Concrete 902.2 (b) BS EN 12390-3: 2002 Cubes ASTM C143/C143M-05a or 902.2 (g) Slump Test BS EN 12504-1-2000 or AASHTO T119-99

903 SOILS

Table 903-1–Quality Control Tests for Soils Clau se Quality Control Test Reference Standards No BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM 903.1 Sieve Analysis Test D422-63 (72) or AASHTO T88- 00 BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM 903.2 Liquid Limit D 4318-05 or AASHTO T89-02 BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM D 903.3 Plastic Limit 4318-05 or AASHTO T90-00 BS 1377-Part 4: 1990 or ASTM Modified Proctor 903.4 D 1557-02 or AASHTO T180- Compaction 01 903.6 Field Moisture ASTM D 2218-98 BS 1377-Part 9: 1990 or ASTM 903.7 Field Density D 1556-90 or AASHTO T191- 02

241

1000 SOIL NAILING, HORIZONTAL DRAINS AND MONITORING

1001 SOIL NAILING

1001.1 Description

This work shall consist of soil nailing, construction of nail heads, laying of protective net, hydro seeding and other associate works. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, the Contractor performing the soil nailing works described in this Specification shall have experience in soil nailing of a minimum of 5 years. The Contractor’s on-site supervisors shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience in installing soil nails with Contractor’s organization.

Full-time supervision by a qualified Engineer or technician shall be accorded to all soil nailing works especially all the inspection checks and quality control tests.

1001.2 Materials

The materials used for soil nailing shall meet the requirements of the following, unless otherwise specified. a) Reinforcement for Soil Nailing

Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, reinforcement bars (re-bars) for soil nails shall be deformed Y25 or Y32 bars (SLS-375-2009 – Ribbed Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete with minimum yield strength of 460 MPa), threaded and fully hot-dip galvanized in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly), with minimum coat thickness of 85 microns or 610 mg per meter square surface. Nuts shall be of Grade 4 steel and comply with BS4190:2001. The nail bars or re-bars shall be threaded at the exposed end for 300 mm length of nail and coupling ends, if required, for a sufficient length (minimum 150 mm long) to facilitate fixing of galvanized washer, overlap locking washers, nuts, MS bearing plates (Grade 43A to BS4360) and nuts at the exposed end and fixing of galvanized coupler at the other end, if required. All steel components for soil nails including re-bar, MS bearing plates, washers, nuts, couplers, etc., shall be hot-dip galvanized in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly) with

242

minimum coat thickness of 85μm or 610 mg per square metre. The holes in MS bearing plate shall be drilled perpendicular to the face of MS plate and the centre of the hole shall be at a position of within 2mm from the centroid of the MS plate. The total annular clearance between the galvanized rebar diameter and the hole diameter shall not exceed 1mm. All components of nail head including nuts, thread, washer and MS plate shall be galvanized. The tightened nut shall be tested to ensure it can take a tension load of at least 1.5 times the design working load of the soil nail or minimum 150 kN without failure.

Only soil nails of more than 12m long shall have re-bars spliced or coupled. The tensile strength of the bar coupler shall be capable of developing at least 95% of the tensile strength of the rebar, as tested and certified by the manufacturer. Test certificates from a reputable or accredited laboratory, approved by the Project Manager, to show compliance with the specification shall be submitted to the Project Manager for verification and approval before commencement of works. b) Cement Grout

Cement used for grouting shall conform to requirements of Sub-section 802.1 of the Specifications and shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) complying with (BS196 or BS197). Only fresh cement, free of lumps and less than three months old shall be used.

Grout shall consist of cement, water and approved grout fluidifier specified by ASTM C937. Water cement ratio shall be 0.40 to 0.45, and unless otherwise stated in the design drawing, minimum cube strength of 7 day strength and 28 day strength shall be 20 MPa and 30 MPa respectively (BS 1881). Sand shall not be used for drill holes of less than 200mm diameter unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing. Water shall be from approved public water supply. Grout material should be a non-expansive and non-shrinkage material. Suitable admixtures shall be used to improve flow-ability and to control bleeding or shrinkage problems. Admixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS 5075: Part 1 and BS 5075: Part 3 and shall only be used with the prior approval of the Project Manager. Grout shall be thoroughly mixed by a suitable high speed colloidal mixer (> 1000 rpm) until a homogeneous grout, free from un- dispersed cement and lumps and bleeding is obtained. The grout, after mixing for a few minutes, shall be transferred through a 5 mm sieve into a storage tank attached with a paddle agitator to prevent sedimentation, to remove lumps.

Unless otherwise requested by the Project Manager, cube tests shall be made at the rate of 1 set of cubes per 10number of nails. The times of day at which samples are taken shall be chosen at random. At least one sample shall be taken on each day.

If any of the above results falls below the acceptable limits, at least one or 1% of grouted working nails shall be subject to a pull-out test (Sub section 1001) at the Contractor’s own cost. The Contractor shall carry out flow cone and bleeding tests before grouting to ensure the grout mix and admixture comply with the specified requirements.

243

c) Centralizers

Centralizers shall be non-corrodible and tightly fixed to the rebar at spacings as shown on the Drawing to ensure an even annulus of grout around the rebar. The centralizers shall be firm and as small as possible (not more than 50 % of the nail section), so that the blockage of grout flow is minimum. Centralizers shall be sized to position the rebar within 25mm of the centre of the drill holes and to allow tremie pipe (about 30 mm diameter) insertion to the bottom of the drill hole. The centralizers shall have to be produced by a reputable manufacturer or specialist using welded on galvanized steel strips or PP (Polypro Pylene) or PVC (Poly Vinyl Chloride) and comply with following properties:

- Tensile strength (BS 2782: Part 3, method 320C) > 30 MPa - Hardness (BS 2782: Part 3, method 365B) > 65 - Brittleness temperature (ASTM D746-79) < 5 degree C - Environmental Stress Cracking Resistance (ASTM D1693-70): 200 hrs (no cracking).

Test certificates from a reputable or accredited laboratory, approved by the Project Manager, showing the centralizers have complied with the specification shall be submitted to the Project Manager for verification and approval. Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material.

Suitability of the method of assembly and fixing of the centralizers, grout pipes, etc., shall be determined by carrying out trials at site until no damages and no distortion of centralizers and grout pipes are observed during inserting and withdrawing of the soil nails. In addition, pull-out checks as specified in Sub section 1001shall also be carried out during the installation of working soil nails. d) Tor steel

Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, reinforcement bars (rebars) for pillows, beams, and other structures. e) Cement

Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications and to the provisions of the following British Standards or the corresponding Sri Lanka Standard:

BS 12 Ordinary Portland Cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) BS 146 Portland - blast furnace cement BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement BS 1370 Low heat Portland cement 244

High-tensile Steel Wire Mesh shall have to satisfy the following properties.

Table 1001-1 - High-tensile Steel Wire Mesh properties Property Requirements

1 Tensile strength of mesh Min 150 kN/m

2 Tensile strength of wire Min 1750 MPa

3 Diameter of steel wire/strand Min 3 mm 4 Mesh/Net width (opening size) Max 65 mm 5 Bearing resistance of mesh against punching Min 175 kN 6 Bearing resistance of mesh against shearing Min 80 kN 7 Bearing resistance of mesh against slope Min 25 kN parallel tensile stress 8 Corrosion protection HD Galvanized/ Galvanized with PVC or Zinc aluminum alloy coated 9 Coating 150 g/m2

The Contractor should get prior approval for the method for fixing of flexible reinforcement mesh. The contractor must submit the technical datasheet of the High- tensile Steel Wire Mesh from the manufacturer along with the bid. Also it is mandatory to submit Material Test Certificate (MTC) of the manufacturer during the supply of material.

Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material. (As per Table 702.1)

245

g) Connection Clips

Hot-dip galvanized connection clips of minimum 4 mm diameter high tensile steel wire with minimum tensile strength of 1750 MPa shall be used to connect two wire mesh sheets.

Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material. h) Coir Mesh

Coir net is a meshed fabric of strand made of coir fiber. The required mesh size is approximately 15 x12 mm and the required diameter of strand is approximately 4 ~ 5 mm. The requirement of coir net is explained below:

Table 1001-2 – Coir Mesh Properties Strand *Tensile Unit Thickn Eye Size Base Material Strength Weight ess (mm) (kN/m) (g/m2) (mm) Machine Spun Coir fibre with 6~30 300~1200 4～5 15x12 inner cotton thread *Tensile Strength: Strength of the 1 m long wire Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material. i) Dowels

The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified in Sub section 605 and shall be fully hot-dip galvanized in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly) with minimum coating thickness of 85 microns or 610 gm per meter square surface.

1001.3 Materials Handling and Storage

Cement shall be stored properly to prevent moisture degradation and partial hydration. Cement that has been caked and lumpy shall be rejected and discarded. Re-bars shall be stored on firm supports to prevent the steel from contacting the ground. Damage to the

246

rebar as a result of abrasion, cuts, nicks, welds and weld splatter shall be cause for rejection. Re-bars shall be protected from dirt, rust and other deleterious substances prior to installation. Heavy corrosion or pitting of re-bars shall be cause for rejection. Anchorage end of re-bars to which bearing plate and nuts will be attached, shall be protected by some protective wrap during handling, installation, grouting and guniting.

1001.4 Method Statement a. General The Contractor shall inspect the site, study soil investigation results and design details shown in the drawings before preparation and submission of the method statement to the Project Manager (at least 7 days) before the commencement of works, for prior written approval. The method statement shall include specific working details including layout of drilling rig, tools, etc., working platform preparation, temporary support for collapsible drill holes, drilling, assembling of re-bars, inserting of rebar, grouting, bearing plate fixing, wire mesh and coir mesh fixing and pull-out test, etc., shall prescribe how to execute the works in working details to comply with the specification, and also contain among other things the details of sequence of works, specific type of machines and necessary staging to be deployed for drilling and grouting, estimated daily work output rate, necessary quality control tests/measurements/ observations plus their respective frequency and acceptance criteria.

et or achieved. Specific operators/ supervisors (name, ID and CV, etc), full details of specific type of re-bars plus their protection system, centralizers, spacers, grout mix details and admixtures and any other materials to be used, etc., including catalogues, test certificates and photos of the equipment and materials to be used plus the proposed machines layout for drilling, grouting and pull-out test shall be shown on drawings and shall also be included in the method statement. The proposals in the method statement shall meet the requirements shown on the Project Manager’s drawings and this specification hereafter. b. Trial/preliminary soil nail

The Contractor shall be fully responsible of providing all necessary and suitable resources and materials to complete all the soil nails strictly according to this Specification. The Contractor shall install the trial or preliminary soils nails and carry out the verification pull-out test (Sub section 1001.6) at locations selected by the Project Manager before commencement of installation of working soil nails. Number of pull-out tests should be 2 % of the total number of working soil nails subject to a minimum of two.

1001.5 Construction Requirement a. Setting out

Setting out shall be as shown in the Drawing or as directed by the Project Manager. Immediately before drilling or installation of soil nail, the nail head position shall be 247

marked with suitable identifiable pegs or markers on the surface of slope/wall for necessary inspection and checking by the Project Manager. The positions of soil nails shall be checked to ensure any buried utilities, surface boulders, trees and other structures, etc., are not affected. Engineer’s approval is necessary if the positions of soil nails have to be shifted. b. Position

The maximum allowable deviation for drill hole entry point shall not exceed 75mm in any direction unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing. c. Alignment of nail

The drilling machine shall be attached with suitable alignment control devise set to attain the finished nail direction or inclination shown on the Drawing and the maximum permitted deviation of alignment shall not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from straightness shall not exceed 20 mm in any 3 m length of drill hole unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing. d. Nails out of position or alignment The contractor shall demonstrate to the Project Manager that the position and alignment of soil nails is within the tolerance limits specified. Any nail found out of the tolerable position or alignment shall be rejected and the Project Manager shall order to add additional nails at the Contractor’s own costs. e. Submittals

The Contractor shall engage a qualified supervisor to prepare and keep records for each soil nail installation and to submit one signed copy to the Project Manager not later than noon of the next working day after the soil nails have been installed. The record for each soil nail shall include soil nail reference number, date/time of commencement and completion of drilling and grouting, names of supervisor and operators, plus the necessary drilling and grouting details, etc. Before commencement of works, format of soil nail installation records (drilling, inserting of rebar, grouting & nail head construction) and an assembled sample of galvanized soil nail with MS plate, washers, nuts, wire mesh, coupler, centralizers shall be submitted for inspection, approval and display at site office. Details about the reputable suppliers/manufacturers of centralizers, couplers, galvanizer, MS bearing plates, washers, nuts and wire mesh, etc., plus catalogue/test certificates shall also be submitted for reference and approval of the Project Manager.

Drilling Records for each nail shall include:

 Soil nail reference number & design working capacity  Date, time & time duration of drilling 248

 Type & model of the drilling machine  Method of temporary support of drill holes  Soil nail details: size, length, rebar size, rebar protection method, design capacity  Type & size of drill rods & drilling shoe  Description of drill penetration rate  Description of strata of materials/drilling debris returns, such as color, type, size, wetness/dryness, change of wetness of cuttings (dry/dusty, moist or wet, water drops), etc. Irregular/special observations such as underground voids encountered, hole collapse, groundwater encountered, zones of no air return, obstructions, etc., if any should also be recorded. Photos showing the drilling rig, tools & different types of drilling debris, etc., shall be captured and included.  Observed exceptions & peculiarities such as drill hole collapse, wet soil/water table, etc.  Checking on straightness, cleaning & alignment  Total drilled length  Time of start & completion of drilling; time of interruptions, if any.

Inserting of Rebar Records

Conditions of centralizers & coupler in pull-out checks;

Grouting Records for each nail shall include:

 Type & model of colloidal mixer & paddle mixer  Type & model of pump  Grout mix design details (W/C ratio, type of admixture & dosage, etc.)  Results of bleeding, flow cone efflux time and strength tests  Time of start & completion of grouting  Type of nail protection  Volume of calculated gross volume of drill hole, actual volume of grout consumed & volume of top-up after grout settlement  Observed exceptions (loss of grout details, machine breakdown, etc.)  Photos showing typical grouting operation

Nail Head Construction Records for each nail shall include:

 Description of soil conditions around the nail head  Time of start & completion of pillow construction  Photos showing assembled nail head including concrete pillow with rebars, nuts, washer, wedge washer and MS plate plus tightening by suitable wench, etc.

Format and details of record and layout of nail shall be approved by the Project Manager. Other important submittals are method statement (Sub-section 1001.4), test certificates (Sub-section 1001.2), pullout test reports (Sub-section 1001.6), quality control tests as 249

specified, as-built drawings (showing nail layout plan, nail reference number, length, date completed, etc.) and project completion report, which shall include the following chapters/sections:

1. Table of contents 2. Introduction 3. Design/construction drawings, as-built drawings and finalized BOQ 4. Method Statement 5. Works programme 6. Drilling & Grouting records 7. Quality control tests results for drilling, grouting, guniting, etc., as specified. 8. Catalogues test certificates for rebar, centralizers, coupler, wire mesh, MS bearing plate and connection clips etc. 9. Pull-out test results, including test layout, drawings, photos, calibration records & certificates 10. Typical photos showing drilling layout, drill rod, head, drilling operation, etc 11. Typical photos showing grouting layout, colloidal mixer, paddle mixer, pump, etc. 12. Typical photos showing how the rebar is fixed with centralizers and results of pull-out checks inserting, etc. 13. Typical photos showing nail head construction, wire mesh fixing 14. Important corresponding letters/instructions or documents related to design changes/approvals, etc.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit a draft copy of the specified Project Completion Report to the Project Manager for approval and acceptance before sending 5 copies of the report to the Project Manager for record purposes. All important documents such as as- built drawings, approved method statement, approved works programme, all test results, etc, shall be checked and endorsed by the supervising Resident Engineer.

1001.5.1 Drilling

The main technical requirements for drilling include proper drilling techniques using proper drilling machines and tools to ensure drill holes are straight, of consistent size and clean plus completion within 2 hours. Drilling shall be carried out in accordance to Section 10.2, BS 8081 (1989) with suitable drill bits to suit various possible subsoil conditions. Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing, the Contractor shall deploy a suitable duplex or Odex dry pneumatic rotary percussion drilling machine and tools plus skilled operator and qualified supervisor that have adequate capacity and experience to produce the drill hole through all soils/rocks/hard obstructions according to the size, length and accuracy as shown in the Drawings and within 2 hours as specified in this specification. Augering or wash boring method shall not be allowed unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing.

250

Suitable drill bit of not less than 125 mm diameter or as shown in the drawings or as directed by Engineer shall be used. Suitable drilling methods using duplex or Odex system or approved equivalent shall be used in grounds likely to collapse, such as water bearing sandy/gravelly strata. Drill holes shall be flushed clean by compressed air on completion of drilling and the opening protected or sealed to prevent the entry of water or any foreign matter. A drilling record for each soil nail shall be kept by approved qualified technician as specified in Sub-section 1001.5.

Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager, drilling for the whole design nail length shall be carried out uninterrupted and completed with necessary hole cleansing within two hours. To ensure reliable and effective cleansing of the drill holes, an additional drilled length of about 0.6 m to the design length shall be provided so that cleansing of cuttings and debris towards the bottom of the drill holes by the compressed air through the drill rods can be effectively and eventually carried out. A high intensity light shall be used to inspect the drill hole for cleanliness just before the insertion of rebar and grouting. All drill rods shall be at least of N size and can be properly jointed without leakage. Inclination of drill rod shall be checked with geological compasses. Alignment of drill hole shall not deviate more than 20 mm in 3 m in any direction. At least 1 % of the drilled holes shall be selected for straightness test by inserting 100mm diameter tube to the designed length. Drilled holes that cannot pass the test shall be re-drilled and the suitability of the drilling machine shall be reassessed.

Within 12 hours of the completion of grouting, no drilling shall be carried out at a place within 10 m radius of any freshly grouted soil nails including soil nails for pull-out tests.

Adequate temporary or permanent site drainage or temporary tarpaulin shall be provided to prevent infiltration from surface run-off into the slope where soil nailing is carried out.

In order to avoid causing nuisances to the environment, the Contractor shall provide appropriate measures approved by the Project Manager to control and minimize the spreading of dust, fumes, water, debris, noise, etc., during drilling according to the local bylaw requirements.

Drilling for each soil nail shall be recorded as specified in Sub-section 1001.5 for Engineer’s reference, and selection basis of soil nails for pull-out tests or design review.

1001.5.2 Inserting Reinforcement

Important technical requirement for inserting rebar is to ensure the rebar is centrally placed within the drill hole with the help of centralizers without eccentricity problem.

The galvanized rebar fixed with centralizers at a spacing not more than 1 m or as shown in the design Drawing or as specified by the Project Manager, shall be checked before inserting into the drill hole. The rebar shall be carried/handled and inserted by

251

experienced workers at spacing of supports not greater than 3 m without jerking.

After inserting about 75 % of the total design length into the drill hole, the rebar shall be withdrawn to check the conditions of the centralizers and contamination of rebar. Such pull-out check shall be carried out on at least 1 % of the nails especially for those drill holes that have been left for more than 2 hours after completion of drilling. If collapse of drill hole is suspected, re-drilling and flushing have to be carried out as directed by Engineer. Damaged centralizers shall be replaced immediately by new type of centralizers approved by the Project Manager.

To facilitate inserting of the rebar, especially for long & heavy ones, temporary PVC/steel pipe with smooth internal surface may need to be used.

1001.5.3 Grouting All soil nails shall be installed and grouted as soon as possible after drilling (preferable within 2 hours after drilling). In any case, each drill hole shall not be left unsupported without grouting for more than 12 hours after drilling. All drill holes shall be checked for cleanliness prior to inserting the rebar and immediate grouting if the drill holes are left unsupported for more than 2 hours unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager.

Grouting shall be carried out in accordance with Section 10.4, BS8081 (1989). Grout mix shall be prepared and tested according to Sub-section 1001.2. Layout of machine plus the capacity, etc, shall be as shown in method statement and approved by the Project Manager in writing before mobilization. Grout shall be pumped or injected from the lowest point of the drill hole into its final position in drill hole through a grouting tube of about 25mm diameter by tremie method under gravity or low pressure (< 5 bars) as soon as possible/immediately after the completion of hole drilling and not more than 30 minutes after mixing. Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing, grouting shall be carried out within two hours after drilling and cleansing of drill hole are completed. Grouting shall be carried out promptly and continuously in one operation without interruption to avoid any disturbance caused by sedimentation within the grout and to reduce air bubble entrapment. Full operation shall continue until injected grout of the same composition and consistency as that of the mixed emerges from the drill hole outlet for at least one minute, i.e. continuous pumping of grout until fresh uncontaminated grout is observed flowing out from the drill hole for at least one minute. In case substantial grout is observed or suspected to have lost due to fractured rocks, cavities, etc, the designer shall be informed for necessary design review. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in either the works being rejected or re- cleansing plus proof pullout test at the Contractor’s own costs.

All grouting works shall be recorded by an approved qualified technician as required and specified in Sub-section 1001.5. The Contractor shall calculate the volume of drill holes, discounting the volume of soil nail rebar and assembly inserted in the drill hole.

Trial grouting mixture shall be carried out first before commencement of works to ensure the quality of grout mixture specified in Sub-section 1001.2 can be met.

252

1001.5.4 Nail Head Construction with Pillow

Nail head consist with two parts as concrete pillow and steel plate fixed to the pillow by a nut, as shown in Drawings.

Excavation for soil nail head shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. All necessary accessories as shown in the Drawings to be installed and in-situ construction with concrete C30/20 shall be carried out as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

Nail head with steel plate shall be in a plane normal to the nail axis clamped down with galvanized nut and washers/wedge washer to the clamping down forces of 5kN (min) or as shown in the design Drawings, using a calibrated torque wrench. Nail head construction shall only be carried out after the grout and the mortar have reached at least 7-days strength (> 20 MPa). The galvanized thread of the rebar and the nuts shall be coated with approved zinc-rich paint before tightening.

Measures to protect the newly constructed nail head against erosion such as cover the nail head with tarpaulin, etc., shall be carried out until the slope is properly protected (by guniting, etc.)

Where instructed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall uncover a maximum of 3 selected soil nail heads from the batch of soil nail head cast on any one day for examination to ensure compliance of specifications. If defective workmanship is found in any one of the 3 selected and examined nail heads, all the nail heads cast in that day shall be recast to the Project Manager’s satisfaction.

1001.5.5 Coir Mesh

Pockets shall be made in coir mesh and fertilizers, soil and seeds/plants approved by the Project Manager, shall be filled into those pockets. The Contractor shall include the coir mesh laying process in method statement for the Project Manager’s approval.

1001.5.6 High–Tensile Steel Wire Mesh

High–tensile steel wire mesh shall be installed immediately after laying of the coir mesh, as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Laying of wire mesh can be done from top to bottom. Bearing plates shall be tightened to the nails after laying the wire mesh. The Contractor shall include the wire mesh and bearing plates fixing procedure in method statement for the Project Manager’s approval.

253

1001.5.7 Boundary Beam

Excavation for boundary beam shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. In-situ construction with concrete C30 shall be carried out as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

1001.5.8 Grid Beam

Excavation for beam shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. All necessary accessories as shown in the Drawings to be installed and in-situ shotcrete concrete C30/20 shall be carried out using wet mix as instructed by the Project Manager.

Steel plate connected to the nail shall be in a plane normal to the nail axis and clamped down with galvanized nut and washers/wedge washer to the clamping down forces of 5kN (min) or as shown in the design Drawings, using a calibrated torque wrench. Beam construction shall only be carried out after the grout and the mortar have reached at least 7-days strength (> 20 MPa). The galvanized thread of the rebar and the nuts shall be coated with approved zinc-rich paint before tightening.

Measures to protect the newly constructed beams against erosion such as cover the beams with tarpaulin, etc., shall be carried out until the slope is properly protected.

Where instructed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall uncover selected beams to ensure compliance of specifications. If defective workmanship is found in selected and examined beams, all the nail beams cast in that day shall be recast to the Project Manager’s satisfaction.

1001.5.8 Shotcreting

The surface of the slopes can be shot-creted after soil nail installation to protect the surfaces from weathering and erosion instead of hydro-seeding or planting. The shotcrete shall be reinforced with galvanized wire mesh 50mmX50mm made of diameter not less than 2mm.

Slope should be prepared appropriately prior to shot-creating by removing loose or shattered rock, rock debris, soil or other loose material from the surface. Immediately prior to shotcreting, the surface to be coated shall be cleaned by an approved method such as brooming. The surface shall be left damp, but all free water shall be removed by an approved method.

Beams connecting the nail heads shall be provided with reinforcement specified in the drawings and shall be concreted with the same mix. The mesh shall be securely fastened with nails, staples or other types of surface anchors and to the installed soil nail plates and supported with approved spacers so that the mesh is located centrally within the 254

shotcrete coating. Fiber or needle reinforced concrete is not an acceptable alternative to steel reinforcing fabric. A cover of minimum 30mm of shotcrete shall be provided to the mesh at all edges. Laps in the mesh shall not be less than 200mm.

The shotcrete shall have a minimum cement content of 380 kg/m3 as discharged from the nozzle and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 30 MPa at 28 days when tested by means of 75mm diameter cores taken from test panels and from in place shotcrete. Special additives or combination of additives as required for the process may be used subject to their approval by the Project Manager.

Shotcrete shall only be applied by nozzle only using wet mix, men experienced and skilled in the work and in the presence of the Project Manager’s representative. Application shall be built up making several passes of the nozzle over the workings area. The nozzle shall be held so that the stream of material shall impinge as nearly as possible perpendicular to the surface being coated and the velocity of discharge from the nozzle, the distance of the nozzle from the surface and the amount of water in the mix shall be regulated so as to produce a dense coating with minimum rebound of the material and no sagging. Rebound material shall be removed by air jet or other suitable means from the surface as work proceeds and disposed of.

Construction joints shall be kept to a minimum. The joint edge shall not taper more than 45o and shall be cleaned and wetted by air-water jet before continuing application.

Adjoining areas not required to be shotcreted shall be protected from splash and spray rebound. Splash or rebound material on these adjoining surfaces shall be removed by air- water jet or other suitable means as work proceeds.

Prior to applying any shotcrete the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for his approval details of his proposed procedure, plant, materials and mix proportions.

Curing shall commence within one hour of the application of shotcrete and may be by water or membrane. In water curing, the surface of the shotcrete shall be kept continuously wet for at least seven days. Membrane curing shall consist of the application of an approved colorless curing compound to the surface of the shotcrete.

Short and long horizontal drains shall be installed in shotcreting area prior to shotcreting as per the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager accordance with the Section 1002 of the Specification unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.

1001.6 Test and Standards of Acceptance

Galvanize thickness of the soil nail bars and other accessories, shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications. Contractor should submit a Manufacturer Certificate for the galvanizing work. 255

The materials related to nail head construction shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. a. Pull-Out Test

Pull out test shall be carried out as specified in the “Hong Kong Geo Guide 07” and at the presence of Engineer’s representative.

Pull out test should be carried out at each site prior to the start of the permanent soil nailing work as follows.

Pullout tests are done to verify design assumptions about the bond strength at the interface between the ground and the cement grout sleeve. The test also gives an indication of the contractor’s workmanship, the appropriateness of the construction method under the specific ground and groundwater conditions and potential construction difficulties. As far as practicable, pullout tests should be carried out at locations where the pullout resistance is likely to be low or where conditions are most uncertain. Pullout tests should be carried out prior to the construction of working soil nails so that the information gathered from the tests can be reviewed for making design changes as needed.

The test soil nails should be installed using the same procedures as the working soil nails except that only the bottom part of the soil nail is grouted. The length of the cement grout sleeve of test soil nail should not be less than 2 m. A smaller bond length may not be adequately representative. A long bond length requires a large pullout load. In that case pullout load may exceed the tensile capacity of the bars. Additional information such as the type of material encountered and the presence of groundwater during drilling should be recorded.

Soil nails for pullout tests require partial grouting to obtain a specified bond length for testing. Grouting should be carried out slowly and carefully to prevent over-grouting. Packers are usually used to seal off the grouted section. Only packers that can effectively seal off the grouted section should be used. The packers should, as far as practicable, not contribute to the bond strength of the grouted section. If there is any resistance it should be estimated.

When setting up the pullout test apparatus, the steel bearing plate to be used for the test should not be allowed to bear down onto the steel bar as this will deflect the bar, thereby giving incorrect readings during the test.

The number of pullout tests should be 2 % of the total number of working soil nails subject to a minimum of two. Test nails should be filled up by cement grout upon completion of the test.

256

b. Grout

Cube test strength results (according to BS 1881 and test cube size should be 50 mm) shall be provided prior to commencement of work to demonstrate that the mix meets the design minimum strength. Cube strength shall be obtained from six grout cubes (after seven days and twenty eight days respectively – three cubes for each test). Seven days cube strength should be tested in order to confirm 28 days cube strength of 30 MPa. Number of test samples shall be decided by the Project Manager. Bleeding test (<0.5 % by volume 3 hours after mixing or 2 % (maximum) when measured at 20 degree C in a covered glass cylinder of 100 mm diameter and with a grout depth of 100mm. In addition, the water shall be re-absorbed within 24 hours. Free expansion shall not exceed 10 % (ASTM C940-98, Flow cone efflux test time <15 seconds, ASTM C939-02).

For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following requirements:

If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement (a) then all grout mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last batch from which samples were taken to make the test cubes, together with all the intervening batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.

If only one cube fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of grout from which that cube was taken.

The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order, including the removal of the relevant cement grout, and shall, before proceeding with the grouting, submit details of the action proposed to ensure that the cement grout complies with the requirements of the Specificat’ion for the Project Manager's approval.

Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes exceeds the characteristic strength of the cement grout and that the difference between the greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.

257

c. Shotcrete

Test cube strength results (of 75 mm dia. core) shall be provided prior to commencement of work to demonstrate that the mix meets the design minimum strength. Cube strength shall be obtained from six shotcrete cores (after seven days and twenty eight days respectively – three cubes for each test). Seven days cube strength should be tested in order to confirm 28 days cube strength of 30 MPa. Number of test samples shall be decided by the Project Manager.

For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following requirements:

If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement (a) then all shotcrete mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last batch from which samples were taken to make the test cores, together with all the intervening batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.

If only one cube strength fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of shotcrete from which that cube was taken. The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order, including the removal of the relevant shotcrete, and shall, before proceeding with the shotcreting, submit details of the action proposed to ensure that the shotcrete complies with the requirements of the Specification for the Project Manager's approval.

Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes exceeds the characteristic strength of the shotcrete and that the difference between the greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.

1001.7 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement Temporary works, such as temporary platform preparation prior to soil nailing shall be paid as a Lump sum item as indicated in the Bills of Quantities. Payment shall be made as;

258

60% of the lump sum under this item shall be certified upon the establishment of temporary platform for soil nailing works. 30% of the amount upon progress of soil nailing works as approved by the Project Manager and the remaining 10% shall be paid when the temporary platform has been totally removed and site has been cleaned by the Contractor.

Soil nailing work: the measurement shall include for drillings, nail bar and grouting, and quantity shall be measured by the linear meter along the nail starting from bottom face of the nail head (commencing ground level) to the tip of the nail.

Soil nail heads including pillow shall be measured in numbers including excavation, form work, reinforcement bars, fixing of MS bearing plate, nut and washers inside the head and insitu concrete C30/20.

High tensile wire mesh shall be measured in Sq.m including plate, nut and washers to be used to fix wire mesh to the nail head and connection clips to be used at connections of wire meshes. No payment will be given for lapping of the high tensile wire mesh.

Coir mesh shall be measured in Sq.m. No payment of lapping of the coir mesh. Preparation of pockets including soil, fertilizers and planting or seeding shall be measured and paid under Section 802.

Concrete and tor steel required for boundary beam shall be measured in linear meter. No separate payment for excavation and dowels will be paid and cost shall be included in beam rate.

Shotcrete concrete and tor steel required for beams in grid beam structure shall be measured in linear metres. No separate payment for excavation and dowels will be paid and cost shall be included in beam rate.

Shotcrete face shall be measured in square meters including net and dowels. Area of the nail heads connecting beams shall be deducted from the total shotcreting area.

Nail heads connecting beams in shotcrete face shall be measured in linear metres including nail heads, reinforcements, dowels and shotcreting.

Pull-Out tests shall be measured in numbers and two numbers of tests are required for test nails prior to the commencement of work for design verification and Pull-Out tests should be performed for 2% of the total number of working soil nails subject to a minimum of two and those shall be measured separately. b. Payment

The quantities determine for soil nails as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract

259

unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including drilling, drilling through incidental boulders, fabrication and installation of all accessories for soil nails and grouting.

The quantities determine for nail heads including pillow as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope, formwork, reinforcement, concreting required for pillow construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the nail head.

The quantities determine for boundary beams as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope, formwork, reinforcement, concreting required for boundary beam construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the boundary beams along with dowels.

The quantities determine for grid beams as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope, formwork, reinforcement, shotcrete concreting required for grid beam construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the grid beams along with dowels. No separate payment shall be made for the overlapping area of the beams at connections.

The quantities determine for shotcrete as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope, shotcreting, net and construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the shotcrete face along with dowels.

The quantities determine for nail heads connecting beams as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope, reinforcements, nail heads, shotcreting and construction, fabrication and installation of all accessories of the connecting beams along with dowels. No separate payment shall be made for the overlapping area of the beams at connections.

Pay Description Pay Unit Item

1001(1) Temporary working platform for soil nailing works Lump Sum

1001(2)a 32mm dia. soil nails (more than 12m length) inserted Linear meter into 125mm dia. bore hole with grouting and coupling

1001(2)b 32mm dia. soil nails (less than or equal to 12m length) Linear meter inserted into 125mm dia. bore hole with grouting

260

1001(4) High tensile protective mesh including connecting Square meter clips, MS bearing plate, nut and washers 1001(5) Coir mesh Square meter 250x250mm Concrete C30 Grid beam (boundary) Linear meter 1001(7) connecting the ends of the completed grid beams at the top boundary including Excavation, FW, RF and dowels Numbers 1001(10) Pullout Test as instructed by the Project Manager

1002 HORIZONTAL DRAINS

1002.1 Description

This work shall consist of drilling and installation of horizontal drains and other associate works. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

1002.2 Materials

The materials used for the horizontal drains shall meet the requirements of the following, unless otherwise specified.

a) PVC pipes (Type 1000) b) Geo-textile shall be having physical and filtration properties specified in Section 805. 1002.3 Construction Requirements

Horizontal drains of PVC pipes (Type 1000) shall be perforated on the upper half and wrapped with an approved type of geotextile. Inner end of the PVC pipe shall be closed with an end cap. Diameter and length of the pipe shall be as specified in Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.

If continuous lengths of specified lengths are not available in the market, Engineer’s instructions should be obtained for jointing two pipes.

1002.4 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement

For horizontal drains; drillings, PVC perforated pipe (Type 1000), end cap and filter fabric (Geo-textile) shall be measured by the linear meter. 261

b. Payment The quantities determine for horizontal drains as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including drilling, geotextile rapping, fabrication and installation of horizontal drains. Pay Description Pay Unit Item Perforated PVC pipe of 75 mm Dia. (Type 1000) Horizontal Drains with 5mm thick groove and geotextile 1002(1) wrapping. Rate shall include for drilling and associated Linear meter work and disposal of drilled material away from the site as directed by the Project Manager.

1003 MONITORING

1003.1 Description This work shall consist of installing maintaining and monitoring of Monitoring Equipment as specified in Appendix B. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

1003.2 Measurement and Payment

a. Measurement Instrumentation shall be measured as a Provisional Sum item for the cost of providing, installation of the Monitoring Equipment.

Monitoring & testing shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of maintaining and monitoring of the Monitoring Equipment.

b. Payment

Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has completed the work satisfactory as per the Appendix B. Pay Description Pay Unit Item Provisional 1003(1) Instrumentation as per Appendix B Sum 1003(2) Monitoring & testing as per Appendix B Lump Sum

262

APPENDIXA

FACILITIES FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER

1. General

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and service:

- Offices, - Accommodation, - Vehicles

Including contents, access roads and hard standing for the use of the Employer and Engineer. Offices, accommodation should be rented and the rent should cover the whole period of the Project.

All vehicles given to the Employer are on the hired basis.

2 2. Deadline and Payment of the Supply

(a) Offices

The Employer’s and Engineer’s office shall be available and ready for use within 28 days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by Contractor.

Payment for the Employer’s and Engineer’s office will be made when all the office (including furniture and equipment) are completed and handed over to the Employer and the Project Manager. In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified time, to rent the office satisfactory to the Project Manager, the Project Manager will provide suitable offices for his use and the cost involved shall be deducted from payments due to the Contractor in accordance Conditions of Contract.

(b) Accommodation

The Employer’s and Engineer’s accommodation shall be available and ready for use within 28 days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by Contractor. After the 28 days, the actual requirement shall follow the Project Manager’s assignment.

In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified time, to rent the accommodation satisfactory to the Project Manager, the Project Manager will provide suitable accommodation for his use and the cost involved shall be deducted from payments due to the Contractor in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.

263

2.1.1 (c) Vehicles

Vehicles shall be provided within 28 days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by Contractor.

All vehicles will be on hired basis and payments will be made monthly.

In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified time, to supply the vehicles satisfactory to the Employer, the Employer will provide suitable vehicles for his use and the cost involved shall be deducted from payments due to the Contractor in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.

3 3. Office for the Employer and Engineer

3.1 3.1 General

(a) The Contractor shall furnish and service office made available for the Employer and the Project Manager. The office shall be regularly cleaned for so long as it is in use and suitable arrangements be made for the disposal of any waste arising from use of such offices. The office shall be equipped with air conditioners.

3.1.1 (b) All equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be of a quality and precision appropriate to its proposed use and shall be delivered in a serviceable condition. The Contractor shall maintain all such equipment in serviceable condition and replace, if necessary, any that becomes unserviceable.

3.1.2 (c) Generally, the Contractor shall provide electricity and water services from the mains supply and provide necessary pumps to supply water from sumps (or wells) to storage tanks. In the event of the mains electricity supply failing, electricity shall be supplied from a stand - by generator with automatic change - over switch and adequate ground connection, installed and operated by the Contractor. Generators to supply adequate power shall be operated where mains electricity supply is not practicable.

3.2 3.2 Maintenance of Offices

3.2.1 (a) The Contractor shall maintain in good decorative and working order the buildings and the contents thereof. The maintenance of these facilities shall include daily cleaning, the provision of cleaning consumables and toilet materials, garbage collection and disposal, and the maintenance of the gardens and surrounding ground all to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

264

3.2.2 (b) The Contractor shall supply and keep replenished at all times all consumable items such as tea, coffee, milk, sugar, insecticides, first aid supplies, potable water, laboratory supplies and so forth.

3.2.3 (c) The Contractor shall maintain in good condition and service regularly and repair or replace as required all items of furniture and equipment provided by him, and shall provide facilities on a 24 hours per day basis.

3.2.4 (d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all domestic telephone calls but shall not be responsible for the cost of any overseas calls made from the telephone provided.

(d) The Contractor shall provide watchmen for security purposes to the approval of the Project Manager.

4 Office for the Project Manager and Employer

5 There shall be two separate offices, one for the Project Manager and one for the Employer.

6 The facility for the Project Manager shall have the following minimum provisions;

Number of Minimum Room size (m Room Rooms x m) Asbestos materials shall not be used for roofs and ceilings Engineer’s Staff 3 5x4 Conference Room 1 5x10 Administration/CAD/Copy 2 5x5 Rooms 5x4 (for men), Toilets 2 5x3 (for women) Kitchen/ Pantry 1 4x2 Store Room 1 5x2 Drivers’ Room 1 5x3

Minimum room floor total 250 sq.m Area (excl. passageways and 265

halls)

Covered Parking for 4 Vehicles

7 The facility for the Employer shall have the following minimum provisions;

Number of Minimum Room size (m Room Rooms x m) Asbestos materials shall not be used for roofs and ceilings Employer’s Staff 2 5x4 Administration/CAD/Copy 1 5x5 Rooms 5x4 (for men), Toilets 2 5x3 (for women) Kitchen/ Pantry 1 4x2 Store Room 1 5x2 Drivers’ Room 1 5x3 Minimum room floor total Area (excl. passageways and 100 sq.m halls) Covered Parking for 2 Vehicles

7.1 Furniture and Office Equipment for the Employer’s and Engineer’s Staff

The furniture and equipment to be supplied and installed in the offices shall be new, and of acceptable quality. The furniture may be steel, aluminium, wood or a combination of these. The Contractor should forward details of the items that the Project Manager and the Employer intends to purchase and obtain prior approval from the Project Manager.

Upon completion of the Contract, all non-consumable items provided will become the property of the Employer.

The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and provide consumables for the furniture and equipment purchased, until completion and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

266

Accommodation for the Employer and the Project Manager

7.2 General The Contractor shall provide rented accommodation for the Employer and the Engineer to the approval of the Project Manager.

The accommodations shall be equipped with air conditioners, security grilles and mosquito netting, and shall be fully furnished and equipped with new items by the Contractor as requested by the Employer and the Project Manager to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

Each house shall be provided with one telephone line.

Each house shall be provided with hot and cold water in the kitchen and the bathrooms. Each Bathroom shall be equipped with a pedestal type wash basin, pedestal type water closet (of approved colour ), shower tray, stainless steel taps, shower fittings,(for hot & cold Water) hand bidet, towel rack, soap tray etc.

(b) The Contractor shall furnish and service accommodation made available for the Employer and the Project Manager. The accommodation shall be regularly cleaned for so long as it is in use and suitable arrangements be made for the disposal of any waste arising from use of such accommodation.

7.2.1 (b) All equipment and furniture supplied by the Contractor shall be of a quality and precision appropriate to its proposed use and shall be delivered in a serviceable condition. The Contractor shall maintain all such equipment and furniture in serviceable condition and replace, if necessary, any that becomes unserviceable.

7.2.2 (c) Generally, the Contractor shall provide electricity and water services from the mains supply and provide necessary pumps to supply water from sumps (or wells) to storage tanks. In the event of the mains electricity supply failing, electricity shall be supplied from a stand - by generator with automatic change - over switch and adequate ground connection, installed and operated by the Contractor. Generators to supply adequatepower shall be operated where mains electricity supply is not practicable.

6.2 Maintenance of Accommodation

7.2.3 (a) The Contractor shall maintain in good decorative and working order the buildings and the contents thereof. The maintenance of these facilities shall include daily cleaning, the provision of cleaning consumables and toilet materials, garbage collection and disposal, and the maintenance of the gardens and surrounding ground all to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

267

7.2.4 (b) The Contractor shall supply and keep replenished at all times all consumable items such as first aid supplies, potable waterand so forth.

7.2.5 (c) The Contractor shall maintain in good condition and service regularly and repair or replace as required all items of furniture and equipment provided by him, and shall provide facilities on a 24 hours per day basis.

7.2.6 (d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all domestic telephone calls but shall not be responsible for the cost of any overseas calls made from the telephone provided.

(e) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all electricity and water supplied.

(f) The Contractor shall provide watchmen for security purposes to the approval of the Project Manager.

The following Table A1.1 and A1.2 indicates the minimum floor requirements of the Accommodation and provision can be made as 2 to 3 stories including parking facilities.

Table A1.1:Minimum floor requirements for the Project Manager’s Accommodation

Number of Rooms Minimum Room Description size ( m2) Living/ Dining Room (air conditioned) 01 40

Bedroom (air conditioned) 04 15

Attached Toilets/ Bathroom 04 5

Visitors Toilets/Bathroom 01 5

Kitchen 01 15

Pantry 01 12

01 10 Servants Accommodation

Servants Toilet 01 4.5

Minimum room floor total Area (excl. 150 passageways and halls) Covered Parking for Vehicles 03

268

7.3 Table A1.2:Minimum floor requirements for the Employer’s Accommodation

Number of Rooms Minimum Room Description size ( m2) Living/ Dining Room (air conditioned) 01 40

Bedroom (air conditioned) 02 15

Attached Toilets/ Bathroom 02 5

Visitors Toilets/Bathroom 01 5

Kitchen 01 15

Pantry 01 12

01 10 Servants Accommodation

Servants Toilet 01 4.5

Minimum room floor total Area (excl. 100 passageways and halls) Covered Parking for Vehicles 02

7.4 Furniture, Equipment and Fittings for the Accommodation of the Employer’s and Engineer’s Site Staff

The furniture and equipment to be supplied and installed in the accommodation shall be new, and of acceptable quality. The furniture may be steel, aluminium, wood or a combination of these. The Contractor should forward details of the items that the Project Manager and the Employer intends to purchase and obtain prior approval from the Project Manager.

Upon completion of the Contract, all non-consumable items provided will become the property of the Employer.

The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and provide consumables for the furniture and equipment purchased, until completion and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

269

7.5 Hotel Accommodation

Where the Contractor fails to provide the required accommodation to the Project Manager and the Employer within the time specified or subsequently agreed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide, at no cost to the Employer, suitable hotel accommodation as approved by the Project Manager’s staff intended to occupy the accommodation until such time as the accommodation is ready for occupation.

The Contractor shall provide hotel accommodation, including meals but excluding alcoholic beverages, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager during the Contractor’s mobilisation period until the Project Manager’s and Employer’s accommodation specified in the Contract is approved for occupation by the Project Manager. Such accommodation shall include provision for immediate dependants of the Project Manager’s staff.

Hotel accommodation provided after the time the Employer’s and Engineer’s accommodation is due to be ready for occupation will not be reimbursable.

6. Vehicles for the Employer

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an air conditioned “Double Cab” Pick-Up, 4- wheel drive, with a diesel engine of at least 3.0 litre capacity in sound condition ,registered in Sri Lanka and manufactured within the last three years, for the use of Employer, for the period from Commencement Date to the date of Taking over Certificate. The cumulative usage of the vehicle will not exceed 3000 km per month. Payment will be made in Vehicle Month for which the vehicle is provided and maintained. The Contractor shall provide an alternative vehicle with same conditionin the event of the vehicle is not available for use by reason of being under repair, broken down, being serviced, or for any other reason.

The Contractor shall provide driver, fuel, repair service etc& he will Pay all the taxes, comprehensively insure for within the period for the above vehicle is supplied. The Contractor shall provide a driver for vehicle supplied to the Employer, who although in the employ of the Contractor, shall be responsible to the Employer and shall be getting his working instructions from the user of the vehicle authorized by the Employer.

270

APPENDIX B

INSTRUMENTATION

1.0 Installation of Land slide Monitoring Equipment

All instruments shall be installed within 14 days after awarding the contract at locations decided by the Project Manager. 1.1Number of Equipment Following instruments will have to be installed at the sliding masses (Table 1).The type of equipment, exact locations of equipment, depth, length of the apparatus and their specifications shall be decided under the instruction of the Consultant. Table 1: Number of monitoring instruments to be installed at the site Type of Number of Equipment Equipment Inclinometer 05 Automatic Water Level Gauge 05 (Piezometer) Automatic Rain Proposed rain gauges in Gauge surrounding areas can be utilized.

1.2 Installation of Inclinometer After the drilling completed, in clinometers with water level gauge shall be installed into boreholes. Method of installation is presented in Figure 3 and procedure of the setting out work (refer figure 1&2) shall be instructed by the Project Manager at the site.

Figure 2: Probe

271

Figure 1: Inclinometer (Instrument view)

Figure 2: Inclinometer installation

1.3 Installation of Water Level Gauge (Piezometers) After the drilling works completed, perforated PVC pipe and water level gauge shall be installed to the boreholes. Internal diameter of PVC pipe shall be50mm with the minimum thickness of 4mm.

Method of installation is presented in Figure 3and procedure of the setting out work (refer Figure 4) shall be instructed by the Project Manager.

272

Figure 3: Groundwater level gauge (Design view)

Water Level Gauge

Data Receiver

273

Figure 4: Groundwater level gauge and data receiver (Instrument view)

1.4 MONITORING 1.4.1PERIOD AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING Period of monitoring work is the maintenance period according to the Contract. However, the monitoring work will be initiated by the Contractor with the supervision of the Project Manager right after the installation of instruments is completed. The work will be undertaken by the Road Development Authority (RDA) after the maintenance period. The data shall be collected from the monitoring equipment once a month during dry seasons and twice a month during rainy seasons.

1.4.2COLLECTIONOFDATA Data collection shall be conducted using a data receiver (refer Figure 4) to be lent by the Consultant. Collected data shall be downloaded into a personal computer by PC card that is attached to the control unit. The Consultant shall instruct the relevant party regarding the procedure of the monitoring.

1.4.3ARRANGEMENTOFTHECOLLECTEDDATA The Contractor shall arrange the data collected into tables and graphs with the use of specific software (Data Saver).

1.4.4 MAINTENANCEOFTHEEQUIPMENT

The monitoring devices shall be regularly cleaned and checked for continuous and smooth functioning of data recording by the Contractor.

274

Design Drawings

SUPPLY & FIXING HIGH TENSILE WIRE MESH AND RELATED ACCESORIES IN THE UNSTABLE SLOPE SEGMENTS BETWEEN CULVERT NO 75/5 TO 76/4 ON PERADENIYA - BADULLA - CHENKALADI ROAD (A005) ROAD - CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328

The following drawings included in the Bidding Document are listed below:

1. NBRO/LRRMD/CRIP/31/12292-11(HAK)-13/R-2

275

F. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Location - Culvert Nos. 75/5 to 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla- Chenkalady Road (A005)

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for Rectification of Slope

This Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is the summarized matrix of all possible impacts that may occur during the rectification of landslide area.

The EMP should form part of the Bid Documents and shall be considered alongside the specifications. Thereby the prescriptions detailed in the EMP are mandatory in nature and also contractually binding. The EMP will also equally applicable to sub-contractors including nominated sub-contractors if any. The Contractor will be responsible for the compliance with the requirements of the EMP. With the assistance of the “Engineer” the Road Development Authority (RDA) will monitor the compliance of EMP by the Contractor.

In addition to national laws and regulations, the project should comply with World Bank Operational Policies, which are the policies of the International Donor Agency (IDA) of this project. Specifically World Bank projects shall not finance the extraction of resources from or use of sites within protected areas defined under FFPO or declared forest reserves under the FO (as per OP 4.04-Natural Habitats Compliance requirements) regardless of approvals obtained from the respective GOSL agencies.

The bidders are advised to carefully consider the EMP requirements stated under item 2.0 “Construction phase” when preparing the bid and pricing the items of work. The prescriptions and clauses detailed in the EMP are integral component of the specifications for relevant item of work unless separate items are included in the Bill of Quantities. Thus separate payments will not be made in respect of compliance with the EMP. In case the Contractor or his sub-contractor/s fails to implement the EMP recommendations after informing in writing, the Project Manager will take whatever actions it is deemed necessary to ensure that the EMP is properly implemented. If the contractor or his subcontractor/s still fails to comply with EMP requirement, the “Engineer” may levy a penalty based on the level of non-compliance, cost incurred to rectify the damages caused by such negligence and/ or recover the cost from contractor’s payments.

A draft Environmental Method Statement (EMS) based on the requirements of the EMAP and in line with the construction plan should be prepared within 30 days from the date of commencement and final EMS should be submitted within 02 months and approval should be obtained from the Project Manager. The remedial actions and methodology proposed by the Contractor shall be acceptable by the Project Manager and in accordance with EMAP. The EMS shall be amended during the construction period if needed in agreement with Engineer and Employer.

276

The Contractor through an appointed dedicated / qualified Officer shall implement the requirements of the EMP. The officer is responsible for,

(a) maintaining up to date records on actions taken by the Contractor with regard to implementation of EMP recommendations. (b) timely submission of reports, information and data to the Project Management Unit (PMU). (c) participating in the meetings conveyed by the Project Manager and (d) any other assistance requested by the Project Manager.

277

Activities Protection and preventive measures Locations/ Mitigation Institutional Project phase cost Responsibility Implement Supervision 1.0 Advance Works 1.1 Design for structures (a) RDA should obtain prior consent from relevant authorities such as Design stage - RDA Department of Wildlife Conservation, ID. Forest Department etc., for implementation of proposed plan and any proposed construction works

on/at areas belong to these institutions. RDA should obtain prior consent from relevant public if any land use of people is likely to be interfered temporarily or permanently by the proposed drainage improvement work.

(b) All designs should be considered to allow overland flow and sheet flow Design cost RDA from the pavement or cross drainage without any blocking Design stage All designs should be considered to allow overland flow and cross waterways without any blockage For drainage designs should be considered for smooth flow without any blocking For silt traps designs should be considered for trapping of silt in proper manner For catch pits appropriate designs should be considered in order to drain out rain water without blocking / flooding Designed drainage facilities must be capable of disposing of the runoff generated in a given water catchment without inundating the surrounding land (adjacent properties and utilities or land uses). 1.2 Design of slope protection / land-slide management structures (a) Design must ensure structural integrity and safety of structures to address Design stage Design cost RDA issues such as physical trauma associated with failure of structures and address potential reduction of stabilization of the nearby land due to slope 278 protection activities. Incorporate as appropriate the following during planning, siting and design phases:

Inclusion of buffer strips or physical separations around project sites Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to prevent failures due natural and/or man-made risks (such as wind, flooding, landslides, etc.) Application of locally regulated building codes to ensure structural integrity Certification of designing and constructing infrastructure, the applicability and appropriateness of structural criteria 1.3 EMP (a) EMP should be included as a Special Condition in the Bid Document; and Prior to To be RDA, EMP should be attached to contract to form part of the contract bidding provided as requirement a provisional sum and/or as part of the engineering cost 2.0 Construction Phase 2.1 Earthwork and Soil Conservation 2.1.1 Site Clearance and Land Development Prevention of removal of trees as far as possible. Engineering RDA, FD During removing, attention should be paid to maintain minimum Trees to be cost disturbances to soil cover and also care should be taken not to damage removed- adjoining trees. Applicable Degraded state land identified for forestry activities will be improved to throughout the compensate for the trees removed as 1:2 at least construction Water spraying should be done at a regular interval to avoid dust areas. A the generation due to site clearance land belongs to a private owner the removed trees need be handed over to the relevant owner. Consent 279

for removal of trees needs to be obtained from the owner before removal. Identified trees for removal should be marked for easy identification. 2.1.2 Disposal of Debris and Spoil (a) All debris and residual spoil material including any left earth shall be Disposal sites Engineering contractor RDA, disposed only at locations approved by the Project Manager for such to be identified cost purpose and subjected to the clauses 2.1.1.b and 2.1.1.c. by the All material that is reusable or recyclable shall be used for such purposes contractor and either by the contractor or through dealers. approved by Engineer and (b) The contractor shall obtain the approval from the relevant Local the Local Authority such as Prdeshiya Sabha, Municipal Council and other Authority. If government agencies (as required) for disposal and spoil at the specified the land owner location, as directed by the Project Manager reqests Private land that will be selected for disposal should also require written excavated soil consent from the land owner to be dispose to his owen (c) The debris and spoil shall be disposed in such a manner that; land , (i) waterways and drainage paths are not blocked aprroval needs (ii) the disposed material should not be washed away by runoff and to be obtained (iii) should not be a nuisance to the public from the DS and Pradeshiya sabha.

(d) The debris and residual spoil material including any left earth shall be All burrow sites used, to refill the burrow areas as directed by the Project Manager, (licensed sites)

280

subjected to laying of topsoil as per EMP clause 2.1.2. identified by contractor and approved by

engineer.

To be identified (e) Excavated earth materials and all debris materials shall be disposed Applicable immediately without allowing to stockpile at identified locations for throughout the debris disposal, recommended by the Project Manager. During project sites transportation, dispose materials should be covered with tarpaulin. Engineer. To be identified

(f) If approved by the Project Manager, contractor can dispose the debris and In identified spoil as a filling material provided that the contractor can ensure that such filling sites material is used for legally acceptable purposes with disposed in an subjected to the environmentally acceptable manner. approval of engineer 2.1.2 Conservation and reuse of top soil (a) Top soil of the agricultural areas and any other productive areas where it Within the Engineering Contractor RDA, has to be removed for the purpose of this project shall be stripped to a project sites cost specified depth of 150mm and stored in stockpiles of height not where topsoil exceeding 2m, if directed by the Project Manager. If the contractor is in from productive any doubt on whether to conserve the topsoil or not for any given area he land to be shall obtain the direction from the Project Manager in writing removed (b) Removed top soil could be used as a productive soil when Site(s) replanting/establishing vegetation identified for re-plantation program Suitable locations to be identified for replanting.

281

(c) Stockpiled topsoil must be returned to cover the areas including cut Within the slopes where the topsoil has been removed due to project activities. project sites Residual topsoil must be distributed on adjoining/proximate barren areas where slope as identified by the Project Manager in a layer of thickness of 75mm – stabilization is 150mm. carried out and/or on barren land A004 road near 194km. (d) Topsoil thus stockpiled for reuse shall not be surcharged or overburdened. Locations - As far as possible multiple handling of topsoil stockpiles should be kept where topsoil is to a minimum. stockpiled for reuse ( locations to be identified)

2.1.3 Protection of Ground Cover and Vegetation (a) Construction vehicle, machinery and equipment shall be used and Within the - Contractor RDA, stationed only in the areas of work and in any other area designated/ project areas approved by the Project Manager. Entry and exit of construction vehicles and machinery should be restricted to particular points as directed by the Project Manager (b) Contractor should provide necessary instructions to drivers, operators and Within the other construction workers not to destroy ground vegetation cover project areas unnecessarily

2.1.4 Burrowing of Earth (a) Earth available from construction site excavation works as per design, All excavation - Contractor RDA may be used as embankment materials, subject to approval of the Project areas and Manager embankments

282

(b) Contractor shall comply with the environmental requirements/guidelines All burrow sites issued by the CEA and the respective local authorities with respect of identified and locating burrow areas and with regard to all operations related to used by the excavation and transportation of earth from such sites. contractor Contractor can also find suitable soil materials from currently operated Borrow licensed burrow pits in the surrounding area, subject to approval of the sites to be Project Manager identified No burrow-sites be used (current approved) or newly established within areas protected under FFPO and FO

(c) Burrow areas shall not be opened without having a valid mining license from the GSMB. The location, depth of excavation and the extent of the pit or open cut area shall be as approved by the Project Manager.

(d) All burrow pits/areas should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the Engineering contractor in accordance with the requirements/guidelines issued by the cost CEA and the respective local authority. (e) Establishment of burrow pits/areas and its operational activities shall not All excavation - cause any adverse impact to the near-by properties. Also shall not be a areas, slopes and danger of health hazard to the people. burrow sites Borrow sites to be identified (f) Contractor shall take all steps necessary to ensure the stability of slopes Engineering including those related to temporary works and burrow pits. cost

2.1.5 Prevention of soil erosion (a) Debris material shall be disposed in such a manner that waterways, Applicable Engineering Contractor RDA drainage paths would not get blocked. throughout cost Drainage paths associated with the infrastructure should be improved / project sites erected to drain rain water properly. Locations of Silt traps will be constructed to avoid siltation into water ways where culverts, leader necessary. ways (directly connected to 283

To avoid siltation, drainage paths should not be directed to streams, other streams / water water bodies and sea directly and they should be separated from streams / bodies), toe walls & other water bodies / sea silt traps to be erected. Special attention to stream (b) Barricades such as humps will be erected at excavated areas for culverts, Applicable silttraps, toe walls, filling and lifting with roper sign boards, as some throughout work in these sections will have to be stopped during heavy rains due to project sites heavy erosion. To prevent soil erosion in these excavated areas, proper earth drain system should be introduced.

(c) Embankment slopes, slopes of cuts, etc. shall not be unduly exposed to erosive forces. These exposed slopes shall be graded and covered by grass or other suitable materials per the specifications. All fills, back fills and slopes should be compacted immediately to reach the specified degree of compaction and establishment of proper mulch. (d) Work that lead to heavy erosion shall be avoided during the raining - season. If such activities need to be continued during rainy season prior approval must be obtained from the Project Manager by submitting a proposal on actions that will be undertaken by the contractor to prevent erosion. (e) The work, permanent or temporary shall consist of measures as per Engineering design or as directed by the Project Manager to control soil erosion, cost sedimentation and water pollution to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. Typical measures include the use of berms, dikes sediment basins, fiber mats, mulches, grasses, slope drains and other devices. All sedimentation and pollution control works and maintenance thereof are deemed, as incidental to the earthwork or other items of work and no separate payment will be made for their implementation. 2.1.6 Contamination of soil by fuel and lubrications (a) Vehicle/machinery and equipment servicing and maintenance work shall Servicing yards Engineering Contractor RDA, be carried out only in designated locations/ service stations approved by to be used for 284

the Project Manager vehicle cost servicing (b) Approval from CEA in the form of an Environmental Protection Licenses RDA, (EPL) should be secured by the contractor if he intends to prepare his CEA own vehicle servicing yard (c) Waste oil, other petroleum products and untreated wastewater shall not be Servicing yards discharged on ground so that to avoid soil pollution. Adequate measures to be used for shall be taken against pollution of soil by spillage of petroleum/oil vehicle products from storage tanks and containers. All waste petroleum products servicing and shall be disposed of in accordance with the guidelines issued by the CEA locations where or the Project Manager. vehicles will be temporarily stationed (d) Sites used for vehicle and plant service and maintenance shall be restored New servicing RDA, back to its initial status. Site restoration will be considered as incidental to yards work. developed by the contractor for the project 2.1.7 Disposal of harmful construction wastes (a) Contractor prior to the commencement of work shall provide list of Locations - Contractor RDA, harmful, hazardous and risky chemicals/ material that will be used in the identified to project work to the Project Manager. Contractor shall also provide the list store chemicals of places where such chemicals/materials or their containers or other and waste harmful materials have been dumped as waste at the end of the project. disposal (b) All disposal sites should be approved by the Project Manager and RDA approved by CEA and relevant local authority. (c) The contractor shall clean up any area including water-bodies All affected affected/contaminated (if any) as directed by the Project Manager at his water bodies own cost. close to material storage and waste disposal sites

285

2.1.8. Quarry operations (a) Utilizing the existing quarry sites available in the project influential area All, quarry sites Engineering Contractor RDA, as much as possible which are approved by GSMB with valid EPL and which will be cost CEA, Industrial Mining Licences; used during GSMB, If new quarries are to be opened, prior approval should be obtained from construction local GSMB, CEA and local authorities such as Pradeshiya Sabha. phase. authorities Selected quarry sites should have proper safety measures such as warnings, safety nets etc., and third party insurance cover to protect external parties that may be affected due to blasting. Quarry sites should not be established within protected sites identified under the FFPO and FO (b) It is recommended not to seek material from quarries that have ongoing - disputes with community. (c) The maintenance and rehabilitation of the access roads in the event of Engineering damage by the contractors operations shall be a responsibility of the cost contractor. 2.2 Storage and handling of construction material 2.2.1 Emission of dust (a) Storage locations of sand, metal, soil should be located away from At all material Engineering Contractor RDA, settlements and other sensitive receptors and covered (with artificial storage cost barriers or natural vegetation). locations (stock Measures given under clauses 2.5.1 (c), (d), (e) should be considered piles of sand, within material storage site to minimize dust during handling of material. gravel and metal) All access roads within the storage site should be sprinkled with water for dust suspension. 2.2.2 Storage of fuel, oil and chemicals (avoid fumes and offensive odor) (a) All cement, bitumen (barrels), oil and other chemicals should be stored At all material Engineering Contractor RDA, and handled on an impervious surface (concrete slab) above ground level. storage cost Storage facility of cement, bitumen (barrels), oil and other chemicals locations should be an enclosed structure ensuring that no storm water flows in to (cement, the structure. bitumen, fuel, 286

A ridge should be placed around the storage facility to avoid runoff oil and other getting in to the structure. chemicals used Adequate ventilation should be kept to avoid accumulation of fumes and for construction offensive odor that could be harmful to material handlers. activities) Measures given under clause 2.9 should be considered to avoid any accidents and risks to worker population and public.

2.2.3 Transportation of material (a) The contractor should avoid over loaded trucks to transport material to Within the - Contractor RDA, construction sites. During transportation, materials should be covered project with tarpaulin. Avoid peak hours in roads with moderate to high traffic’; locations and the contractor shall minimize possible public nuisance due to dust, traffic the vicinity congestion, air pollution, etc., due to such haulage; If local roads are used, select routes based on the truck load; divide the load to prevent damages to local roads and bridges; observe speed limits and maintain vehicles in the good condition; transport material under cover; avoid peak hours in roads with moderate to high traffic. If there are damages to local roads and other utilities due to hauling in roads which were not identified during design stage, Contractor shall attends to repair all damaged infrastructure/ roads, if needed through relevant authorities 2.3 Water – Protection of Water Sources and Quality 2.3.1. Loss of minor water sources and disruption to water users (a) Contractor should make employees aware on water conservation and Project sites - Contractor RDA, waste minimization in the construction process. and worker camps (b) Arrange adequate supply of water for the project purpose throughout the Engineering construction period. Not obtain water for project purposes, including for cost labor camps, from public or community water supply schemes without a prior approval from the relevant authority. Not extract water from ground water or surface water bodies without the permission from engineer & relevant authority. Obtain the permission for

287

extracting water prior to the commencing of the project, from the relevant authority. (c) Contractor shall protect sources of water (potable or otherwise) such as Wells and other water sources used by the community so that continued use these water public water sources will not be disrupted by the work. In case the closer of such sources sources is required on temporary basis contractor shall provide alternative locations within arrangement for supply. Alternative sources such as wells thus provided the project sites should be within acceptable distance to the original sources and accessible to the affected community. (d) Contractor shall not divert, close or block existing canals and streams in a Waterways manner that adversely affect downstream intakes. If diversion or closure located in the or blocking of canals and streams is required for the execution of work, surrounding contractor must obtain the Project Managers approval in writing. areas of road Contractor shall also obtain the approval from the National Water Supply sections or the and Drainage Board (NWS&DB) or local authority or Divisional contractor’s Secretary depending on the operating agency of the intake/water supply. work sites. Contractor shall restore the drainage path back to its original status once the need for such diversion or closure or blockage ceased to exist. During the affected period contractor shall supply water to the affected community.

(e) In case the contractors activities going to adversely affect the quantity or Project sites quality of water, the contractor shall serve notice to the relevant authorities and downstream users of water sufficiently in advance.

(f) Apply best management practices to control contamination of run-off construction - water during maintenance & operation of equipment. sites, material Maintain adequate distance between stockpiles & water bodies to control and soil storage effects to natural drainage paths. areas, and equipment and

machinery service areas 2.3.2 Siltation into water bodies

288

(a) Contractor shall take measures to prevent siltation of water bodies as a All water Engineering Contractor RDA, result of construction work including, construction of temporary / bodies located cost permanent devices to prevent water pollution due to siltation and increase around the of turbidity. These shall include the measures against erosion as per EMP project areas 2.1.6. (b) Construction materials containing small / fine particles shall be stored in places not subjected to flooding and in such a manner that these materials will not be washed away by runoff. (c) Temporary soil dumps should be placed at least 200m away from all water bodies (d) If temporary soil piles are left at the site for a long time those piles should be covered with thick polythene sheets (e) All fills, back fills and slopes should be compacted immediately to reach the specified degree of compaction and establishment of proper mulch 2.3.3 Alteration of drainage paths (a) Contractor shall not close or block existing canals and streams All drainage Engineering Contractor RDA permanently. If diversion or closure or blocking of canals and streams is paths impacted cost required for the execution of work (e.g. for construction of bypass), by the project contractor must first obtain the Project Managers approval in writing. activities Contractor shall carry out an investigation and report to the Project Manager, if an investigation is requested by the Project Manager.

Contractor shall also obtain the approval from the relevant agencies such as ID/ /Divisional Secretary prior to such action is taken. Contractors shall restore the drainage path back to its original status once the need for such diversion or closure or blockage is no longer required. (b) The debris and spoil shall be disposed in such a manner that waterways and drainage paths are not blocked. (c) Avoid/ minimize construction works near/ at such drainage locations during heavy rain seasons such as monsoon rain periods. 2.3.4. Contamination of water from construction wastes (a) The work shall be carried out in such a manner that pollution of natural At all water Engineering Contractor RDA, water courses rivers, lagoons, sea and other minor stream paths located courses located 289

within construction areas or downstream. Measures as given in 2.1.6., adjacent cost 2.1.7, 2.1.8, 2.3.2 and 2.3.6 clauses shall be taken to prevent the construction wastewater produced in construction from entering directly into streams, sites and water bodies or the irrigation systems. downstream

(b) Avoid / minimize construction works near / at such drainage locations At all water - during heavy rainy seasons courses located adjacent construction sites (c) The discharge standards promulgated under the National Environmental At all water Engineering Act shall be strictly adhered to. All waste arising from the project is to be courses located cost disposed in a manner that is acceptable to the Project Manager and as per adjacent the guidelines/instructions issued by the CEA. construction sites and downstream. 2.3.5. Contamination from fuel and lubricants (a) All vehicle and plant maintenance and servicing stations shall be located Vehicle and Engineering Contractor RDA, and operated as per the conditions and /or guidelines stipulated under the plant cost EPL issued by CEA. In general these should be located at least 200m maintenance away from water bodies and wastewater shall not be disposed without and servicing meeting the disposal standards of the CEA. Wastewater from vehicle and centers plant maintenance and servicing stations shall be cleared of oil and grease and other contaminants to meet the relevant standards before discharging to the environment. (b) Vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and re-filling shall be Yards, done as required in EMP clause 2.1.6. to prevent water pollution as well servicing centers 2.3.6. Locating, sanitation and waste disposal in construction camps (a) Locations selected for labor camps should be approved by engineer and At all labor Engineering Contractor RDA, comply with guidelines/ recommendations issued by the CEA/Local camps cost Authority. Construction of laborer camps shall not be located within 200m from waterways or near to a site or premises of religious, cultural

290

or archeological importance and school. (b) Labor camps shall be provided with adequate and appropriate facilities for disposal of sewerage and solid waste. The sewage systems shall be properly designed, built and operated so that no pollution to ground or adjacent water bodies/watercourses takes place. Garbage bins shall be provided the camps and regularly emptied. Garbage should be disposed off in a hygienic manner, to the satisfaction of the relevant norms. Compliance with the relevant regulations and guidelines issued by the CEA/LA shall be strictly adhered to. (c) Contractor shall ensure that all camps are kept clean and hygienic. Necessary measures shall be taken to prevent breeding of vectors (d) Contractor shall report any outbreak of infectious disease of importance - in a labor camp to the Project Manager and the Medical Officer of Health (MOH) or to the Public Health Inspector (PHI) of the area immediately. Contractor shall carry out all instructions issued by the authorities, if any. (e) Contractor shall adhere to the CEA recommendations on disposal of - wastewater. Wastewater shall not be discharged to ground or waterways in a manner that will cause unacceptable surface or ground water pollution.

(f) All relevant provisions of the Factories Act and any other - relevant regulations aimed at safety and health of workers shall be adhered to.

(g) Contractor should remove all labor camps fully after its need is over, Engineering empty septic tanks, remove all garbage, debris and clean and restore the cost area back to its former condition. A consent letter from the land owner should be obtained that certifies the decommissioning has taken place to the level acceptable to the land owner 2.3.7. Wastage of water and waste minimization (a) The contractor will minimize wastage of water in the construction Within project - Contractor RDA, process/operations by reusing water as much as possible, utilizing only sites and labor

291

the required amount of water for the construction works etc… camps (b) The contractor shall educate and made employees aware on water conservation, waste minimization and safe disposal of waste following guidelines given by CEA and LA. 2.3.8. Extraction of water (a) The contractor is responsible for arranging adequate supply of water for Within project Engineering Contractor RDA, the project purpose throughout the construction period. Contractor shall sites and labor cost not obtain water for his purposes including for labour camps from public camps or community water supplies without approval from the relevant authority.

Such extraction (if approved) should be under direct supervision of the

Project Manager (b) Extraction of water by the contractor for the project purposes shall - comply with the guidelines and instructions issued by relevant authority. The Contractor shall not extract water from groundwater or from surface water-bodies without permission from the Project Manager. (c) Construction over and close to rivers, minor streams and lagoon shall be All drainage undertaken in dry season. and irrigation activities (d) The Contractor may use the natural sources of water subject to the At all natural provision that any claim arising out of conflicts with other users of the water sources said natural sources of water shall be made good entirely by the used for contractor construction works 2.4. Flood Prevention 2.4.1. Blockage of drainage paths and drains (a) Contractor’s activities shall not lead to flooding conditions as a result of All construction Engineering Contractor RDA, blocked drainage paths and drains. The contractor shall take all measures work sites cost necessary or as directed by the Project Manager to keep all drainage paths and drains clear of blockage at all times. (b) If flooding or stagnation of water is caused by contractor’s activities,

292

contractors shall provide suitable means to (a) prevent loss of access to any land or property and (b) prevent damage to land and property. Contractor shall compensate for any loss of income or damage as a result. 2.4.2 Work in Flood Prone Areas (a) Contractor’s activities shall not lead to aggravate floods in flood prone All construction - Contractor RDA, areas when working in flood prone areas. work sites and their impacts When working in flood prone areas during rainy season the contractor (b) areas shall avoid storing materials, chemicals and other items of work in areas where those can be washed away by the floods. 2.5 Air Pollution 2.5.1. Generation of Dust (a) The contractor shall effectively manage the dust generating activities such Within the Engineering Contractor RDA, as topsoil removal, handling and transporting sand, rubble, bitumen, and construction cost cement during periods of high winds or during more stable conditions area where with winds directed towards adjacent residences and other facilities. earth work will take place, (b) All stockpiles shall be located sufficiently away from sensitive receptors. storage (c) All vehicles delivering materials shall be covered to avoid spillage and locations of dust emission. sand, rubble, bitumen, (d) The Contractor should avoid, where possible and take suitable action to cement and all prevent dirt and mud being carried to the roadway (particularly following sub roads used wet weather). for material (e) The contractor should enforce vehicle speed limits to minimize dust transportation, generation. paying special attention to (f) The Contractor shall employ a water truck to sprinkle water for dust sensitive suppression on all exposed areas as required (note: the use of waste water locations. / waste oil for dust suppression is prohibited) (g) All cleared areas shall be rehabilitated progressively. (h) All earthwork shall be protected in a manner acceptable to the minimize generation of dust.

293

(i) All existing roads used by vehicles of the contractor, or any of his subcontractor or supplies of materials or plant and similar roads which are part of the works shall be kept clean and clear of all dust/mud or other extraneous materials dropped by such vehicles or their tyres. (j) Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and removal of debris, or, if so directed by the Project Manager, by mechanical sweeping and clearing equipment. Additionally, if so directed by the Project Manager, the road surface will be hosed or sprinkled water using appropriate equipment. (k) Plants, machinery and equipment shall be handled (including dismantling) so as to minimize generation of dust. (l) The contractor shall take every precaution to reduce the level of dust emission from the hot mix plants and the batching plants up to the satisfaction of the Project Manager in accordance with the relevant emission norms. 2.5.2 Emission from Hot-Mix Plants and Batching Plants (a) The hot mix plants and batching plants shall be sited in accordance with Locations at - Contractor RDA CEA guidelines. It is recommended that hot mix plants and batching which hot mix plants to be located sufficiently away from sensitive receptors such as plant/s and vulnerable habitats, religious and cultural sites, residential areas, schools concrete and industrial areas batching plant/s to be located (b) The exhaust gases shall comply with the requirements of the relevant current emission control legislation. All operations at plants shall be undertaken in accordance with all current rules and regulations protecting the environment as well as the conditions given in the EPL. (c) The hot mix plant be sited in accordance with CEA guidelines and operated with an EPL. The hot mix plants shall be fitted with the requirements of the relevant current emission control legislation. Road side mixing should be avoided 2.5.3. Odor and offensive smells (a) Contractor shall take all precautions such as storing all chemicals used for Within Engineering Contractor RDA, construction works in properly closed containers with good ventilations to construction 294

prevent odor and offensive smell emanating from chemicals and and work sites cost processes applied in construction works or from labor camps. In a including all situation when/where odor or offensive smell does occur contractor shall sites used for take immediate action to rectify the situation. Contractor is responsible store all for any compensation involved with any health issue arisen out of bad chemicals and odor and offensive smells. places where chemical reactions take place. (b) The waste disposal and sewerage treatment system for the labor camps At all labor shall be properly designed, built and operated so that no odor is camps generated. Compliance with the regulations on health and safety as well as CEA and LA guidelines shall be strictly adhered to.

2.5.4. Emission from construction Vehicles, Equipment and Machinery (a) The emission standards promulgated under the National Environment Act All plants, - Contractor RDA shall be strictly adhered to. machinery and vehicles used (b) All vehicles, equipment and machinery used for construction shall be Engineering for construction regularly serviced and well maintained to ensure that emission levels cost comply with the relevant standards. (c) Contractor should obtain the certificate issued by the Vehicular Emission Test (VET) for all construction vehicles, plants and other machineries and it should be renewed annually

2.5.5. Air Pollution from Crusher (a) Crusher plants should operate under an EPL and shall confirm to relevant Location of - Contractor RDA, dust emission levels as stated in the EPL. Only the quarries approved by crusher plants GSMB and holding current EPL shall be used for material extraction. (b) Crushing plants shall be sited sufficiently away from sensitive receptors such as houses, place of worships and outdoor recreation areas (locations given under item 2.4.1) or as required by the Project Manager.

295

(c) Sprinkling of water (through a sprinkler system) for dust suppression. Engineering cost 2.6 Noise Pollution and Vibration 2.6.1 Noise from Vehicles, Plants and Equipment. (a) All machinery and equipment should be well maintained and fitted with All machinery Engineering Contractor RDA, noise reduction devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. and vehicles cost used for construction works (b) In construction sites within 150 m of the nearest habitation, noisy Within the construction work such as crushing, concrete mixing and batching, construction - mechanical compaction, etc., will be stopped between 20.00 hours sites and their vicinity to 06.00 hours. No construction shall take place within 100m around hospitals between 20.00 hours to 06.00 hours. Near noise sensitive sites, such as schools noisy equipment shall not be used during noise sensitive times of the day. (c) All vehicles and equipment used in construction shall be fitted with Engineering exhaust silences. During routine servicing operations, the effectiveness cost of exhaust silencers shall be checked and if found to be defective shall be replaced. Notwithstanding any other conditions of contract, noise level from any item of plant(s) must comply with the relevant legislation for levels of sound emission. Non-compliant plant shall be removed from site.

(d) Noise limits for construction equipment used in this project (measured at All equipment, - one meter from the edge of the equipment in free field) such as machinery and compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete mixers, cranes (moveable), vehicles used vibrators, and saws shall not exceed 75 dB(A). for construction works (e) Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and Engineering proper, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, to keep noise from cost these at a minimum.

296

(f) Workers in vicinity of strong noise, and workers working with or in Within the crushing, compaction, batching or concrete mixing operations shall be construction provided with protective gear. sites and their vicinity 2.6.2 Vibration (a) Contractor shall take appropriate action to ensure that construction works Within the - Contractor RDA, do not result in damage to adjacent properties due to vibration. construction sites and their (b) Prior to commencement of excavation, blasting activity, the Contractor vicinity shall undertake a condition survey of existing structures within the zone of influence, as agreed with the relevant government agencies and the Project Manager. (c) Contractor shall carry out monitoring at the nearest vibration sensitive receptor during blasting or when other equipment causing vibration are used. (d) The contractor shall modify the method of construction until compliance with the criteria, if vibration levels exceed the relevant vibration criteria. (e) Contractor shall pay due consideration on vibration impacts of blasting on adjoining structures. Explosive loads shall be determined so that excessive vibration can be avoided and blasts shall be controlled blasting in nature. Notwithstanding to these provisions contractor is liable for any damage caused by blasting work. 2.6.3 Noise from Blasting or Pre splitting Operations (a) Blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours (preferably during mid- At quarry sites - Contractor RDA day), as permitted by the Project Manager. The timing should be made and landslide known to all the people within 500 m (200 m for pre-splitting) from the mitigation sites blasting site in all directions. People, except those who actually light the fuse shall be excluded from the area of 200 m (50 m for pre-splitting) from the blasting site in all directions at least 10m minutes before the blasting. Use chemical blasting where rocks have to be removed for landslide mitigation measures 2.7 Impacts to Flora 297

2.7.1 Loss or Damage to Trees and Vegetation (a) All works shall be carried out in a manner that the destruction to All project sites - Contractor RDA, the flora and their habitats is minimized. Trees and vegetation shall FD, be felled / removed only if that impinges directly on the permanent works or necessary temporary works. In all such cases contractor shall take prior approval from the Project Manager.

(b) Contractor shall make every effort to avoid removal and/or destruction of trees of religious, cultural and aesthetic significance. If such action is unavoidable the Project Manager shall be informed in advance and carry out public consultation and report on the same should be submitted to the Project Manager. (c) Contractor shall adhere to the guidelines and recommendations made by the Central Environmental Authority, if any with regard to felling of trees and removal of vegetation. (d) Removed trees must be handed over to the Timber Corporation. (e) The contractor shall plant over 5 year old root-balled native trees suitable Indicative Engineering for the location as identified by the Project Manager. number of trees cost The planting should take place in public land suitable for the purpose / plants and indicative The contractor shall build hardy structures around the trees for protection. number of The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the well-being of the planting trees/plants until the end of the contract structures necessary are to be identified by the contractor. Planting should take place as soon as the plant removal takes place 2.7.2 Chance finds of important Flora 298

(a) During construction, if a rare/threatened/endangered flora species is All project sites - Contractor RDA, found, it shall be immediately informed to the PMU by the contractor through the Project Manager. All activities that could destroy such flora and/or its habitat shall be stopped with immediate effect. Such activities shall be started only after obtaining the Project Manager’s approval. Contractor shall carry out all activities and plans that the Project Manager instructed him to undertake to conserve such flora and/or its habitat. 2.8. Impact on Fauna 2.8.1. Loss, Damage or Disruption to Fauna (a) All works shall be carried out in such a manner that the destruction or All project sites - Contractor RDA, disruption to the fauna and their habitats is minimum. FD, DWLC (b) Construction workers shall be instructed to protect fauna including wild animals and aquatic life as well as their habitats. Hunting, poaching and unauthorized fishing by project workers is not allowed. (d) Siting of all hot mix plants, crushing plants, workshops, depots and Locations Engineering temporary worker camps and storing of toxic and hazardous materials at selected for cost approved locations, and recycling and dumping of solid waste matter at erecting the locations approved by local authorities, maintenance of vehicles and asphalt, crusher equipment in good operable condition, ensuring no leakage of oil or fuel and concrete and the fitting of proper exhaust baffles. Any solid waste should not be batching plants dumped into natural habitats. and workshops

2.8.2 Chance found important Fauna (a) During construction, if a rare/threatened/endangered fauna species is All project sites - Contractor RDA, FD, found, it shall be immediately informed to the PMU by the contractor. All DWLC activities that could destroy such fauna and/or its habitat shall be stopped with immediate effect. Such activities shall be started only after obtaining the Project Manager’s approval. Contractor shall carry out all activities and plans that the Project Manager instructed him to undertake to conserve such fauna and/or its habitat.

299

2.9 Disruption to people 2.9.1 Loss of Access (a) At all times, the Contractor shall provide safe and convenient passage for All project sites Engineerin Contractor RDA, vehicles, pedestrians and livestock. Work that affects the use of existing g cost accesses shall not be undertaken without providing adequate provisions to the prior satisfaction of the Project Manager. (b) The works shall not interfere unnecessarily or improperly and ensure - convenience of public at all times (c) On completion of the works, all temporary obstructions to access shall be Engineerin cleared away, all rubbish and piles of debris that obstruct access be g cost cleared to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. (d) Providing advance information to the public about the planned construction works and activities causing disruption to access and the temporary arrangements made to give relief to public in order to avoid any inconveniences due to the construction activities. 2.9.3 Traffic Control and Safety (a) The Contractor shall take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic Road-side Engineering Contractor RDA, during construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades, construction cost including signs, markings, flags, lights and flagmen as may be required sites by the Project Manager for the information and protection of traffic approaching or passing through the section of the highway under improvement. The provision of traffic safety measures shall be considered incidental to work and follow The Institute for Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) guidelines and instructions given by the Police, if any. (b) Informing the public through newspapers/ announcements/ radio/ TV etc. Project about the construction activities in order to avoid any inconveniences due influence area to the construction activities. 2.10 Accidents and Risks 2.10.1 Public and Worker safety

300

(a) All reasonable precautions will be taken to prevent danger of the workers Construction Engineering Contractor RDA, and the public from accidents such as fire, explosions, blasts, falling areas, material cost rocks, falling to excavated pits, chemical sprays, unsafe power supply storage and lines etc. worker camps (b) The Contractor shall comply with requirements for the safety of the workmen as per the international labor organization (ILO) convention No. 62 and Safety and Health regulations of the Factory Ordinance of Sri Lanka to the extent that those are applicable to this contract. The contractor shall supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety goggles, helmets, masks, boots, etc., to the workers and staff. The contractor has to comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working platforms, gangway, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress. 2.10.2 Prevention of Risks of Electrocution (a) Construction Engineering Contractor RDA, All electrical wiring and supply related work should confirm to British areas, material cost Standards (BS) or relevant Sri Lankan Standards. Adequate precautions storage and will be taken to prevent danger of electrocuting from electrical equipment worker camps and power supply lines including distribution boards, transformers, etc. Measures such as danger signboards, danger/red lights, fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public and workers. All electric power driven machines to be used in the construction shall be free from defect, be properly maintained and kept in good working order, be regularly inspected and as per BS provisions and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

2.10.3 Risk at Hazardous Activity (a) All workers employed in hazardous activities shall be provided with Construction Engineering Contractor RDA, necessary protective gear. These activities include mixing asphalt areas, material cost material, cement, lime mortars, concrete etc., welding work, work at storage and crushing plants, blasting work, operators of machinery and equipment worker camps such as power saws, etc.

301

(b) The use of any toxic chemical shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The Project Manager shall be notified of toxic chemicals that are planned to be used in all contract related activities. A register of all toxic chemicals delivered to the site shall be kept and maintained up to date by the Contractor. The register shall include the trade name, physical properties and characteristics, chemical ingredients, health and safety hazard information, safe handling and storage procedures, and emergency and first aid procedures for the product. 2.10.4 Lead Pollution (a) No paint containing lead or lead products will be used except in the form Workshops, - Contractor RDA, of paste or readymade paint. Facemasks shall be supplied to workers who yards where are working in spray painting or scraping lead paints. spray painting is done 2.10.5 Handling of Explosives (a) Except as provided in the contract or ordered or authorized by the Project All locations - Contractor RDA, Manager, the Contractor shall not use explosives. Where the use of where blasting explosives is so provided or ordered or authorized, the Contractor shall activities will comply with the requirements of the following Sub-Clauses of this Clause commence besides the law of the land as applicable. (b) The Contractor shall at all times take every possible precaution and shall Engineering RDA, comply with relevant laws and regulations relating to the importation, cost MoDUD handling, transportation, storage and use of explosives. Contractor shall obtain Ministry of Defense & Urban Development (MoDUD) approval for importing and handling explosives and keep the Local Police informed of the same.

2.11 Health and Safety 2.11.1 Prevention of Vector based Diseases (a) Contractor shall take necessary actions to prevent breeding of mosquitoes At worker Engineering Contractor RDA, at places of work, labor camps, plus office and store buildings. Stagnation camps, stores,

302

of water in all areas including gutters, used and empty cans, containers, yards cost tyres, etc shall be prevented. Approved chemicals to destroy mosquitoes and larvae should be regularly applied. All burrow sites should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the contractor in accordance with the requirements/guidelines issued by the Central Environmental authority and relevant local authorities (b) Contractor shall keep all places of work, labor camps, plus office and store buildings clean devoid of garbage to prevent breeding of rats and other vectors such as flies. 2.11.2 Workers Health and Safety (a) Contractor shall comply with the provisions in Health and Safety Within - Contractor RDA, regulations under the Factory Ordinance with regard to provision of construction health and safety measures and amenities at work place(s). sites, workshops and worker camps 2.11.3 First Aid (a) At every workplace, first aid kit shall be provided as per the regulations. Within Engineering Contractor RDA, At every workplace an ambulance room containing the prescribed construction cost equipment and nursing staff shall be provided. sites, quarry, crusher, concrete batching plants, workshops and worker camps 2.11.4 Potable Water (a) In every workplace and labor camps portable water shall be available Within Engineering Contractor RDA, throughout the day in sufficient quantities. construction cost sites, quarry, crusher, concrete batching plants, workshops and worker camps

303

2.11.5 Hygiene (a) The contractor shall provide and maintain necessary (temporary) Worker camps Engineering Contractor RDA, living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour to standards and temporary cost and scale approved by the Project Manager. sheds at work sites (b) At every workplace and labor camps sufficient number of bathing facilities, latrines and urinals shall be provided in accordance with the Health and Safety regulations and/or as directed by the Project Manager. These bathroom and toilet facilities shall be suitably located within the workplace/buildings. Latrines shall be cleaned at least three times daily in the morning, midday and evening and kept in a strict sanitary condition. If women are employed, separate latrines and urinals, screened from those for men and marked in the vernacular shall be provided. There shall be adequate supply of water, within and close to latrines and urinals. (c) The sewage system for the camp must be properly designed, built and operated so that no health hazard occurs and no pollution to the air, ground or adjacent watercourses takes place. (d) Garbage bins must be provided in the camp, work sites and regularly emptied and the garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner. Construction camps shall have a clean hygienic environment and adequate health care shall be provided for the work force. (e) Unless otherwise arranged for by the Local Authority, the contractor shall arrange proper disposal of sludge from septic tanks. The contractor shall obtain approval for such disposal from the Public Health Inspector of the area. 2.12 Protection of Archaeological, Cultural and Religious Places and Properties 2.12.1 Prevention of damage to Cultural and Religious Places and Properties (a) During construction activities the contractor should take all necessary and Near physical - Contractor RDA, adequate care to minimize impacts on cultural properties which includes cultural cultural sites and remains, places of worship. resources Workers should not be allowed to trespass in to such areas.

304

2.12.2 Chance finds of Archaeological property (a) All fossils, coins, articles of value of antiquity and structures and other In all project - Contractor RDA, remains or things of geological or archaeological interest etc. discovered sites Department of on the site and/or during construction work shall be the property of the Archeology Government of Sri Lanka, and shall be dealt with as per provisions of Antiquities Ordinance of 1940 (Revised in 1956 & 1998)

(b) The contractor shall take reasonable precaution to prevent his Engineeri workmen or any other persons from removing and damaging ng cost any such article or thing and shall, immediately upon discovery thereof and before removal acquaint the Project Manager of such discovery and carry out the Project Manager’s instructions for dealing with the same, awaiting which all work shall be stopped within 100m in all directions from the site of discovery.

(c) If directed by the Project Managers the Contractor shall obtain advice and assistance from the Department of Archaeological of Sri Lanka on conservation measures to be taken with regard to the artefacts prior to recommencement of work in the area.

2.13 Environmental Enhancement 2.13.1 Landscaping (a) Landscape plantation, re-vegetation of road embankments and other All project sites Engineering Contractor RDA, slopes, edge treatment of water bodies shall be taken up as per either and associated cost detailed design or typical design guidelines given as part of the Bid sites Documents. The contactor also shall remove all debris, piles of unwanted earth, spoil material, away from the roadsides and from other work places and disposed at locations designated or acceptable to the Project Manager or as per Clause 2.1.1.

305

(b) On completion of the works, the temporary structures shall be cleared away in full, all rubbish burnt, waste dumps and septic tank shall be filled and closed and roadsides, workplaces and labor camps, cleared and cleaned. 2.13.2 Utilities and Roadside Amenities (a) Contractor shall take care not to damage/destroy or affect the functional At all locations - Contractor RDA, purposes of utilities such as water, electricity, telephone posts. The where arrangements the contractor made with those service providers shall be electricity, informed to the Project Manager in writing (advance work). Contractor telecommunicat shall assist the service providers in whatever possible manner to minimize ion disruption to such services. and water supply lines need to be shifted (b) In case of an inadvertent damage cause to a utility, the contractor shall All project sites immediately inform the service provider and help to restore the service without delay. 2.13.3 Safety signage

(a) Safety signage for slope/landslide protection structures will be provided Sites where Engineering Contractor RDA, as appropriate slope/landslide cost protection takes place 2.14 Handling Environmental Issues during Construction (a) For large contracts, the Contractor will appoint a suitably qualified Relevant Engineering Contractor RDA, Environmental Officer following the award of the contract. The construction cost Environmental Officer will be the primary point of contact for assistance sites during the with all environmental issues during the pre-construction and construction construction phases. He/ She shall be responsible for ensuring the period implementation of EMP. (b) The Contractor shall appoint a person responsible for community liaison and to handle public complaints regarding environmental/ social related

306

matters. All public complaints will be entered into the Complaints Register. The Environmental Officer will promptly investigate and review environmental complaints and implement the appropriate corrective actions to arrest or mitigate the cause of the complaints. A register of all complaints is to be passed to the Project Manager within 24 hrs they are received, with the action taken by the Environmental Officer on complains thereof. (c) Contractor shall develop suitable method to receive complaints. The complaint register shall be placed at a convenient place, easily accessible by the public. (d) Contractor shall prepare detailed Environmental Method Statement (EMS) clearly stating the approach, actions and manner in which the EMP is implemented. It is required from the contractor to prepare the EMS for each work site, if work will be carried out at more than one site at once and time plan for implementation. The EMS shall be updated regularly and submit for Engineers review. 3.0 Operational stage 3.1 Stagnation of water at culverts, drainage and irrigation structures during heavy rains due to siltation and blocking of openings with debris. (a) Regular clearing/ cleaning and maintenance of all culverts, drainage and At all hydraulic Maintenanc RDA, irrigation structures to reduce the chances of failures and blocking due to structures e cost debris. supported by the project 3.2 Encochement of ROW (a) Continuous monitoring and strict regulations should be followed to avoid In all project Maintenanc RDA, the encroachment. sites e cost

307

Monitoring Plan Parameters Verifiable Indicators Verification Location Schedule Responsible /Indicator Methods Implementation and Monitoring Agency Awareness and Training programs for skill Training records, At construction Beginning of RDA, orientation development, occupational feedback from area construction and training safety and environmental participants during construction protection Compliance to Health and safety regulations, Spot checks at work At key Throughout RDA, occupational first aid and medical sites, photos, accident construction construction period health and safety arrangements, number and type records, interviews sites matters of safety equipment such as mask, helmet, glove, safety belt, accidental insurance Vegetation Actual number of trees felled Record, counting, At construction Before construction RDA clearance during construction works observation, sites work, construction inspection and period interview with local people Measures to Dust level and noise level at Visual observation At construction Every three months RDA, protect work sites, major settlements and discussion with sites during construction environment from and sensitive spots like health residents and workers air & noise centers and schools pollution

308

Parameters Verifiable Indicators Verification Location Schedule Responsible /Indicator Methods Implementation and Monitoring Agency Measures to Visual observation, observation Site inspections and Rivers and Every three months RDA, protect water of open defecation and waste laboratory sections if water sources during construction bodies from disposal around water sources necessary. used pollution near construction sites, camp particularly sites, and laboratory test results drinking water Adequate Adequate number of technicians Number and type of At construction During construction RDA, technical and regularly at site with ability to technicians available sites environmental implement the EMP at site, discussion supervision Compensatory Number of trees planted Records, field Planted area During project RDA, plantation observation implementation

309

PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

310

Section VII - General Conditions of Contract

These General Conditions of Contract (GCC), read in conjunction with the Particular Conditions of Contract(PCC) and other documents listed therein, should be a complete document expressing fairly the rights and obligations of both parties.

These General Conditions of Contract have been developed on the basis of considerable international experience in the drafting and management of contracts, bearing in mind a trend in the construction industry towards simpler, more straightforward language.

The Condition of Contract comprises General Condition of Contract of “World Bank Standard Bidding Document for Procurement of Small Works, published in April 2008 and revised in November 2010.

311

Table of Contents

Clause Page A General ...... 314

1. Definitions...... 316 2. Interpretation ...... 317 3. Language and Law ...... 317 4. Project Manager’s Decision ...... 317 5. Delegation ...... 317 6. Communication ...... 317 7. Subcontracting ...... 317 8. Other Contractors ...... 317 9. Personnel and Equipment ...... 318 10. Employer’s and Contractor’s Risk ...... 318 11. Employer’s Risk...... 318 12. Contractor’s Risk ...... 319 13. Insurance ...... 319 14. Site Data ...... 319 15. Contractor to Construct the Works ...... 319 16. The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date ...... 319 17. Approval by the Project Manager ...... 320 18. Safety ...... 320 19. Discoveries ...... 320 20. Possession of the Site ...... 320 21. Access to the Site ...... 320 22. Instructions, Inspections and Audits ...... 321 23. Appointment of the Adjudicator ...... 321 24. Procedure for Disputes ...... 321

B Time Control ...... 322

25. Programme ...... 322 26. Extension of the Intended Completion Date ...... 322 27. Acceleration ...... 323 28. Delays Ordered by the Project Manager ...... 323 29. Management Meetings ...... 323 30. Early Warning ...... 323

312

C Quality Control ...... 324

31. Identifying Defects...... 324 32. Tests ...... 324 33. Correction of Defects ...... 324 34. Uncorrected Defects...... 324

D Cost Control ...... 324

35. Contract Price...... 324 36. Changes in the Contract Price ...... 325 37. Variations ...... 325 38. Cash Flow Forecasts ...... 326 39. Payment Certificates ...... 326 40. Payments ...... 326 41. Compensation Events...... 327 42. Tax ...... 328 43. Currencies ...... 328 44. Price Adjustment ...... 329 45. Retention ...... 329 46. Liquidated Damages ...... 329 47. Bonus ...... 330 48. Advance Payment ...... 330 49. Securities ...... 330 50. Day works ...... 331 51. Cost of Repairs ...... 331

E Finishing the Contract ...... 331

52. Completion ...... 331 53. Taking Over ...... 331 54. Final Account ...... 331 55. Operation and Maintenance Manuals ...... 331 56. Termination ...... 332 57. Fraud and Corruption ...... 332 58. Payment upon Termination ...... 334 59. Property ...... 334 60. Release from Performance ...... 334 61. Suspension of Bank Loan or Credit ...... 334

313

Section VII - General Conditions of Contract

A. General

1. Definitions 1.1 Boldface type is used to identify defined terms. (a) The Accepted Contract Amount means the amount accepted in the Letter of Acceptance for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects. (b) The Activity Schedule is a schedule of the activities comprising the construction, installation, testing, and commissioning of the Works in a lump sum contract. It includes a lump sum price for each activity, which is used for valuations and for assessing the effects of Variations and Compensation Events. (c) The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the Employer and the Contractor to resolve disputes in the first instance, as provided for in GCC 23. (d) Bank means the financing institution named in the PCC. (e) Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the Bid. (f) Compensation Events are those defined in GCC Clause 41 hereunder. (g) The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Project Manager, in accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 52.1. (h) The Contract is the Contract between the Employer and the Contractor to execute, complete, and maintain the Works. It consists of the documents listed in GCC Sub- Clause 2.3 below. (i) The Contractor is the party whose Bid to carry out the Works has been accepted by the Employer. (j) The Contractor’s Bid is the completed bidding document submitted by the Contractor to the Employer. (k) The Contract Price is the Accepted Contract Amount stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as adjusted in accordance with the Contract.

314

(l) Days are calendar days; months are calendar months. (m) Day works are varied work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for the Contractor’s employees and Equipment, in addition to payments for associated Materials and Plant. (n) A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the Contract. (o) The Defects Liability Certificate is the certificate issued by Project Manager upon correction of defects by the Contractor. (p) The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the PCC pursuant to Sub-Clause 33.1 and calculated from the Completion Date. (q) Adjudicator means the single person appointed under Clause 23. (r) Drawings means the drawings of the Works, as included in the Contract, and any additional and modified drawings issued by (or on behalf of) the Employer in accordance with the Contract, include calculations and other information provided or approved by the Project Manager for the execution of the Contract. (s) The Employer is the party who employs the Contractor to carry out the Works, as specified in the PCC. (t) Equipment is the Contractor’s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to construct the Works. (u) “In writing” or “written” means hand-written, type- written, printed or electronically made, and resulting in a permanent record; (v) The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employer’s Letter of Acceptance. (w) The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the Contractor shall complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date is specified in the PCC. The Intended Completion Date may be revised only by the Project Manager by issuing an extension of time or an acceleration order. (x) Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works. (y) Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical, electrical, chemical, or biological function. (z) The Project Manager (may be referred to as Engineer 315

also) is the person named in the PCC (or any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the Project Manager) who is responsible for supervising the execution of the Works and administering the Contract. (aa) PCC means Particular Conditions of Contract (bb) The Site is the area defined as such in the PCC. (cc) Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in the bidding documents and are factual and interpretative reports about the surface and subsurface conditions at the Site. (dd) Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the Project Manager. (ee) The Start Date is given in the PCC. It is the latest date when the Contractor shall commence execution of the Works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site Possession Dates. (ff) A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site. (gg) Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the Contractor that are needed for construction or installation of the Works. (hh) A Variation is an instruction given by the Project Manager which varies the Works. (ii) The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and turn over to the Employer, as defined in the PCC. 2. Interpretation 2.1 In interpreting these GCC, words indicating one gender include all genders. Words indicating the singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include the singular. Headings have no significance. Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically defined. The Project Manager shall provide instructions clarifying queries about these GCC. 2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the PCC, references in the GCC to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any Section of the Works (other than references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works). 2.3 The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the

316

following order of priority: (a) Agreement, (b) Letter of Acceptance, (c) Contractor’s Bid, (d) Particular Conditions of Contract, (e) General Conditions of Contract, (f) Specifications, (g) Drawings, (h) Bill of Quantities, and (i) any other document listed in the PCC as forming part of the Contract. 3. Language 3.1 The language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract and Law are stated in the PCC.

4. Project 4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager Manager’s shall decide contractual matters between the Employer and the Decisions Contractor in the role representing the Employer.

5. Delegation 5.1 Otherwise specified in the PCC, the Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to other people, except to the Adjudicator, after notifying the Contractor, and may revoke any delegation after notifying the Contractor.

6. Communica- 6.1 Communications between parties that are referred to in the tions Conditions shall be effective only when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered.

7. Subcontracting 7.1 The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Project Manager, but may not assign the Contract without the approval of the Employer in writing. Subcontracting shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations.

8. Other 8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other Contractors contractors, public authorities, utilities, and the Employer between the dates given in the Schedule of Other Contractors, as referred to in the PCC. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them as described in the Schedule. The Employer may modify the Schedule of Other Contractors, and shall notify the Contractor of any such modification.

317

9. Personnel and 9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel and use the Equipment equipment identified in its Bid, to carry out the Works or other personnel and equipment approved by the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall approve any proposed replacement of key personnel and equipment only if their relevant qualifications or characteristics are substantially equal to or better than those proposed in the Bid. 9.2 If the Project Manager asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor’s staff or work force, stating the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the work in the Contract.

10. Employer’s and 10.1 The Employer carries the risks which this Contract states are Contractor’s Employer’s risks, and the Contractor carries the risks which this Risks Contract states are Contractor’s risks. 11. Employer’s 11.1 From the Start Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has Risks been issued, the following are Employer’s risks: (a) The risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to property (excluding the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment), which are due to (i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works or (ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference with any legal right by the Employer or by any person employed by or contracted to him except the Contractor. (b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to the extent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in the Employer’s design, or due to war or radioactive contamination directly affecting the country where the Works are to be executed. 11.2 From the Completion Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has been issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is an Employer’s risk except loss or damage due to (a) a Defect which existed on the Completion Date, (b) an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself an Employer’s risk, or (c) the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the

318

Completion Date.

12. Contractor’s 12.1 From the Starting Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has Risks been issued, the risks of personal injury, death, and loss of or damage to property (including, without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not Employer’s risks are Contractor’s risks.

13. Insurance 13.1 The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles stated in the PCC for the following events which are due to the Contractor’s risks: (a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials; (b) loss of or damage to Equipment; (c) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) in connection with the Contract; and (d) personal injury or death. 13.2 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Project Manager for the Project Manager’s approval before the Start Date. All such insurance shall provide for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies required to rectify the loss or damage incurred. 13.3 If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the Employer may effect the insurance which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums the Employer has paid from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt due. 13.4 Alterations to the terms of an insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Project Manager. 13.5 Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the insurance policies. 14. Site Data 14.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined any Site Data referred to in the PCC, supplemented by any information available to the Contractor. 15. Contractor to 15.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in Construct the accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. Works

16. The Works to 16.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Be Completed Start Date and shall carry out the Works in accordance with the by the Program submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the 319

Intended approval of the Project Manager, and complete them by the Completion Intended Completion Date. Date 17. Approval by 17.1 The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings the Project showing the proposed Temporary Works to the Project Manager, Manager for his approval. 17.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works. 17.3 The Project Manager’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibility for design of the Temporary Works. 17.4 The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary Works, where required. 17.5 All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works, are subject to prior approval by the Project Manager before this use. 18. Safety 18.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site. 19. Discoveries 19.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on the Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager of such discoveries and carry out the Project Manager’s instructions for dealing with them. 20. Possession of 20.1 The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the the Site Contractor. If possession of a part is not given by the date stated in the PCC, the Employer shall be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities, and this shall be a Compensation Event. 21. Access to the 21.1 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any person Site authorized by the Project Manager access to the Site and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out.

320

22. Instructions, 22.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project Inspections Manager which comply with the applicable laws where the Site and Audits is located. 22.2 The Contractor shall permit the Bank and/or persons appointed by the Bank to inspect the Site and/or the accounts and records of the Contractor and its sub-contractors relating to the performance of the Contract, and to have such accounts and records audited by auditors appointed by the Bank if required by the Bank. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Sub-Clause 57.1 which provides, inter alia, that acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under Sub-Clause 22.2constitute a prohibited practice subject to contract termination (as well as to a determination of ineligibility under the Procurement Guidelines).

23. Appointment 23.1 The Adjudicator shall be appointed jointly by the Employer and of the the Contractor, at the time of the Employer’s issuance of the Adjudicator Letter of Acceptance. If, in the Letter of Acceptance, the Employer does not agree on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Employer will request the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC, to appoint the Adjudicator within 14 days of receipt of such request. 23.2 Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, a new Adjudicator shall be jointly appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and the Contractor, within 30 days, the Adjudicator shall be designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC at the request of either party, within 14 days of receipt of such request. 24. Procedure for 24.1 If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Project Disputes Manager was either outside the authority given to the Project Manager by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be referred to the Adjudicator within 14 days of the notification of the Project Manager’s decision. 24.2 The Adjudicator shall give a decision in writing within 28 days of receipt of a notification of a dispute. 24.3 The Adjudicator shall be paid by the hour at the rate specified in the PCC, together with reimbursable expenses of the types specified in the PCC, and the cost shall be divided equally between the Employer and the Contractor, whatever decision is reached by the Adjudicator. Either party may refer a decision of the Adjudicator to an Arbitrator within 28 days of the Adjudicator’s written decision. If neither party refers the dispute to arbitration within the above 28 days, the Adjudicator’s 321

decision shall be final and binding. 24.4 The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedures published by the institution named and in the place specified in the PCC.

B. Time Control 25. Program 25.1 Within the time stated in the PCC, after the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval a Program showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. In the case of a lump sum contract, the activities in the Program shall be consistent with those in the Activity Schedule. 25.2 An update of the Program shall be a program showing the actual progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining work, including any changes to the sequence of the activities. 25.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval an updated Program at intervals no longer than the period stated in the PCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program within this period, the Project Manager may withhold the amount stated in the PCC from the next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the overdue Program has been submitted. In the case of a lump sum contract, the Contractor shall provide an updated Activity Schedule within 14 days of being instructed to by the Project Manager. 25.4 The Project Manager’s approval of the Program shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations. The Contractor may revise the Program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time. A revised Program shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.

26. Extension of 26.1 The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date the Intended if a Compensation Event occurs or a Variation is issued which Completion makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the Date Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost. 26.2 The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21 days of the Contractor asking the Project Manager for a decision upon the effect of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in 322

assessing the new Intended Completion Date. 27. Acceleration 27.1 When the Employer wants the Contractor to finish before the Intended Completion Date, the Project Manager shall obtain priced proposals for achieving the necessary acceleration from the Contractor. If the Employer accepts these proposals, the Intended Completion Date shall be adjusted accordingly and confirmed by both the Employer and the Contractor. 27.2 If the Contractor’s priced proposals for an acceleration are accepted by the Employer, they are incorporated in the Contract Price and treated as a Variation.

28. Delays 28.1 The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to delay the Ordered by the start or progress of any activity within the Works. Project Manager

29. Management 29.1 Either the Project Manager or the Contractor may require the Meetings other to attend a management meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the plans for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure. 29.2 The Project Manager shall record the business of management meetings and provide copies of the record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to be taken shall be decided by the Project Manager either at the management meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.

30. Early Warning 30.1 The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future events or circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract Price, or delay the execution of the Works. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and Completion Date. The estimate shall be provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible. 30.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Project Manager.

323

C. Quality Control 31. Identifying 31.1 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s work and Defects notify the Contractor of any Defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor’s responsibilities. The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and to uncover and test any work that the Project Manager considers may have a Defect. 32. Tests 32.1 If the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the Specification to check whether any work has a Defect and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples. If there is no Defect, the test shall be a Compensation Event.

33. Correction of 33.1 The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any Defects Defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and is defined in the PCC. The Defects Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected. 33.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect within the length of time specified by the Project Manager’s notice.

34. Uncorrected 34.1 If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time Defects specified in the Project Manager’s notice, the Project Manager shall assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the Contractor shall pay this amount.

D. Cost Control 35. Contract Price 35.1 In the case of an admeasurements contract, the Bill of Quantities shall contain priced items for the Works to be performed by the Contractor. The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor will be paid for the quantity of the work accomplished at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for each item. 35.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall contain the priced activities for the Works to be performed by the Contractor. The Activity Schedule is used to monitor and control the performance of activities on which basis the Contractor will be paid. If payment for Materials on Site shall be made separately, the Contractor shall show delivery of Materials to the Site separately on the Activity Schedule.

324

36. Changes in the 36.1 In the case of an admeasurements contract: Contract Price (a) If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of Quantities for the particular item by more than 25 percent, provided the change exceeds 1 percent of the Initial Contract Price, the Project Manager shall adjust the rate to allow for the change. (b) The Project Manager shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the Initial Contract Price is exceeded by more than 15 percent, except with the prior approval of the Employer. (c) If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities. 36.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall be amended by the Contractor to accommodate changes of Program or method of working made at the Contractor’s own discretion. Prices in the Activity Schedule shall not be altered when the Contractor makes such changes to the Activity Schedule. 37. Variations 37.1 All Variations shall be included in updated Programs, and, in the case of a lump sum contract, also in the Activity Schedule, produced by the Contractor. 37.2 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a quotation for carrying out the Variation when requested to do so by the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven (7) days of the request or within any longer period stated by the Project Manager and before the Variation is ordered. 37.3 If the Contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Project Manager may order the Variation and make a change to the Contract Price, which shall be based on the Project Manager’s own forecast of the effects of the Variation on the Contractor’s costs. 37.4 If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the work, no quotation shall be given and the Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event. 37.5 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could have been avoided by giving early warning. 37.6 In the case of an admeasurement contract, if the work in the Variation corresponds to an item description in the Bill of Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the

325

quantity of work above the limit stated in Sub-Clause 38.1 or the timing of its execution do not cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bill of Quantities shall be used to calculate the value of the Variation. If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the Variation does not correspond with items in the Bill of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the relevant items of work. 38. Cash Flow 38.1 When the Program, or, in the case of a lump sum contract, the Forecasts Activity Schedule, is updated, the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with an updated cash flow forecast. The cash flow forecast shall include different currencies, as defined in the Contract, converted as necessary using the Contract exchange rates.

39. Payment 39.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly Certificates statements of the estimated value of the work executed less the cumulative amount certified previously.

39.2 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s monthly statement and certify the amount to be paid to the Contractor.

39.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Project Manager.

39.4 The value of work executed shall comprise:

(a) In the case of an admeasurement contract, the value of the quantities of work in the Bill of Quantities that have been completed; or (b) In the case of a lump sum contract, the value of work executed shall comprise the value of completed activities in the Activity Schedule. 39.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations and Compensation Events.

39.6 The Project Manager may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information.

40. Payments 40.1 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments and retention. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Project Manager within 28 days of the date of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid interest on the late payment in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the payment should have been made up to the date when

326

the late payment is made at the prevailing rate of interest for commercial borrowing for each of the currencies in which payments are made.

40.2 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award by the Adjudicator or an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence of dispute.

40.3 Unless otherwise stated, all payments and deductions shall be paid or charged in the proportions of currencies comprising the Contract Price.

40.4 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in shall not be paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the Contract.

41. Compensation 41.1 The following shall be Compensation Events: Events (a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the Site Possession Date pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 20.1. (b) The Employer modifies the Schedule of Other Contractors in a way that affects the work of the Contractor under the Contract. (c) The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue Drawings, Specifications, or instructions required for execution of the Works on time. (d) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out additional tests upon work, which is then found to have no Defects.

(e) The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to be let. (f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably have been assumed before issuance of the Letter of Acceptance from the information issued to bidders (including the Site Investigation Reports), from information available publicly and from a visual inspection of the Site. (g) The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition, caused by the Employer, or additional work required for safety or other reasons.

327

(h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer does not work within the dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor.

(i) The advance payment is delayed.

(j) The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employer’s Risks.

(k) The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion.

41.2 If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. 41.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each Compensation Event upon the Contractor’s forecast cost has been provided by the Contractor, it shall be assessed by the Project Manager, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the Contractor’s forecast is deemed unreasonable, the Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price based on the Project Manager’s own forecast. The Project Manager shall assume that the Contractor shall react competently and promptly to the event. 41.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the Employer’s interests are adversely affected by the Contractor’s not having given early warning or not having cooperated with the Project Manager.

42. Tax 42.1 The Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price if taxes, duties, and other levies are changed between the date 28 days before the submission of bids for the Contract and the date of the last Completion certificate. The adjustment shall be the change in the amount of tax payable by the Contractor, provided such changes are not already reflected in the Contract Price or are a result of GCC Clause 44. 43. Currencies 43.1 Where payments are made in currencies other than the currency of the Employer’s country specified in the PCC, the exchange rates used for calculating the amounts to be paid shall be the exchange rates stated in the Contractor’s Bid.

328

44. Price 44.1 Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only Adjustment if provided for in the PCC. If so provided, the amounts certified in each payment certificate, before deducting for Advance Payment, shall be adjusted by applying the respective price adjustment factor to the payment amounts due in each currency. A separate formula of the type indicated below applies to each Contract currency:

Pc = Ac + Bc Imc/Ioc where:

Pc is the adjustment factor for the portion of the Contract Price payable in a specific currency “c.” 7 Ac and Bc are coefficients specified in the PCC, representing the nonadjustable and adjustable portions, respectively, of the Contract Price payable in that specific currency “c;” and Imc is the index prevailing at the end of the month being invoiced and Ioc is the index prevailing 28 days before Bid opening for inputs payable; both in the specific currency “c.” 44.2 If the value of the index is changed after it has been used in a calculation, the calculation shall be corrected and an adjustment made in the next payment certificate. The index value shall be deemed to take account of all changes in cost due to fluctuations in costs.

45. Retention 45.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in the PCC until Completion of the whole of the Works. 45.2 Upon the issue of a Certificate of Completion of the Works by the Project Manager, in accordance with GCC 51.1, half the total amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager has certified that all Defects notified by the Project Manager to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected. The Contractor may substitute retention money with an “on demand” Bank guarantee. 46. Liquidated 46.1 The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at Damages the rate per day stated in the PCC for each day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the amount defined in the PCC. The Employer may deduct

7 The sum of the two coefficients Ac and Bc should be 1 (one) in the formula for each currency. Normally, both coefficients shall be the same in the formulae for all currencies, since coefficient A, for the nonadjustable portion of the payments, is a very approximate figure (usually 0.15) to take account of fixed cost elements or other nonadjustable components. The sum of the adjustments for each currency are added to the Contract Price. [To be transferred to the User Guide] 329

liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages shall not affect the Contractor’s liabilities. 46.2 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been paid, the Project Manager shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rates specified in GCC Sub-Clause 40.1.

47. Bonus 47.1 The Contractor shall be paid a Bonus calculated at the rate per calendar day stated in the PCC for each day (less any days for which the Contractor is paid for acceleration) that the Completion is earlier than the Intended Completion Date. The Project Manager shall certify that the Works are complete, although they may not be due to be complete.

48. Advance 48.1 The Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor of Payment the amounts stated in the PCC by the date stated in the PCC, against provision by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank Guarantee in a form and by a bank acceptable to the Employer in amounts and currencies equal to the advance payment. The Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has been repaid, but the amount of the Guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amounts repaid by the Contractor. Interest shall not be charged on the advance payment. 48.2 The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for Equipment, Plant, Materials, and mobilization expenses required specifically for execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall demonstrate that advance payment has been used in this way by supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the Project Manager. 48.3 The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from payments otherwise due to the Contractor, following the schedule of completed percentages of the Works on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the advance payment or its repayment in assessing valuations of work done, Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or Liquidated Damages.

49. Securities 49.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amount specified in the PCC, by a bank or surety acceptable to the Employer, and denominated in the types and proportions of the currencies in which the Contract Price is payable. The Performance Security shall be valid until a date 28 days from the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion in 330

the case of a Bank Guarantee, and until one year from the date of issue of the Completion Certificate in the case of a Performance Bond. 50. Day works 50.1 If applicable, the Day works rates in the Contractor’s Bid shall be used only when the Project Manager has given written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way. 50.2 All work to be paid for as Day works shall be recorded by the Contractor on forms approved by the Project Manager. Each completed form shall be verified and signed by the Project Manager within two days of the work being done. 50.3 The Contractor shall be paid for Day works subject to obtaining signed Day works forms. 51. Cost of 51.1 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in Repairs the Works between the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be remedied by the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractor’s acts or omissions.

E. Finishing the Contract 52. Completion 52.1 The Contractor shall request the Project Manager to issue a Certificate of Completion of the Works, and the Project Manager shall do so upon deciding that the whole of the Works is completed. 53. Taking Over 53.1 The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the Project Manager’s issuing a certificate of Completion. 54. Final Account 54.1 The Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with a detailed account of the total amount that the Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Project Manager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56 days of receiving the Contractor’s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Project Manager shall issue within 56 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate. 55. Operating and 55.1 If “as built” Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals Maintenance are required, the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated Manuals in the PCC. 55.2 If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates stated in the PCC pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 55.1, or 331

they do not receive the Project Manager’s approval, the Project Manager shall withhold the amount stated in the PCC from payments due to the Contractor. 56. Termination 56.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the other party causes a fundamental breach of the Contract.

56.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: (a) the Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current Program and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Project Manager; (b) the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within 28 days; (c) the Employer or the Contractor is made bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for a reconstruction or amalgamation; (d) a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor within 84 days of the date of the Project Manager’s certificate; (e) the Project Manager gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Project Manager; (f) the Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required; (g) the Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the number of days for which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the PCC; or (h) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer, has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for or in executing the Contract, pursuant to GCC Clause 57.1. 56.3 When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of Contract to the Project Manager for a cause other than those listed under GCC Sub-Clause 56.2 above, the Project Manager shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.

56.4 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for convenience. 56.5 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible.

57. Fraud and 57.1 If the Employer determines that the Contractor has engaged in Corruption corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices, in competing for or in executing the Contract, then the Employer may, after giving 14 days’ notice to the Contractor, terminate the

332

Contractor's employment under the Contract and expel him from the Site, and the provisions of Clause 56 shall apply as if such expulsion had been made under Sub-Clause 56.5 [Termination by Employer]. 57.2 Should any employee of the Contractor be determined to have engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practice during the execution of the Works, then that employee shall be removed in accordance with Clause 9. 57.3 For the purposes of this Sub-Clause: (i) “corrupt practice”8 is the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party; (ii) “fraudulent practice”9 is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation; (iii) “collusive practice”10 is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of another party; (iv) “coercive practice”11 is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence improperly the actions of a party; (v) “obstructive practice “is (aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice; and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the investigation; or (bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the

8 “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions. 9 a “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract execution. 10 “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 11 a “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution. 333

Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under Sub-Clause22.2. 58. Payment upon 58.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Termination Contract by the Contractor, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done and Materials ordered less advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate and less the percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, as indicated in the PCC. Additional Liquidated Damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer. 58.2 If the Contract is terminated for the Employer’s convenience or because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractor’s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor’s costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less advance payments received up to the date of the certificate.

59. Property 59.1 All Materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works, and Works shall be deemed to be the property of the Employer if the Contract is terminated because of the Contractor’s default. 60. Release from 60.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other Performance event entirely outside the control of either the Employer or the Contractor, the Project Manager shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for any work carried out afterwards to which a commitment was made. 61. Suspension of 61.1 In the event that the Bank suspends the Loan or Credit to the Bank Loan or Employer, from which part of the payments to the Contractor are Credit being made: (a) The Employer is obligated to notify the Contractor of such suspension within 7 days of having received the Bank’s suspension notice. (b) If the Contractor has not received sums due it within the 28 days for payment provided for in Sub-Clause 40.1, the Contractor may immediately issue a 14-day termination notice.

334

Section VIII – Particular Conditions of Contract

335

Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract

Table of Contents

Clause Page A General ...... 337

B Time Control ...... 339

C Quality Control ...... 329

D Cost Control ...... 340

E Finishing the Contract ...... 341

336

Section VIII - Particular Conditions of Contract

A. General

The financing institution is: The World Bank [International Development GCC 1.1 (d) Association (IDA)]

The Employer is: Director General, Road Development Authority of GCC 1.1 (s) Sri Lanka.

The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be: GCC 1.1 (w) ……………….………………. (05 months from the Start Date)

Employer’s Representative: Head of Project Implementation Unit (PIU) - Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP), No.122, Main street, Battaramulla.

GCC 1.1 (z) Project Manager, Director General, National Building Research Organization (NBRO), No. 99/1, Jawatta Road, Colombo 05.

The Site is located between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya- GCC 1.1 (bb) Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).

GCC 1.1 (ee) The Start Date shall be: within 14 days of receipt of Letter of Acceptance

The Works consist of “ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and GCC 1.1 (ii) Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).”

GCC 2.2 Sectional Completions are: None The following documents also form part of the Contract: GCC 2.3(i) Environmental Assessment (EA) for “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).” The language of the contract is English GCC 3.1 The law that applies to the Contract is the law of the Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka

337

The Project Manager shall have no authority to amend the Contract.

The Project Manager may exercise the authority attributable to the Project Manager as specified in or necessary to be implied from the Contract.

GCC 5.1 All Cost & Time variations, Quantity Variations, all the changes to the Contract Scope & Contract shall require approval of the Employer. The Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities except the approval/recommendation of variation orders, time & cost claims, payment certificates, design drawings or any other submissions such as proposal for value engineering. Further, he shall not delegate duties which may negatively affect the contract duration or cost of the project. GCC 8.1 Schedule of other contractors: None

GCC 13.1 The minimum insurance amounts and deductibles shall be: Minimum Insurance Maximum Amount Deductibles (a) for the Works, Plant and 110% of the Contract Rs 50,000/- Materials: Price (b) For loss or damage to Equipment Replacement value of Rs 50,000/- the Equipment (c) for loss or damage to property Rs 1.0 million Rs 50,000/- (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) in connection with Contract. (d) for personal injury or death: (i) of the Contractor’s employees Rs 1,000,000 per No deductibles per event employee (ii) of other people per event Rs 1,000,000 per No deductibles person

Site Data: Please refer to “Section VI – Employer’s requirement – General GCC 14.1 Information” GCC 20.1 The Site Possession Date(s) shall be: Same as the Start Date

GCC 23.1 & Insert the following paragraph after GCC 23.1: GCC 23.2 The Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Institute of Engineers of Sri Lanka (IESL) at the request of either the Employer or the Contractor.

The hourly fee together with reimbursable expenses for the proposed Adjudicator shall be discussed and agreed between the Employer and GCC 24.3 Contractor at the time of appointment of the Adjudicator.

338

Arbitration Proceedings shall be conducted in accordance with the following rules of procedure: Rules of the arbitration shall be the Institute for the Development of Commercial Law and Practice (ICLP), No. 61, Carmel Road Colombo 3, Sri Lanka.

Arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in Sri Lanka. Arbitration proceedings shall take place in Colombo at the Sri Lanka National Arbitration Centre or any other venue within Sri Lanka, as per Arbitration Act No 11 of 1995 of Sri Lanka and under the Sri Lankan law.

The dispute shall be settled by Arbitration Panel (AP) comprising of three Arbitrators, in which two of them shall be appointed by the Parties by mutual consent, failing which, by the Institution of Engineers, Sri Lanka.

GCC 24.4 The Chairman to the Arbitration panel shall be appointed by the two members of AP by mutual consent, failing which, by the Institution of Engineers, Sri Lanka

The arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in the English language.

The decision of the majority of arbitrators shall be final and binding upon both parties.

The expenses incurred by each party in connection with the preparation, presentation, etc. of its proceedings as also the fees and expenses paid to the arbitrator appointed by such party or on its behalf shall be borne by each party itself. However, the fees and expenses paid to the Presiding Arbitrators shall be equally borne by both, the Employer and the Contractor.

B. Time Control

GCC 25.1 The Contractor shall submit for approval a Program for the Works within 14 Days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

GCC 25.3 The period between Programme updates is 15 Days. The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated programme is 2% of the subsequent monthly bill of the contractor

C. Quality Control

GCC 33.1 The Defects Liability Period is: 01 year Insert the following paragraph after GCC 37.6: GCC 37.7 The Contractor shall not make any alteration and/or modification of the Permanent Works, unless and until the Project Manager instructs or approves a Variation.

339

D. Cost Control

GCC 43.1 The currency of the Employer’s country is: Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR)

GCC44.1 Replace the two Clauses 44.1 and 44.2 by the following: and 44.2 The Contract is not subject to price adjustment.

The proportion of payments retained is: 10% of certified work done. The GCC 45.1 limit of the retention shall be 5% of the Initial Contract Price.

The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works are 0.05 % of Initial GCC 46.1 Contract Price per Day. The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is 5 % of the Initial Contract Price.

GCC 47.1 Not applicable

The Advance Payments shall be: 20 % of the initial Contract Price excluding Provisional Sums, Contingencies and Day works and shall be paid to the Contractor in the following two installments Installment I: 10% of the Initial Contract Price- Within 14 days after signing of Contract Agreement and submission of Advance Payment Guarantee. Installment II: 10% of the Initial Contract Price-

GCC 48.1 On acceptance of Work program, methodology, method of statement, cash flow estimate, resource analysis and after establishment of contractor’s site in accordance with sub clause 25.

The advanced payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from payments otherwise due to contractor, following the schedule of completed percentage of the Works on a payment basis. The advance payment shall be repaid in full when the total certified value of work reaches 90% of the initial contract price. No account shall be taken of the advance payment or its repayment in assessing valuation of work done, Variations, price adjustment, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or Liquidated Damages.

The Performance Security amount is 05 % of the Initial Contract Price in LKR against an unconditional on demand Guarantee issued by a Bank GCC 49.1 situated in Sri Lanka and registered with the Central Bank of Sri Lanka. A Bank Guarantee shall be as per format provided in Section IX – Contract Forms.

340

The Contractor shall ensure that the Performance Security is valid and enforceable until the Contractor has executed and completed the Works and remedied any defects. If the terms of the Performance Security specify its expiry date, and the Contractor has not become entitled to receive the Performance Certificate by the date 28 days prior to the expiry date, the Contractor shall extend the validity of the Performance Security until the Works have been completed and any defects have been remedied.

E. Finishing the Contract

The date by which operating and maintenance manuals and “as-built” GCC 55.1 drawings are required, is prior to the request to issue a Certificate of Completion of the Works pursuant to GCC 52.1.

The amount to be withheld for failing to produce “as built” drawings and/or GCC 55.2 operating and maintenance manuals by the date required in GCC 55.1 is 2 % of Initial Contract Price.

GCC 56.2 (g) The maximum number of days is: 100.

The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, representing GCC 58.1 the Employer’s additional cost for completing the Works, is 20%

341

The following Particular Conditions shall supplement the General Conditions (GC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GC. 8.2 Utilities Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 8.1

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the management, co-ordination and execution of all activities associated with the survey, recording, relocation, removal and protection of public utilities including:

i) Leasing with utility authorities, the Employer, the Project Manager, landowners and any other party concerned.

ii) The performance of the relocation, removal or protection work. At the discretion of the public utility concerned part or parts of this work may be performed by themselves.

iii) After seeking approval of the Employer for any amounts payable to public utility authorities. Making payment to public utility authorities of such amounts payable for work performed or to be performed by them.

It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contractor has made full allowance in his Tender for all risk and consequences of delay, inconvenience, cost or damage associated with above. 25.5. Progress Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 25.4 as Reports sub clause 25.5 Monthly progress reports shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer in both electronic copy and hard copy. The first report shall cover the period up to the end of the first calendar month following the Commencement Date. Reports must be submitted monthly thereafter, each within 7days after the last day of the period to which it relates. Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all work which is known to be outstanding at the completion date stated in the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works.

Each report shall include,

(a) Charts and detailed descriptions of Progress, Contractor’s Documents, procurement, manufacture, delivery to Site, construction, erection and testing; and including these stages for work by each nominated subcontractor

(b) Photographs showing the status of manufacture and progress on the site, (c) For the manufacture of each main item of plant and

342

materials, the name of the manufacture, manufacture location, percentage progress, and the actual expected dates of, commencement of manufacture, Contractor’s inspectors, tests, and transport and arrival to site.

(d) The details described in records of Contractor’s Personnel and Equipment,

(e) Copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of materials,

(f) List of notices given

(g) Safety statistics and EMAP aspects and public relations, and

(h) Comparison of actual and planned progress, with details of any events or circumstances which may jeopardize the completion in accordance with the Contract, and the measures being adopted to overcome delays.

Such progress reports are required to accompany the contractor's applications for Interim Payment Certificates, implying that payment may be conditional on the receipt of such reports.

The amount to be withheld for late submission of a Progress report is 1% of the subsequent monthly bill of the contractor. 37.7 Provisional Sums Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 37.6 Each Provisional Sum shall only be used, in whole or in part, in accordance with the Project Manager’s instructions, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. The total sum paid to the Contractor shall include only such amounts, for the work, supplies or services to which the Provisional Sum relates, as the Project Manager shall have instructed. For each Provisional Sum, the Project Manager may instruct: (a) work to be executed (including Plant, Materials or services to be supplied) by the Contractor and valued under Sub- Clause 37.1-6 [Variation Procedure]; and/or (b) Plant, Materials or services to be purchased by the Contractor, from a nominated Subcontractor (as defined in Clause 7 [Subcontracting]) or otherwise; and for which there shall be included in the Contract Price: (i) the actual amounts paid (or due to be paid) by the Contractor, and

343

(ii) a sum for overhead charges and profit, calculated as a percentage of these actual amounts by applying the relevant percentage rate (if any) stated in the appropriate Schedule. If there is no such rate, the following overhead and profit percentage shall apply: 1. Provisional Sum Items for supply of employer, engineer facilities and Utility diversion = 5%

2. Provisional Sum Items for work to be carried out by contractor/subcontractor =15%

The total overhead and profit of both contractor or subcontractor shall not exceed the above value, if this work is carried out by a subcontractor) The Contractor shall, when required by the Project Manager, produce quotations, invoices, vouchers and accounts or receipts in substantiation. 37.8 Value Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause Engineering 37.7

The Contractor may, at any time, submit to the Engineer a written proposal which (in the Contractor’s opinion) will, if adopted, (i) accelerate completion, (ii) reduce the cost to the Employer of executing, maintaining or operating the Works, (iii) improve the efficiency or value to the Employer of the completed Works, or (iv) otherwise be of benefit to the Employer.

The proposal shall be prepared at the cost of the Contractor and shall include the items listed in Sub-Clause 37.2 [Variation Procedure].

If a proposal, which is approved by the Project Manager, includes a change in the design of part of the Permanent Works, then unless otherwise agreed by both Parties:

(a) the Contractor shall design this part,

(b) Clause 16.1 [The Works to be completed by the intended completi0n date] shall apply, and

(c) if this change results in a reduction in the contract value of this part, the Engineer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clauses 17.1,17.2,17.3,17.4 & 17.5 [Approval by the Project Manager] to agree or determine a fee, which shall be included in the Contract Price. This fee shall be half (50%) of the difference between the following amounts:

344

(i) such reduction in contract value, resulting from the change, and

(ii) the reduction (if any) in the value to the Employer of the varied works, taking account of any reductions in quality, anticipated life or operational efficiencies.

However, if amount (i) is less than amount (ii), there shall not be a fee. 39. Payment Certificates Replace clause 39.5 with the following

The Contractor’s monthly statement shall include the value of work executed, valuation of Variations, Compensation Events, and the 80% of the value of the Material brought to the site for the permanent works, but not incorporated in such works.

56. Termination Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 56.2 (h)

(a) If the Actual Progress of the contractor at any given time, is behind the original programe by the maximum number of days for which the maximum amount of l liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the PCC.

58. Payment upon Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 58.2 Termination as sub clause 58.3

If the Contract is terminated by the Employer under the following exceptional event or circumstance, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractor’s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor’s costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less advance payments received up to the date of the certificate. (a) which is beyond a Party’s control, (b) which such Party could not reasonably have provided against before entering into the Contract, (c) which, having arisen, such Party could not reasonably have avoided or overcome, and (d) which is not substantially attributable to the other Party.

345

Section IX - Contract Forms

This Section contains forms which, once completed, will form part of the Contract. The forms for Performance Security and Advance Payment Security, when required, shall only be completed by the successful Bidder after contract award.

346

Table of Forms

Page Letter of Acceptance ...... 348

Contract Agreement ...... 350

Performance Security ...... 353

Advance Payment Security ...... 355

Form of Retention Money Guarantee ...... 357

347

Letter of Acceptance

348

Letter of Acceptance

…………………… (date)

To:…………………………

Subject:…………………….

This is to notify you that your Bid dated …………………for execution of the “ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).” Contract No. CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 for the Accepted Contract Amount of the equivalent of .,……………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………as corrected and modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by our Agency.

You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance with the Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose the of the Performance Security Form included in Section IX (Contract Forms) of the Bidding Document.

We accept that ______be appointed as the Adjudicator.

We do not accept that ______be appointed as the Adjudicator, and by sending a copy of this Letter of Acceptance to ______, the Appointing Authority, we are hereby requesting such Authority to appoint the Adjudicator in accordance with ITB 42.1 and GCC 23.1. Authorized Signature: ......

Name and Title of Signatory: ......

Name of Agency: ......

Attachment: Contract Agreement

349

Contract Agreement

350

Contract Agreement

THIS AGREEMENT made the ...... day of ...... , between

(hereinafter “the Employer”), of the one part, and

(hereinafter “the Contractor”), of the other part:

WHEREAS the Employer desires that the Works known as “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).” should be executed by the Contractor, and has accepted a Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of these Works and the remedying of any defects therein,

The Employer and the Contractor agree as follows:

1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.

2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other Contract documents.

(a) the Letter of Acceptance;

(b) the Bid;

(d) the Particular Conditions;

(e) the General Conditions;

(f) the Specification;

(g) the Drawings;

(h) the completed Schedules; and

(i) the Environmental Assessment Report.

3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as indicated in this Agreement, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to

351

execute the Works and to remedy defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.

4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

IN WITNESS, whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in accordance with the laws of Sri Lanka on the day, month and year indicated above.

Signed Signed by: by: for and on behalf of the Employer for and on behalf the Contractor

in the in the presence presence of: of: Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date

352

Performance Security

353

Performance Security

Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri Lanka

Date: ...... Performance Guarantee No.: ......

We have been informed that …………………………………………………………….. (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No:CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 dated with you, for the execution of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the Contract”). Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance guarantee is required.

At the request of the Contractor, we……………………………………………………… hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of………………………………………………………………………………… such sum being payable in the types and proportions of currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract, without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified therein.

This guarantee shall expire, no later than the ……………….mday of ……………… , and any demand for payment under it must be received by us at this office on or before that date. The Guarantor agrees to extension of this guarantee in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee. This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 758, except that subparagraph (ii) of Sub-article 20(a) is hereby excluded.

...... [Seal of Bank and Signature(s)]......

354

Advance Payment Security

355

Advance Payment Security

Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri Lanka

Date: ......

Advance Payment Guarantee No.: ......

We have been informed that……………………………………………………………… (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 dated ……………………. with you, for the execution of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the Contract”). Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an advance payment in the sum of …………………………………………………………………… is to be made against an advance payment guarantee. At the request of the Contractor, we………………………………………………………hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of………………………………………………………………………………….. upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Contractor used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in respect of the Works. The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of the advance payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim statements or payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copy of the interim payment certificate indicating that ninety (90) percent of the Contract Price has been certified for payment, or on the day of………………………………………… , whichever is earlier. Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that date. The Guarantor agrees to extension of this guarantee in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee. This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 758 ...... [Seal of Bank and Signature(s)]......

356

Form of Retention Money Guarantee

357

Form of Retention Money Guarantee

Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri Lanka Date …………………………………………… Retention Money Guarantee No: ………………………………………….

We have been informed that ………………………………………………………………. (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 date with you, the execution of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the contract”).

Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, when the works have been taken over and the first half of the Retention Money has been certified, the payment of the second half of the Retention Money may be made against a Retention Money guarantee.

At the request of the Contractor, we ………………………………………………………. hereby irrevocably under taken to pay you any some or sums not exceeding in total an amount of ………………………………………………………………………………… upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Contractor has not attended to the defects in accordance with the Contract.

This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, ……………….(28 Days after the end of the Defects Liability Period). Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that date.

……………………………………………………………… [Signature(s)]

358